JP2019084005A - Manufacturing method of baseboard case unit of game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a manufacturing method of a baseboard case unit of a game machine which can prevent illegal duplication.SOLUTION: A case main body is manufactured by molding having a main-body side model name engraved part 732 which is formed while protruding ahead of a main-body side adjacent face part 731, and a case lid is manufactured by molding having a lid-side model name engraved part 752 which is formed while protruding ahead of a lid-side adjacent face part 751. In a state that the case main body and the case lid are coupled to each other, and the main-body side adjacent face part 731 and the lid-side adjacent face part 751 adjoin each other, the main-body side model name engraved part 732 and the lid-side model name engraved part 752 adjoin each other, thus forming integrated engravement. Furthermore, by applying laser marking, marking parts (second to eighth marking parts 755B to 755H) having stamp shapes (shapes of numerical values) different from the integrated engravement formed by the main-body side model name engraved part 732 and the lid-side model name engraved part 752 are formed over the main-body side model name engraved part 732 and the lid-side model name engraved part 752.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 103

Description

  The invention described in the present specification (hereinafter referred to as "the present invention") is a method of manufacturing a substrate case unit used in a gaming machine such as a slot machine or a pachinko machine (including a casino machine in which a reel stop operation is not performed). About.

  A slot machine, which is a typical gaming machine, generally performs control related to the progress of a game using reels (for example, control of reel drive, control of role determination (control lottery), reception and payout of game media such as game medals, etc. Main control board (main control means) that performs control of transition of gaming state between multiple gaming states with different probability of role determination, etc., and purpose of game fun improvement etc. according to the game situation A sub control board (sub control means) for controlling various effects (image effects by an image display device, voice effects by a speaker device, etc.) is provided, and information transfer between both boards is performed by sub control from the main control board It is possible to do only one direction to the substrate. In addition, control boards, such as a main control board and a subcontrol board, are accommodated in a board case (for example, refer to the following patent documents 1).

  In the slot machine, generally, an effective line is set by inserting a prescribed number of game media, and a player performs a reel rotation start operation such as tilting a start lever to start a winning combination determination process. Any game role (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as a "role") or a loss is determined, and thereafter, a plurality of reels start to rotate. When a plurality of reels start to rotate and then reach a predetermined rotational speed, the reel rotation stop operation such as pressing the stop switch is activated, and the player performs the reel rotation stop operation separately for each reel. Will stop rotating sequentially.

  Usually, the rotation stop of the plurality of reels is controlled based on the timing of the reel rotation stop operation by the player and the determined role. That is, each reel is controlled to be able to be stopped at an arbitrary timing within a predetermined time (usually, a time during which 5 symbols can be moved at the maximum) from the timing at which the reel rotation stop operation is performed. The combination determined (decided) by the determination process (hereinafter referred to as “approval acceptable combination” as appropriate) is established as much as possible (the combination of symbols constituting the combination (corresponding symbol) is stopped and displayed on the effective line) The combination not determined (not won) by the combination determination process is not established (correspondence symbols are not displayed stopped on the effective line).

  Also, in the slot machine, in general, a re-play role (a role that enables the player to play the next game without inserting a new game medium although the game medium can not be acquired even if established) or a small role ( In addition to the normal winning combination called winning combination (winning combination) that can be obtained a predetermined number of gaming media at the time of establishment, special gaming conditions (for example, a predetermined small winning combination probability (winning probability) is usually There is a special part called "bonus part" which is triggered to be set higher than Usually, only a few of the symbol combinations of the symbol combination which define such special roles are arranged on each reel.

  For this reason, even when the special part is determined (winning), the player performs the reel rotation stop operation for each reel in anticipation of the timing at which the corresponding symbol can be stopped and displayed while determining the symbol to be rotationally displayed. If it is not possible (hereinafter, such an operation is referred to as “seeing”), it is difficult to establish a special part. However, if the special part is decided but it can not be established, the information indicating that the special part has been decided is carried over to the next game (hereinafter referred to as The opportunity to establish the determined special combination is secured, even for a player who is not good at watching the special combination, and is referred to as "carrying a special combination, carry over a special combination, etc." as appropriate.

  Further, in the conventional slot machine, a plurality of RT states (playing states) having different determination probabilities (reproduction probabilities) for the replay role (replay role) are provided, and predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, predetermined symbol It is generally known that transition to another RT state is triggered when the combination is stopped and displayed. The transition between such RT states is controlled in the main control board because it involves a change in the determination probability of the combination (replay combination). Further, a period in which the determination probability of the replay player combination is controlled to the RT state set to the highest may be referred to as a replay time.

  On the other hand, a game period (playing state) called AT (assist time) is set to notify information that allows the player to advantageously play a game, and a predetermined notification effect (assist effect) is set within this game period. It is also done. Such an AT may be set during a period (replay time) in which the probability of deciding on a replay role is controlled to the RT state set to the highest, and the AT during such a replay time is generally It is called ART (assist replay time). As an assist effect to be performed during AT, for example, when a small winning combination that can obtain game media is determined (winning), that is notified or the determined small winning combination is established (Correspondence Operation sequence of stop switches (hereinafter referred to as “pushing order”) indicating the operation sequence of stop switches (hereinafter referred to as “pushing order”) required to stop symbols on the effective line) It is known that an operation position (hereinafter referred to as a "push position") or the like indicating a rotation position of the stop switch should be indicated when the reel should be operated.

  In the past, slot machines (also called "sub-AT machines") that exclusively perform the above-mentioned control processing related to AT (also referred to as "AT-related control processing") by sub-control means were general. There has also been a problem in that the AT can be set forcibly by performing an illegal action (goto action). Recently, the AT related to the main control means which is more difficult to conduct an illegal action than the sub control means. There is also known a slot machine (also referred to as "main AT machine") which performs part of control processing. For example, the main control means exclusively performs the process relating to the setting of the AT and the process of determining the pushing order notified in the AT, etc., and the sub control means is mainly determined during the AT set by the main control means. A main AT machine is known that performs processing such as executing notification of the pressing order (assist effect). In such a main AT machine, various information related to the AT is managed by the main control means, and the information is appropriately transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means.

  In addition, when a special role is established or when an AT is set, a signal indicating that is given to an external device such as a history display device installed in a game arcade (hall) or a management computer (hall computer). It outputs (hereinafter such output signal is appropriately referred to as “outer end signal”), and based on this outer end signal, grasps the history such as the number of times the special combination is made or the set number of AT and displays it to the player It is also widely used to manage the ratio of the number of game media paid out to the number of game media inserted (payout rate).

  In addition, there is known a conventional slot machine in which a state in which execution of a predetermined control process related to the progress of a game is delayed for a predetermined time (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "freeze") is performed. This freeze is set on the main control board when, for example, indicating that a state advantageous to the player has occurred, thereby enhancing the player's expectation for the occurrence of the state of interest, etc. Often used for the purpose of enhancing interest. In addition, when such a freeze is set, an effect of driving the reel in a special mode (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “reel effect at freeze time” is appropriately executed) or a reel is played like a normal game in a slot machine It is also generally performed to execute game-like effects (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo game effects” as appropriate) performed by driving the.

  In addition, the conventional slot machine outputs (transmits) a signal (hereinafter referred to as a "test signal") for transmitting various information to a predetermined test apparatus for checking whether it conforms to legal standards etc. ) Is configured to The slot machine to be tested is configured to a specification (hereinafter referred to as a "test specification") provided with a test circuit for electrically connecting to a test apparatus. On the other hand, slot machines of the specifications (hereinafter referred to as "mass production specifications") sold to amusement arcades etc. have the same control program as those of the test specifications although they do not have test circuits, but they are determined in advance. A process for outputting a test signal is performed at a predetermined timing.

JP, 2011-78444, A

  In the conventional gaming machine, the substrate case is protected against unauthorized duplication by applying laser marking to the substrate case, etc. However, the countermeasure is insufficient.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a method of manufacturing a substrate case unit of a gaming machine capable of preventing unauthorized duplication.

  A method of manufacturing a substrate case unit of the following gaming machine according to the present invention has the following features. In the following description of the characteristic configuration, an example of the corresponding configuration in the embodiment described later is shown in parentheses.

  A method of manufacturing a substrate case unit of a gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a first case member (for example, case main body 721 in the ninth embodiment) and a second case member (for example, the first case member) which can be combined with the first case member. A game comprising a case lid 741 in the ninth embodiment, and a control board which is housed in a case formed by combining the first case member and the second case member and controls the operation of the gaming machine A method of manufacturing a substrate case unit of a second machine, which is formed on a surface of one side (for example, the front side in the ninth embodiment) of the first case member and is connected to the first case member; The first adjacent surface portion (for example, the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 in the ninth embodiment) adjacent to the one side surface, and the first marking portion (the first adjacent surface portion protruding to the one side) For example, the first case member is manufactured by molding so as to have the main body side model name marking portion 732) in the ninth embodiment, and the first case member is formed on the one side surface of the second case member A second adjacent surface portion (e.g., lid side adjacent surface portion 751 in the ninth embodiment) adjacent to the first adjacent surface portion of the first case member combined with the two case members, and the second adjacent surface portion on the one side The second case member is fabricated by molding so as to have a second marking portion (for example, the lid-side model name marking portion 752 in the ninth embodiment) formed to protrude, and the first case member and the first case member By combining the second case member and accommodating the control substrate in the case, the first adjacent surface portion and the second adjacent surface portion are adjacent to each other, whereby the first marking portion and the second printed portion are accommodated. Adjacent to the engraved part Forming an integral stamped Te, by laser marking, it is formed over a marking portion having the integral stamped different mark shapes and the second marking portion and the first marking portion.

  According to the method of manufacturing the substrate case unit of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent unauthorized copying.

FIG. 10 is a front view of the slot machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the said slot machine roughly. It is a figure which shows symbol arrangement | positioning of the reel of the said slot machine. It is a figure showing kind-1 of a game combination in the above-mentioned slot machine. It is a figure showing kind-2 of a game combination in the above-mentioned slot machine. It is a figure showing kind-3 of a game combination in the above-mentioned slot machine. It is a figure which shows the (A) kind-4 of a game combination in the said slot machine, and (B) specific symbol. It is a figure which shows the combination determination result number selection probability (re-playing combination * prize combination -1) in the said slot machine. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a winning combination determination result number selection probability (re-playing combination, winning combination-2) in the slot machine. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a winning combination determination result number selection probability (re-playing combination, winning combination-3) in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows (A) combination determination result number selection probability (re-playing combination * winning combination-4) and (B) combination determination result number selection probability (special combination) in the said slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the function of the said slot machine notionally. It is a figure which shows the relationship of each RT state in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship of each game mode in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of (A) AT lottery performed by the main control means of the said slot machine, (B) AT precursor G number lottery, and (C) pushing order hit game lottery. It is a figure which shows the pushing order instruction | command number in the said slot machine-corresponding pushing order-display content corresponding table. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a winning combination determination result number-pushing order instruction number correspondence table in the slot machine. (A) Display mode of push order instruction number A2 by WIN lamp, (B) Display mode of push order instruction number A2 by liquid crystal display device, (C) Display mode of push order instruction number A8 by WIN lamp, in the above slot machine (D) Display mode of push order instruction number A8 by liquid crystal display device, (E) Display mode of push order instruction number A10 by liquid crystal display device, (F) Mode of displaying push order instruction number in binary by the WIN lamp, G) It is a figure which shows the aspect of a change of the pushing order instruction | indication display by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the presentation group number-combination determination result number corresponding | compatible table in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the list table of the role determination result number for the mask process in the said slot machine. FIG. 17 is a view showing a list of push order instruction numbers that can be determined on the sub side in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the pushing order alerting | reporting timing in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows (A) pushing order alerting | reporting start timing in the said slot machine, (B) pushing order alerting | reporting start timing (modification), and (C) pushing order alerting | reporting start timing (another modification). It is a figure which shows the difference in the circuit structure of the test specification in the control board of the said slot machine, and mass production specification. It is a figure of (A) modification M1, (B) modification M2, (C) modification M3 which shows the difference in the circuit composition of the test specification in the control board of the above-mentioned slot machine, and mass production specification. It is a figure which shows the structure of the storage area in the said slot machine. (A) operation state flag storage area, (B) operation symbol display flag storage area, (C) winning / RP combination determination result number storage area, (D) combination determination result number storage area, (E) FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a push order instruction number storage area and (F) a winning information output period timer storage area. (A) test output port PO7 (at the time of winning / RP winning information output), (B) test output port PO7 (at the time of winning product winning information output), (C) test output port PO8 (at operation state) in the above slot machine (When outputting information). It is a figure which shows the (A) prize / RP prize information storage area in the said slot machine, and the (B) bonus item prize information storage area. It is a figure which shows (A) stop acceptance designation table T1 in the said slot machine, and (B) stop acceptance designation table T2. It is a figure showing (A) winning information output timing in the above-mentioned slot machine, (B) replay game operation state flag set timing, and (C) BB / RB operation state flag set timing. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of (A) test specification determination preparation processing, (B) test specification determination preparation processing (Modification J1), and (C) test specification determination preparation processing (Modification J2) in the slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of game progress control processing in the above-mentioned slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of game start processing in the above-mentioned slot machine. Each flow of (A) game mode 0 (lever) process, (B) game mode 1 (lever) process, (C) game mode 2 (lever) process, and (D) push order designation number setting process in the above slot machine It is a flowchart shown. (A) game mode 3 (lever) process, (B) game mode 4 (lever) process, (C) game mode 5 (lever) process, (D) game mode 6 (lever) process, (E) in the slot machine ) Is a flow chart showing each flow of the game mode 7 (lever) processing. It is a flow chart which shows each flow of (A) symbol stop test signal output processing and (B) symbol stop test signal output in the above-mentioned slot machine. (A) Reel rotation start preparation processing in the above slot machine, (B) reel rotation start preparation processing (Modification K1), (C) Reel rotation start preparation processing (Modification K2), (D) Reel rotation start preparation processing ( It is a flowchart which shows each flow of modification K3). The respective flows of (A) Reel rotation start preparation processing (Modification K4), (B) Reel rotation start preparation processing (Modification K5), and (C) Reel rotation start preparation processing (Modification K6) in the above slot machine are shown. It is a flowchart. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of game end check processing in the above-mentioned slot machine. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of (A) BB operation management processing, (B) RB operation management processing, (C) waiting time waiting processing, and (D) interrupt waiting processing in the slot machine. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow of RT transition processing in the slot machine. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow of (A) game mode 0 (all stop) processing, (B) game mode 1 (all stop) processing, and (C) game mode 2 (all stop) processing in the slot machine. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of (A) game mode 3 (all stop) processing, (B) game mode 4 (all stop) processing, and (C) game mode 5 (all stop) processing in the slot machine. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow of (A) game mode 6 (all stop) processing and (B) game mode 7 (all stop) processing in the slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows each flow of the example of a partial change of (A) timer interruption processing in the above-mentioned slot machine, and (B) timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of test signal etc. output processing in the said slot machine. 55 is a flowchart showing a flow of test signal etc. output processing (Modified Example L1) in the slot machine. 55 is a flowchart showing a flow of test signal etc. output processing (Modification L2) in the slot machine. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of (A) program start processing, (B) sub main loop processing, and (C) power-off processing in the slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows each flow of processing at the time of (A) 1 command processing in the above-mentioned slot machine, and (B) start lever. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of the process at the time of (A) 1st trunk stop acceptance in the said slot machine, the process at the time of (B) 2nd trunk stop acceptance, and the (C) 3rd trunk stop acceptance. . It is a figure which shows a part of circuit structure of (A) test specification in the control board of the slot machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention, and a part of circuit composition of (B) mass production specification. (A) part of the process performed at the start of the game in the slot machine according to the second embodiment, (B) part of the process performed at the time of timer interruption, (C) part of the process performed at the time of accepting the start lever operation It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a test signal etc. output process in the slot machine which concerns on the said 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 35 shows (A) lighting timing pattern 1 and (B) lighting timing pattern 2 of the display lamp in the slot machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the (A) lighting timing pattern 3 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on the said 3rd Embodiment, and the (B) lighting timing pattern 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows the (A) lighting timing pattern 5 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on the said 3rd Embodiment, and the (B) lighting timing pattern 6. FIG. It is a figure which shows (A) lighting timing pattern 7, (B) lighting timing pattern 8 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on the said 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the (A) lighting timing pattern 9 and the (B) lighting timing pattern 10 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on the said 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning of the electronic component of the main control board in the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the height of the electronic component arrange | positioned on the main control board in the slot machine which concerns on the said 4th Embodiment. In the gaming machine (slot machine) according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, (A) RAM area of pattern 1, (B) RAM area of pattern 2, (C) RAM area of pattern 3, (D) pattern 4 It is a figure which shows a RAM area | region which continues a RAM area | region, the RAM area | region of (E) pattern 5, and the (F) ROM area | region. It is a figure which shows the address map of RAM in the game machine (slot machine) which concerns on the said 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the reel control in the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. (A) A flowchart showing a processing procedure when reel rotation failure occurs during a constant speed state of reel rotation in the reel control in the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment, (B) Rotation of reel in a speed increasing state It is a flowchart which shows a processing procedure when a defect generate | occur | produces, (C) It is a flowchart which shows a processing procedure when a power failure generate | occur | produces in a rotation acceleration state and rotation failure of a reel generate | occur | produces. A flowchart showing a processing procedure when all the turning cylinders stop normally after reel selection in the reel control in the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment, and (B) after reception of the third stop operation It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence in the case of power failure | damage generation, (C) It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence in case rotation defect in rotation generate | occur | produces after 3rd stop operation reception. This is a view showing a setting example of the number of wins of a replay role and the payout rate in a slot machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows (A) ball-out rate simulation result in the slot machine which concerns on the said 7th Embodiment, the winning probability of (B) combination, and the number of payouts. In the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment, (A) the setting contents of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and (B) the setting contents of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20 FIG. In the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment, (A) the setting contents of BB2 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, (B) the setting contents of BB2 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20, (C) It is a figure which shows the setting content of MB1. FIG. 25 is a schematic view of a slot machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the alerting image in said other embodiment. (A) in the said other embodiment is a figure which shows the alerting image in the case of displaying on a small image display apparatus, (b) shows the alerting image in the case of displaying on a large image display apparatus. (A) in the said other embodiment is a figure which shows the image display timing in case a game medal is provided, (b) is a figure which shows the image display timing in the case where a game medal is not provided. (A) in the said other embodiment is a display image at the time of winning a cherry combination in a normal game, (b) is a figure which shows a display image at the time of winning a push order bell combination by AT preparation game. (A) in the said other embodiment is a timing chart in the specification which a several stop switch can not operate simultaneously, (b) is a timing chart in the specification which a several stop switch can operate simultaneously. It is a timing chart which shows each operation timing within the minimum game time in the above-mentioned other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the display timing of the alerting picture in the above-mentioned other embodiments. It is a timing chart which shows another example of the display timing of the alerting picture in the above-mentioned other embodiments. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed in the order of (a), (b), (c) in said other embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the image displayed in the order of (a), (b), (c) in said other embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display position of the alerting image in said other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of the image displayed in the order of (a), (b), (c) in said other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the attention awakening image display timing at the time of error generating in the above-mentioned other embodiments. It is a timing chart which shows another example of the attention awakening image display timing at the time of error generating in the above-mentioned other embodiments. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the attention awakening image display timing at the time of the electric power supply stop in the above-mentioned other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a cautions call image display timing at the time of production switch operation in the other above-mentioned embodiment. The circuit structure between the main control board of the slot machine concerning the 8th embodiment of the present invention and a game medal payout device is shown roughly, (A) is a basic mode and (B) is a mode provided with a relay board. FIG. The relation between the state of the payout sensor and the sensor signal level in the slot machine according to the eighth embodiment is shown, in which (A) shows the payout sensor state P01, (B) shows the payout sensor state P02, and (C) shows the payout sensor state P03. , (D) is a figure corresponding to a non-energized state. In the slot machine according to the eighth embodiment, the transition of the payout sensor state in the process of paying one game medal, and the relationship between the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal in each payout sensor state. is there. In the slot machine according to the eighth embodiment, a situation where a non-energization error occurs and a timing at which a game is stopped is shown. (A) is a situation Q01, and (B) is a diagram corresponding to the situation Q02. The slot machine according to the eighth embodiment shows the other situation in which the non-energization error has occurred and the timing when the game is stopped, wherein (A) is a situation Q03 and (B) is a situation corresponding to the situation Q04. 51 is a flowchart showing a flow of (A) game progression processing, (B) error processing, (C) display determination processing, and (D) interrupt processing in the slot machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of a substrate case unit in a slot machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the main control board in the slot machine concerning a 9th embodiment of the above. It is a perspective view of the case main body in the slot machine concerning a 9th embodiment of the above. It is a perspective view of the case lid in the slot machine concerning a 9th embodiment of the above. FIG. 40 is a perspective view of a crimping member and a main body side guard member in the slot machine according to the ninth embodiment. In the slot machine according to the ninth embodiment, (A) is a perspective view of a sealing cover and a cutter member, and (B) is a perspective view of a lid-side guard member. It is a front view which shows the state before performing the laser marking of the substrate case unit in the slot machine which concerns on the said 9th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing along arrow HH in FIG. FIG. 70 is an enlarged view showing a main body side adjacent surface portion and a lid side adjacent surface portion in the slot machine according to the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the manufacturing method of the substrate case unit in the slot machine which concerns on the said 9th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, each embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to the above-mentioned drawing.
Note that "combination determination processing" in the following description refers to a plurality of combination determination result numbers set in advance (configured by one or more game combinations or loses (except when no loss is set)) And means a selection act (also referred to as a role lottery) such as a lottery performed using an electronic device or the like in order to randomly select one or more combination determination result numbers. Here, the winning combination determination result number means one or a plurality of gaming combinations that are permitted to be established in the game in which the specific winning combination determination result number is selected (hereinafter referred to as "success enabling combination", "winning combination", etc.) To define.

  In addition, “completion” in the case of stating “game role is established” and “establishment of game role” means a game combination corresponding to a selected combination determination result number (a game combination with a payout of game medals ( The symbol combinations (correspondence symbols) that make up a winning combination such as a small combination or the like or a gaming combination (replay combination or special combination) without payout are in a predetermined stop mode (for example, on the effective line described later) Is used as a concept to indicate that it is displayed in However, for the timing of establishment, for example, when the reel stop operation is performed at the timing at which the corresponding symbol of the gaming combination can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, the corresponding symbol of the gaming combination is stopped on the effective line At the time of display, it is possible to set appropriate timing, such as when the slot machine recognizes that the corresponding symbol of the game player has been stopped and displayed on the activated line, or when the result of identification is stored in the storage area. .

  Further, in the following description, among the game medal insertion operation (maintenance operation) to the medal insertion slot 21 described later by the player and the credited (reserved) game medal, a provision necessary for playing a game. A pressing operation of the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 for providing a number of game medals for gaming is collectively referred to as a bet operation. In addition, the bet operation, the pressing operation of the settlement switch 24 described later by the player, the tilting operation of the start lever (also referred to as a "start switch") 25 and the pressing operation of the stop switches 26a, 26b and 26c are collectively referred to as a game. It is called operation. Generally, "insertion" in a slot machine is used in the sense of "inserting a game medal into the slot machine" and in the case of "serving a game medal" in the meaning of "providing a game". There is. In the following description, the word "input" is basically used in the former meaning, and the word "bet" is used in the latter meaning.

  Further, in the following description, the “number of payouts” of the game medals means the number of game medals scheduled to be paid out in one game. In the act of paying out game medals, an act of actually paying out game medals from the slot machine to the outside (hereinafter referred to as “actual pay out” as appropriate) and a game medal stored in the slot machine, There is an act of increasing a numerical value stored electromagnetically (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “storage addition payout”).

  Further, in the following description, the “total number of game medals acquired” means the difference between the total number of game medals paid out and the total number of game medals bet in a predetermined period (optionally settable). Do. However, it is also possible to set the total number of gaming medals paid out in a predetermined period as the total number of acquisition here.

  Further, in the following description, "freeze" refers to a state in which execution of a predetermined control process related to the progress of a game is delayed for a predetermined time. In the present embodiment, an RB operation end standby time described later is set as this freeze every time the RB operation (RB game) is completed during the BB operation described later. While freeze is set, the game operation by the player can not be effectively accepted.

First Embodiment
The basic configuration of the slot machine according to the first embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.
<Appearance of slot machine>
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a front door 2 attached to the front of the main body case so as to be openable and closable. Upper panel assembly 10, middle panel assembly 20, lower panel assembly 30, and pan assembly 40 are attached.

  At the center of the upper panel assembly 10, the display screen 11a of the image display device 11 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side is disposed to face the front, and at the periphery thereof, The effect lamp 12, the second effect lamps 13a and 13b, and the third effect lamps 14a and 14b are disposed. In addition, a pair of upper speakers 15a and 15b are disposed on the lower left and right of the display screen 11a.

  At the central portion of the middle panel assembly 20, a display window W is provided which faces the surface of the three reels 3a, 3b and 3c arranged side by side in the main housing, and below the display window W The medal insertion slot 21 for inserting game medals (game media), 1-BET switch 22 for betting one game medal within the credited range, maximum number of bets allowed (for example, 3) The MAX-BET switch 23 for betting game medals at one time, the clearing switch 24 for paying out the betted game medals and / or the credited game medals, and the rotation start of all reels 3a, 3b, 3c Start lever (start switch) 25 operated during operation, and three stop switches 26 for individually stopping the rotation of the respective reels 3a, 3b and 3c. , 26b, 26c (the left stop switch 26a corresponds to the reel 3a, the middle stop switch 26b corresponds to the reel 3b, the right stop switch 26c corresponds to the reel 3c), and the medal insertion slot 21 A reject switch 27 or the like is provided for returning game medals that have been inserted and accumulated.

  When the inserted game medal is effectively accepted, the inside of the medal insertion slot 21 does not accept the inserted game medal (which passes through the hopper 50 described later) through which the game medal passes. It branches into a return passage (which leads to a game medal payout opening 41 described later) through which the game medal passes, and a blocker 48 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the branch portion. The blocker 48 guides the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the receiving passage during the period when the inserted game medals are effectively accepted, and is inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 during the other periods. The reception passage and the return passage can be selectively made one open and the other closed so as to guide the game medals to the return passage. In the following description, when the blocker 48 is in the ON state, it indicates that the gaming medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 is guided to the receiving passage (game medal acceptable state), and when the blocker 48 is in the OFF state, the medal is inserted. A state where the game medal inserted into the mouth 21 is guided to the return passage (a game medal unacceptable state) is shown.

  Further, inside the medal insertion slot 21, three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b and 28c (see FIG. 2) for detecting game medals are provided. The inserted medal sensor 28a detects that a game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 21, and on the passage where the inserted game medal flows down, it is on the upstream side of the position where the blocker 48 is installed. It is installed at the position. The inserted medal sensor 28b detects that the game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 is guided to the receiving passage and effectively received, and is downstream of the position at which the blocker 48 is installed (described later) Is disposed at the position of the hopper 50). The inserted medal sensor 28c detects that the game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 has passed the branch between the receiving passage and the return passage, and the vicinity of the branched portion (position where the blocker 48 is installed) It is arranged at a position slightly closer to the inserted medal sensor 28b).

  When both of the inserted medal sensor 28a and the inserted medal sensor 28b detect a game medal, it means that the game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 and the inserted game medal has been effectively accepted. On the other hand, when the inserted medal sensor 28a detects a game medal but the inserted medal sensor 28b does not detect a game medal, the game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 21, but the inserted game medal is effectively accepted. It means being returned without. Also, when the three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c detect the passage of game medals in an order different from the predetermined order (the order of 28a, 28c, 28b) or when some of the inserted medal sensors pass the game medals Is not detected, this means that abnormal passage such as backflow of game medals has occurred.

  The display window W is configured such that, when all three reels 3a to 3c stop, three symbols for each reel, nine symbols in total, are visible from the player. The pay line 29 connecting the symbol display areas of the lower part of the reel 3a, the middle part of the reel 3b and the upper part of the reel 3c to the upper right is a pay line activated by betting a prescribed number of game medals The presence or absence of a game combination is determined by the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the pay line 29. Hereinafter, the activated pay lines 29 will be referred to as “active lines 29” as appropriate.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, various display lamps constituted by LED lamps and the like are arranged. In this embodiment, MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a, BET number indicator lamp 46b, insertable indicator lamp 46c, game start indicator lamp 46d, replay indicator lamp 46e, status indicator lamp 46f, number indicator lamp as indicator lamps It has 46 g, the number-of-retentions indicator lamp 46 h, and the number-of-payouts indicator lamp 46 j. These display lamps are configured to be controlled by a main control board 60 (main control means 100) described later.

  The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a is lit under the condition where the gaming medals can be bet and is disposed inside the MAX-BET switch 23. When lit, the MAX-BET switch 23 is partially or entirely It is supposed to light up. The other display lamps are disposed on the side or lower of the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

  The bet number display lamp 46b (hereinafter also referred to as "BET lamp 46b") displays the number of bet game medals, and is a 1-BET display which is lit when one or more bet game medals are placed. It comprises a lamp 46bA, a 2-BET indicator lamp 46bB which is lit in the case of two or more sheets, and a MAX-BET indicator lamp 46bC which is lit in the case of three sheets. The insertable display lamp 46c is turned on under the condition that game medals can be inserted, and the game start display lamp 46d is turned on under the condition that the start lever 25 can be operated to start the game. It is The replay indicator lamp 46e is turned on when a replay player combination described later is established in any game and a game medal is automatically betted by an automatic bet process described later.

  The status display lamp 46f is, for example, turned on when an AT described later is set and turned off when completed, and the number display lamp 46g indicates the number of AT games described later when an AT is set. The initial value (“50”) of is displayed, and then the display value of the number of AT games is decremented by 1 every game (except during BB operation described later), and when the number of AT games is determined to be added The number of additions is added and displayed. The stored number display lamp 46h (hereinafter also referred to as "CRE lamp 46h") displays the number of game tokens stored (credited) in seven segments, and the number-of-payouts display lamp 46j (hereinafter also referred to as "WIN lamp 46j") ) Is a seven-segment display of the number of game medals to be paid out when a small winning combination described later is established.

  The WIN lamp 46 j is also configured to display a letter (alphabet) indicating the type of an error when an abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. The errors set in the present embodiment include a hopper empty error in which the game medal in the hopper 50 is empty, a game medal payout error in which the game medal is paid out at timing other than the original payout timing, and the inside of the medal insertion slot 21 Such as game medal retention error in which game medals get stuck, and game medals progress in a direction different from the original route, such as game medals invading from a position different from the medal insertion slot 21; There is an auxiliary storage full error in which the medal is full, a rotation stop error in which the reels 3a, 3b and 3c do not stop at predetermined positions, and a setting value error in which setting values are out of a predetermined numerical range.

  Furthermore, the WIN lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a push order number described later, which indicates the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. Hereinafter, the WIN lamp 46 j at the time of displaying the push order number will be referred to as “main side push order indicator” as appropriate.

  A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the central portion of the lower panel assembly 30, and decorative lamps 32a and 32b are disposed at the left and right ends thereof. In addition, on the back side of the lower panel cover 31, a semitransparent lower panel base and lower panel illumination light (both not shown) provided with a predetermined pattern are attached, and the lower panel illumination light is turned on. By doing this, the design of the lower panel base is configured to illuminate from the rear surface side.

  The above described tray assembly 40 has a game medal payout opening 41 for paying out game medals and a game medal storage tray 42 for storing game medals so as to face the game medal payout opening 41. An ashtray 43 is provided on the left of the game medal storage tray 42. In addition, on the left and right of the game medal payout opening 41, a speaker port 45a formed of a large number of small holes facing the front of a pair of lower speakers 44a and 44b (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side of the tray assembly 40. , 45b are formed.

  Furthermore, a hopper 50 (see FIG. 2) for paying out game medals obtained when a predetermined prize mode is configured as a result of the game is provided in the main housing, and the hopper 50 is provided. A medal detection unit 51 (see FIG. 2) for detecting game medals is provided. In addition, the hopper 50 has a function of physically accommodating the game medals inserted and effectively accepted. Further, an auxiliary storage 85 (see FIG. 2) for storing game medals overflowing from the hopper 50 is provided at a position near the hopper 50, and the auxiliary storage 85 is full (from the auxiliary storage 85). A fullness detection unit 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided to detect whether or not the game medal may overflow.

<Reel>
The respective reels 3a, 3b and 3c are configured to rotate by driving of stepping motors 35a, 35b and 35c (see FIG. 2). Each of the reels 3a, 3b and 3c is made of a translucent member, and on the outer peripheral surface thereof, a translucent reel tape is displayed with a plurality of kinds of symbols (see FIG. 3). It is pasted. Further, back lamps 38a, 38b and 38c (see FIG. 2) are disposed on the inner surface side of the respective reels 3a, 3b and 3c, and the display windows are turned on by lighting the back lamps 38a, 38b and 38c. The area of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c facing in W is entirely illuminated from the inner surface side, or a predetermined symbol combination displayed on each reel 3a, 3b, 3c in a stopped state (for example, on the effective line 29 It is configured to illuminate only a partial region of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c so as to make the corresponding symbols etc. of the game players lined up on a pay line different from that on the pay line 29 stand out.

<Basic operation to play a game>
In order to play a game with the slot machine 1, first, bet by actually inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot 21 or operating either the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 and the range of credits The bet line 29 is activated among the plurality of pay lines by betting a predetermined number of game medals therein. In the present embodiment, the specified number of game medals required to activate the pay line 29 is set to 3 in any of the non-RT and RT1 to RT5 gaming states described later. However, the prescribed number is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as setting the prescribed number to a different value according to the RT state. Further, the pay line to be activated may be changed according to the bet number of the game medals.

  Next, when the player operates the start lever 25, the number of bets is determined (the betted game medals are used for the game), and the combination determination processing described later is performed, and then the minimum game time is determined. After confirming that it has elapsed, the reels 3a to 3c start rotating, and a plurality of types of symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 3a to 3c move up and down in the display window W (usually from top to bottom) It is displayed moving. Then, when the rotation of the reels 3a to 3c reaches a predetermined speed and becomes constant speed rotation, the respective stop switches 26a to 26c are activated (the operation of the stop switch can be effectively accepted), and the player can stop the stop switch 26a. When is operated, the rotation of the reel 3a is stopped, and when the stop switch 26b is operated, the rotation of the reel 3b is stopped, and when the stop switch 26c is operated, the rotation of the reel 3c is stopped.

  Here, when the symbol combination stop-displayed on the activated line 29 is a predetermined winning mode (corresponding symbol of a game player who can obtain a game medal), the number corresponding to each winning mode Game medals are paid out by the hopper 50 or added as credits.

<Connection between control board and each device>
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2 as main control boards for controlling the slot machine 1, three control boards of a main control board 60, a sub main control board 70A, and a sub sub control board 70B are provided The main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B are collectively referred to as a sub control board 70). The main control (including drive control of reels 3a to 3c and determination processing of winnings etc.) related to the progress of the game is performed by the control circuit disposed on the main control board 60, and lighting by lamps such as back lamps 38a to 38c The control and the like are configured to be performed by a control circuit disposed on the sub main control board 70A. Further, the effect image display control by the image display device 11 and the sound generation control from the speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b are mainly performed by a control circuit disposed on the sub-sub control board 70B. There is. Further, information can be transmitted between the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70 only in one direction from the main control board 60 to the sub main control board 70A, and the sub main control board 70A and the sub sub Communication of information with the control board 70B can be performed bidirectionally.

  The main control board 60 includes a main CPU 61 that performs various arithmetic processing related to games, a ROM 62 that is a read only storage device storing control programs and the like, and a RAM 63 that is a storage device that can write and read information. By arranging each drive circuit and the like according to the control program stored in the ROM 62, control relating to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 is performed. The ROM 62 and the RAM 63 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to be able to hold stored information even when power is not supplied.

  The main CPU 61 is used for a clock pulse generator 64 for generating a drive pulse, a frequency divider 65 for dividing the drive pulse generated by the clock pulse generator 64, and a combination determination process (lottery draw) and the like. A random number generator 66 for generating random numbers, and a sampling circuit 67 for sampling random numbers generated by the random number generator 66 and performing a lottery are connected. The clock pulse generator 64 and the frequency divider 65 are configured to also function as an interval timer for causing the main CPU 61 to interrupt at predetermined time intervals. The main CPU 61 is configured to execute predetermined interrupt processing or update and reset clock data of the set various timers in accordance with a pulse (clock signal) from the interval timer. Further, the main CPU 61 transmits signals to the motor drive circuit 36a, the display lamp control circuit 47, the hopper drive circuit 52 and the sub control board 70 through the interface circuit 68, and the reel position detection circuits 37a and 37b. 37c, the payout detection signal circuit 53 and the storage state signal circuit 87 are received.

  Here, the motor drive circuit 36a is a circuit for performing rotation / stop control of the stepping motors 35a, 35b, 35c for rotationally driving the reels 3a, 3b, 3c, respectively, and the display lamp control circuit 47 is described above. It is a circuit for controlling various display lamps. Further, the reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, 37c detect the rotational positions of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c based on detection signals from reel sensors (not shown) installed on the reels 3a, 3b, 3c, respectively. The detection circuits 37a correspond to the reels 3a, the detection circuits 37b correspond to the reels 3b, and the detection circuits 37c correspond to the reels 3c. The hopper driving circuit 52 is a circuit for driving the hopper 50 to pay out gaming medals when a winning combination such as a small winning combination is established, and the payout detection signal circuit 53 receives game medals from the hopper 50. This circuit is a circuit for transmitting a payout detection signal to the main control board 60 when the medal detection unit 51 detects that the payout has been made. Furthermore, the storage state signal circuit 87 is a circuit that transmits a storage state signal indicating whether or not the auxiliary storage 85 is full, to the main control board 60 according to the detection result of the full detection unit 86. .

  Further, power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the slot machine 1 through the main control board 60. A power switch 81, a reset switch 82 and a setting key type switch 83 are connected to the power supply unit 80, and signals from these switches are configured to be transmitted to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. ing. Furthermore, the main CPU 61 is configured to receive a signal from the setting change switch 84 via the interface circuit 68.

  The power switch 81 receives power on / off operations from the power supply 80 to the slot machine 1. The reset switch 82 removes the cause of the error when a predetermined error occurs in the slot machine 1. It is a switch operated by a game clerk or the like when the runout error is eliminated. As the reset switch 82 is operated, the information on the occurrence of an error stored in the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70 is cleared, and accordingly, the processing for eliminating the error is performed in the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70. To be executed. Further, the setting key type switch 83 is a switch operated when performing setting confirmation and setting change such as a winning combination determination probability (winning probability of a gaming combination), etc. The setting change switch 84 sets a combination determination probability etc. For example, it is a switch for changing in six steps.

  When the front door 2 is open (hereinafter referred to as the “door open state”) and the slot machine 1 is supplied with power (the power switch 81 is on), the setting key type switch 83 is operated to be on By this, the setting can be confirmed. When the door is open and power is not supplied to the slot machine 1 (power switch 81 is off), the setting key type switch 83 is operated to be on and the power switch 81 is kept on as it is. The setting can be changed by operating to the state (power is supplied to the slot machine 1). The setting key type switch 83 can be switched between the ON state and the OFF state by inserting a predetermined key member (setting key) into a predetermined locking member provided on the main body side and rotating the same. There is. In addition, setting confirmation and setting change can not be executed in a state in which a game is being executed (in a state where a game medal is bet (including a case where an automatic bet is made) or a state in which a reel is rotating). It is possible to execute only in the game standby state.

  The power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the sub main control substrate 70A through the main control substrate 60, and is further supplied to the sub control sub substrate 70B through the sub main control substrate 70A (power supply device 80 Power may be supplied directly to the sub main control board 70A and the sub sub control board 70B). A supply voltage monitoring circuit that monitors the supply state of voltage on the circuit that supplies power from the power supply device 80 to the main control board 60 and on the circuit that supplies power to the sub main control board 70A via the main control board 60 (Not shown) are provided respectively. Each supply voltage monitoring circuit determines that the power is shut off when the supply voltage decreases to a predetermined voltage value, and outputs a power shutoff detection signal to the main CPU 61 and a sub main CPU 71 described later. In addition, when each supply voltage monitoring circuit returns the supply voltage to a predetermined voltage value (a value (for example, a high value) different from the voltage value for the power interruption determination may be the same value). It is determined that the power is turned on, and a power on detection signal is output to the main CPU 61 and the sub main CPU 71. The voltage value when detecting the power supply interruption of main control substrate 60 is set to a value higher than the voltage value when the power supply interruption of sub main control substrate 70A is detected, and is earlier than sub main control substrate 70A. The main control board 60 is configured to perform a process (power-off process) programmed to be executed when the power is shut off (the same may be applied to power-on).

  Further, in the main CPU 61, the reel stop signal circuit 91, the start lever 25, the inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c, and the 1-BET switch 22 connected to the switch substrate 90 or mounted on the switch substrate 90. The signals from the MAX-BET switch 23 and the clearing switch 24 are input through the interface circuit 68.

  Further, a blocker 48 is connected to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68, and the blocker 48 is configured to be ON / OFF controlled. In the following description, a signal for ON / OFF controlling the blocker 48 is appropriately referred to as a “blocker signal”. Further, although not shown, the slot machine 1 is provided with a door sensor for detecting the open / close state of the front door 2, and a signal from this door sensor is inputted to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. It has become so. The main CPU 61 is configured to determine whether the front door 2 is in a closed state (hereinafter referred to as “door closed state”) or an open state (door open state) based on a signal from the door sensor.

  Although not shown, when the main CPU 61 is in a predetermined gaming state (for example, an AT or bonus gaming state described later), the main CPU 61 can connect the external connection terminal board to the data counter, the hall computer, etc. A predetermined signal (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as an “outer end signal”) is output via the outer end signal, so that the number of times the predetermined gaming state is set can be managed or presented to the player. It is configured.

  On the other hand, in the sub main control board 70A, a sub main CPU 71 which mainly performs various arithmetic processing relating to management of effects, a ROM 72 which is a read only storage device storing control programs and the like, and writing and reading of information are possible. The RAM 73, which is a simple storage device, is disposed, and the drive circuits and the like operate according to the control program stored in the ROM 72, thereby controlling control over image effects and sound effects in the slot machine 1, and control over lamp effects. Etc. is supposed to be done. The ROM 72 and the RAM 73 are nonvolatile storage devices, and are configured to be able to hold stored information even when power is not supplied. In addition, a clock pulse generator and a frequency divider (not shown) are connected to the sub main CPU 71, and the clock pulse generator and the frequency divider generate an interrupt to the sub main CPU 71 at predetermined time intervals. It is also configured to function as an interval timer for causing The sub main CPU 71 is configured to execute predetermined interrupt processing or update and reset clock data of various timers set according to a pulse (clock signal) from the interval timer.

  The sub main CPU 71 is configured to receive various signals from the main control board 60 via the interface circuit 74 and transmit the signals to the lamp control circuit 18. Here, the lamp control circuit 18 is a circuit that controls the lighting of the lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c.

  The sub main CPU 71 is configured to transmit various signals to the sub sub control board 70B via the interface circuit 74 and to receive various signals from the sub sub control board 70B. Hereinafter, a signal transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub main control board 70A will be referred to as a "control command", and a signal transmitted from the sub main control board 70A to the sub sub control board 70B will be referred to as a "effect command". Further, a signal transmitted from the sub-sub control board 70B to the sub main control board 70A is referred to as a "state command".

  The sub-sub control board 70B is capable of writing and reading out information, such as a sub-sub-CPU 75 that performs various arithmetic processing mainly related to control of image effects and sound effects, ROM 76 which is a read-only storage device storing control programs and the like. A RAM 77, which is a simple storage device, is disposed, and the drive circuits and the like operate according to the control program stored in the ROM 76, whereby control relating to image rendering and sound rendering is performed. The ROM 76 and the RAM 77 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to be able to hold stored information even when power is not supplied.

  The sub-sub CPU 75 receives the notification signal or the effect signal from the sub main control board 70A via the interface circuit 78, and transmits the signal to the display device control circuit 16 and the speaker control circuit 17, and the sub main control board It is configured to send a status signal to 70A. The display device control circuit 16 is a circuit that controls the image display device 11 to display a predetermined effect image, and the speaker control circuit 17 controls the type and volume of sound etc. generated from the speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b. It is a circuit to control. The image display device 11 is also configured to function as a push display (hereinafter referred to as “sub side push order display” as appropriate) for displaying the operation order (pushing order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. There is.

<Reel symbol arrangement>
In the present embodiment, the symbols displayed by the respective reels 3a to 3c are arranged as shown in FIG. 3 ("left reel", "middle reel" and "right reel" in FIG. 3 are reels 3a, Represents 3b and 3c respectively). That is, in each of the reels 3a to 3c, "character", "seven", "bar", "cherry", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", "bell", "replay A", "replay B" and A predetermined number of 10 types of "blank" symbols are arranged. In addition, although a "blank" may show that it is arbitrary symbols which do not constitute a game combination, in this embodiment, these are set as a pattern which constitutes a game combination. Hereinafter, the reels 3a, 3b and 3c may be referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel, respectively.

<Type of player>
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 to 7, one special role (BB role), 13 replay roles of 1 to 13 replay roles, and 24 small portions of 1 to 24 small roles. A total of 38 game roles with the role are set, and combinations of symbols (corresponding symbols) for establishing each game role, the number of payouts of game medals when the game role is established, etc. are as shown in FIGS. It is set to.

  As for BB role (BB is abbreviation of big bonus), the corresponding design “character character character” (the name of the symbol which constitutes the game combination in order of reel 3a, 3b and 3c. Same in the following) is effective When the stop display is shown on the line 29, the game medal is not paid out, and the RT state described later is set to RT5 (in BB) from the next game, and the bonus game (BB game) is started there. It has become a player who shows that. The BB game started by the establishment of the BB role is ended by the payout of the game medal of more than 450 (the numerical value may be changed as appropriate). In addition, during the BB game, the RB game (RB stands for regular bonus) is internally and continuously executed (the RB game in the BB game will be described later).

  In the present embodiment, only the BB combination is provided as a special combination, but as another special combination, an RB combination or an MB combination (MB stands for middle bonus) may be provided. Then, when the RB role is established, the RB game as a bonus game from the next game is set to be started (an RB game to be performed separately from the BB game unlike the RB game in the BB game described above). Then, the MB game may be set to start as a bonus game from the next game. In this case, the RB game is ended, for example, when a small winning combination is established a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) or a predetermined number of times (for example, 12 times) of the game is ended. The process may be ended when a predetermined number (for example, more than 200) of game medals are paid out. Also, a plurality of special roles may be provided.

  A game player (replay role) who is permitted to perform the next game without reducing the number of game medals held by the player, although there is no payout of game medals when the replay roles 1 to 13 are established. It is provided as The re-playing roles 1, 2 are not set as an RT state transition trigger or the like, which will be described later, and are among the re-playing roles that have the greatest opportunity to be established (in particular, the re-play role 1). From this point, the players of re-playing roles 1 and 2 are appropriately referred to as “normal RP” (RP stands for replay).

  As shown in the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3, the symbol “Bell / watermelon B” (“/” means “or”) on the left reel, which constitutes the replay role 1, symbol “Replay A on the middle reel And the symbol "Bell" on the right reel are arranged every five symbols or less on each reel. Thereby, when the replay player 1 wins, the corresponding symbol "Bell / Watermelon B · Replay A · Bell" is the execution timing (effective of each reel rotation stop operation (operation of the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c)) Regardless of the timing received at the same time, it is possible to display a stop on the valid line 29 (hereinafter referred to as “pull-in” as appropriate). The player who can pull in the corresponding symbol (any one of them if there is a plurality of pairs) on the effective line 29 regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch as in the case of the replay player 1 will be described below, For convenience, it is called "100% retractable game player".

  The establishment of re-players 3 and 4 (the corresponding symbol being stopped and displayed on effective lie 29) is considered as the condition for transition to the RT1 state described later. Further, the establishment of the re-playing combination 5 is a transition condition to the RT2 state described later, and the establishment of the re-playing combination 6 is a transition condition to the RT3 state described later. From this, the re-playing roles 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be appropriately referred to as "RT1 migration RP", "RT2 migration RP" and "RT3 migration RP", respectively.

  Reproduction roles 7, 8 being set to be elected as a winning combination in game mode 0 described later (selecting the combination determination result numbers 15 to 19 described later) is set as the execution trigger of the AT lottery described later There is. Further, when the replay role 7 is established, the symbol "cherry" is stopped and displayed in the middle middle (middle middle) display area in the display window W (the lower right or middle right display area also displays the stop switch 26a). Depending on the operation timing, "Cherry" is stopped and displayed. When the replay player combination 8 is established, the symbol "Cherry" is stopped and displayed in the lower right display area in the display window W (middle Also in the upper display area, "cherry" is stopped and displayed depending on the operation timing of the stop switch 26b. From this point, the replay players 7 and 8 are appropriately referred to as "cherry RP".

  It is set that the replay player 9 is selected as the winning combination in the game mode 0 described later (that the combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 described later are selected), as an execution trigger of the AT lottery described later. This replay player 9 is referred to as "chance RP" as appropriate. Replay roles 10 to 13 are game roles set according to the necessity of control even if they are elected as winning combinations but they are not established, and things of replay roles 10 to 13 are appropriately It is called "control RP". Note that, similar to the re-play role 1, the re-play roles 2 to 7 and 9 are 100% retractable game roles.

  The small roles 1 to 3 are winning combinations configured such that nine game medals are paid out at the time of establishment, and the small roles 1 to 3 are collectively referred to as “9 small pieces” as appropriate. As apparent from the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3, when the corresponding symbol of the small part 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29, the symbol “bell” is stopped side by side in the lower display area in the display window W Is displayed. In addition, when the small winning combination 2 is established, the symbol "bell" is displayed side by side in the display area of each middle row in the display window W in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, when the corresponding symbol of the small part 3 is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29, the symbol "bell" is displayed side by side in the display area of each upper stage in the display window W. From the stop mode of the symbol at the time of such establishment, the small parts 1, 2 and 3 are respectively referred to as "lower bell", "middle bell" and "upper bell" as appropriate.

  The small winning combination 4 to 8 is a winning combination configured such that one game medal is paid out upon establishment, and the small winning combination 9 to 23 is a winning combination configured such that three gaming medals are paid out upon establishment. It is a role. From this, the small winning combinations 4 to 8 are collectively referred to as "one small small winning combination", and the small combinations 9 to 23 are collectively referred to as the "three small folding combination" as appropriate. Also, the small winning combination 24 is a winning combination to be elected as the winning combination only during BB described later ("-" in the column of the number of payouts in FIG. 7 (A) does not win (not a winning combination (Meaning)), as appropriate, referred to as "special small role."

  As apparent from the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3, when the corresponding symbol of the small part 21 is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29, the symbol "watermelon A / B" is displayed in the middle display area in the display window W. It is displayed side by side and stopped. In addition, when the small winning combination 22 is established, the symbol "watermelon A / B" is stopped and displayed side by side in the upper right in the display window W. Furthermore, when the corresponding symbol of the small part 23 is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29, the symbol "watermelon A / B" is displayed horizontally and stopped in the display area of each lower stage in the display window W. From the stop mode of the symbol at the time of such establishment, the minors 21 to 23 are generically referred to as "watermelon minor". On the other hand, small members 1 to 20 are collectively referred to as "bell small members" as appropriate. The small roles 1 to 6 are 100% retractable game roles.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown to FIG. 7 (B), the specific symbol 01, 02, 03 is set. These are not the corresponding symbols of the game player, and when the prizes E1 to E6 to be described later are selected, if the predetermined small winning combination can not be established by the pressing order of the stop switch and the operation timing, the drop is found. The eye is displayed on the effective line 29 as a stop. In addition, it is considered as a transition condition to the later described RT1 state that the specific symbol 01, 02, 03 is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29.

<Probability determination result selection probability>
8 to 11 show the correspondence between the combination determination result numbers selected in the combination determination process and the names, the winning combinations, the winning probabilities, etc. corresponding thereto. Note that a plurality of selection probabilities (also referred to as “winning probabilities”) are set in accordance with the above-described set values set by a game clerk or the like. The illustrated selection probability values are those corresponding to certain set values among them.

  In FIGS. 8 to 11 (A), fifty-two (52) winning combination determination result numbers for combination symbols and winning combinations are set, and in FIG. 11 (B), one combination determination result number is set. The combination determination result number (combination determination result number 1) for special role of is set. Hereinafter, the former combination determination result number may be referred to as "winning combination / RP combination determination result number", and the latter combination determination result number may be referred to as "combination combination determination result number of combination".

  As shown in the figure, each game combination is associated with each combination determination result number as a winning combination. For example, the winning combination / RP combination determination result number 1 is associated with the re-playing combination 1, 2 as a double winning combination, the winning combination determination result number 15 is associated with the re-play combination 7 as a single winning combination, It is the condition that the BB combination is associated with the combination determination result No. 1 as a single winning combination. The winning combination / RP combination determination result number 0 is associated with a loss (any game combination is not won). Also, the names corresponding to each combination determination result number are given for convenience in order to make it easy to distinguish each combination determination result number.

  The probability that each combination determination result number is selected is set for each RT state (non-RT, RT1 to RT5) described later, as illustrated. The numerical value of the selection probability indicates the ratio of the numerical range assigned to each combination determination result number to the entire numerical range (for example, 65536 in decimal) of the random number sequence generated by the random number generator 66. For example, the probability that the winning combination determination result No. 12 (name: replay D1 and winning combination: replay players 1 to 4) is selected is “1 / 7.2” during RT3 and other RT states (non-RT, RT1, RT1 In RT2, RT4 and RT5), it is in the state of "0" (not selected) (probability values are approximate values and can be changed as appropriate).

  When the winning combination / RP combination determination result number 1 (replay A) is selected, reel stop control is always performed to establish replay 1 regardless of the operation order (pushing order) of each stop switch. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the winning combination / RP combination determination result number 1 (replay A) is appropriately referred to as “pushing order unquestioned RP”.

  The winning combination determination result numbers 2 to 6 (replays B1 to B5) are selected only at RT1, and if selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. In this case, the reel stop control is performed such that the replaying combination 5 which is the transition RP 2 is always established, and the replaying combination 1 or 2 which is the normal RP is always established in the other pushing order. Note that "left", "middle", and "right" described in the remarks column of the role lottery table mean the stop switches 26a, 26b and 26c, and the arrangement order is the order of operation (pushing order) Means. For example, "right and left middle" represents the pressing order for operating the stop switch in the order of 26a, 26c, and 26b, and "middle first" represents the pressing order for operating the stop switch 26b first (the second and subsequent pressing orders are It does not matter. Hereinafter, in the winning combination determination result numbers 2 to 6 (replays B1 to B5), for the sake of convenience, the pressing order in which the replay role 5 (RT2 shift RP) is established is “correct order”, the replay role 1, 2 The pushing order in which (normal RP) is established is referred to as "illegal pushing order".

  The winning combination determination result numbers 7 to 11 (replays C1 to C5) are selected only at RT2, and if selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the stop switch operation timing. In this case, the reel stop control is performed such that the replaying combination 6 which is the transition RT3 transition RP is always established, and in the case of other pushing order, the replaying combination 3 or 4 which is the transition RT1 transition RP is necessarily established. . Hereinafter, in the winning combination determination result numbers 7 to 11 (re-playing C1 to C5), for the sake of convenience, the pressing order in which re-playing combination 6 (RT3 transition RP) is established is “correct press order”, re-playing combination 3, 4 The pushing order in which (RT1 transition RP) is established is referred to as “incorrect pushing order”.

  The winning combination determination result numbers 12 to 14 (replay D1 to D3) are selected only at RT3, and if selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. In such a case, the reel stop control is performed to always establish the replay player combination 1 or 2 (normal RP), which is a normal RP, and to always establish replay player combinations 3 or 4 which is an RT1 shift RP, in other push order. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, in the winning combination determination result numbers 12 to 13 (replay D1 to D3), for convenience, the pressing order in which the re-playing roles 1, 2 (normal RP) are established is “correct pressing order”, re-playing role 3, The push order in which 4 (RT1 transition RP) is established is referred to as "illegal push order". Further, the combination determination result numbers 2 to 14 are collectively referred to as “push order RT transfer RP” as appropriate.

  The winning combination determination result numbers 15, 16 (replay E, F) are elected at RT1, RT2 or RT3. When the winning combination determination result No. 15 (replay E) is selected, regardless of the pressing order of each stop switch and the operation timing, the re-play combination 7 that is Cherry RP must be established, and the winning combination determination result No. 16 ( When replay F) is selected, the replay RP 7 or 8 which is Cherry RP must be established regardless of the pressing order of each stop switch and the operation timing (the stop switch 26a is operated first, the left When the symbol "cherry" is stopped and displayed on the lower display area of the reel, reel stop control is performed to establish the re-play role 8). Hereinafter, the part determination result numbers 15 and 16 will be appropriately referred to as "weak cherry" and "strong cherry", respectively.

  The winning combination determination result numbers 17 to 19 (replays G1 to G3) are selected only at RT3, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. In this case, the reel stop control is performed so as to always establish the replaying role 7 as the cherry RP, and to always establish the replaying role 1 or 2 as the normal RP in the other pushing order. Hereinafter, the combination determination result numbers 17 to 19 (replays G1 to G3) are collectively referred to as “pushing order cherry RP” as appropriate.

  The winning combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 (replays H1 to H3) are selected only at RT3, and if selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the stop switch operation timing. In this case, the reel stop control is performed such that the replay player combination 9 which is the chance RP must be established and the replay player combination 1 or 2 which is the normal RP must always be established otherwise. Hereinafter, the part determination result numbers 20 to 22 (replays H1 to H3) will be collectively referred to as “push order chance RP” as appropriate, and the part determination result numbers 2 to 14 (push order RT transition RP) The determination result numbers 17 to 19 (pushing order cherry RP) and the combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 (pushing order chance RP) are collectively referred to as “pushing order RP” as appropriate. It should be noted that the winning combination determination result numbers 15 to 22 are set to be selected in the later-described game mode 0 as the execution trigger of the AT lottery described later, and the winning combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 are the later-described gaming mode 3 It is set as an execution opportunity of AT lottery that it is elected in.

  The winning combination determination result numbers 23 to 40 (prize A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6) are selected in each RT state other than RT5, and if they are selected, the respective timings of the stop switch operation do not matter. If the pressing order of the stop switch is a predetermined pressing order, any one of the small winning combinations 1 to 3 (which is included in the winning combination) must be established as long as the pressing combination is 9 sheets. Reel stop control is performed to ensure that any of the small roles 4 to 8 which are the roles are established. Hereinafter, in the part determination result numbers 31 to 40, for convenience, the pressing order in which any of the small roles 1 to 3 (9 sheets of the small portions) is established is "the correct pressing order", the small portions 4 to 8 (one sheet The pushing order in which any of the small winning combinations is established is referred to as "incorrect press pushing order". In addition, the combination determination result numbers 23 to 40 are collectively referred to as “6 option push order bell” as appropriate. It should be noted that the winning combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 (prize A1 to A6) are set to be selected in the later-described game mode 3 as an execution trigger of the push order hit game lottery described later.

  In this embodiment, when the effective line is one line and the above-mentioned six-order push order bell is selected, if the stop switch is operated in the correct push order, the number of payouts is the largest among the double winning combinations. While drawing in the symbols of the winning combination preferentially, in the case of incorrect pressing order, the number of payouts is reduced by preferentially drawing in the symbols with the larger number of symbols set as the corresponding symbols in each of the corresponding symbols of the duplicate winning combination The winning combination is established (number priority control). On the other hand, when providing a plurality of effective lines, for example, symbol combination of "any, bell, any" (any indicates any symbol may be used) is determined as the small part 1 and the combination is determined. When the result number 23 is selected, the corresponding symbol of the winning combination (for example, the bell symbol of the middle reel) is drawn on a plurality of effective lines (overlapping positions) in the correct pressing order, and in the incorrect pressing order. A difference may be made in the number of payouts by performing control to draw the corresponding symbol of the winning combination (for example, the bell symbol of the middle reel) onto a single activated line.

  The winning combination determination result number 41 (prize D) is selected in each RT state other than RT5, and when it is selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is 9 small pieces regardless of the predetermined pressing order and operation timing. A reel stop control is performed to make sure that one of the small roles 1 to 3 (usually, the small role 1) is established. Hereinafter, the combination determination result number 41 (prize D) is appropriately referred to as a "common bell".

  The winning combination determination result numbers 42 to 47 (prize E1 to E6) are selected in each RT state other than RT5, and if selected, if the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order, 3 small winning combinations ( Make sure that any of the minors 9 to 12 in the prizes E1 and E2, any of the minors 13 to 16 in the prizes E3 and E4, and any of the minors 17 to 20 in the prizes E5 and E6. In the case where it is possible to draw the corresponding symbol of predetermined 3 small pieces (see remarks column in FIG. 11A) on the effective line 29 according to the operation timing of the stop switch if the order is (the probability is “1/1 4)), if it is not possible to establish the predetermined 3 pieces of small combination, and if it can not be withdrawn (the probability is “3/4”), any of the specific symbols 01 to 03 (remarks in FIG. 11 (A) Reel stop control to stop display on the effective line 29 as dropout) Divide. Hereinafter, in the part determination result numbers 42 to 47 (prize E1 to E6), for convenience, the pressing order in which any three small winning combination must be established regardless of the operation timing is “correct answer pressing order”, other pressing The order is referred to as “incorrect push order”. In addition, the part determination result numbers 42 to 47 are generically referred to as “3 option push order bell”, and the combination determination result numbers 23 to 40 (6 option push order bells) and the role determination result numbers 42 to 47 ( 3) Optional Pushing Order Bell) is generically referred to as "pushing order bell" as appropriate.

  When one of the winning combination determination result numbers 48 to 50 (winning F to H) is selected, the operation timing of each stop switch pulls the corresponding symbol of the winning combination regardless of the pressing order of each stop. Depending on whether or not it is possible to perform the reel control, reel control is performed such that any one of the winning combinations is established or no combination is established. Hereinafter, the part determination result numbers 48, 49, and 50 will be respectively referred to as “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, and “opportunity eyes”, respectively. It is to be noted that the winning combination determination result numbers 48 to 50 are selected in the later-described game mode 0 as an execution trigger of the later-described AT lottery.

  The winning combination determination result number 51 (winning I) is set to be selected only at RT5 (during BB). When the combination determination result number 51 is selected, 9 small combinations (usually small combination 1) are always established regardless of the pushing order or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the combination determination result No. 1 (BB01) of the role is set to be selected in each RT state other than RT4 (inside BB) and RT5 (inside BB). . When the combination determination result number 1 of this character is selected, the operation timing of each stop switch on the effective line 29 does not correspond to the winning combination of the BB combination, regardless of the pressing order of each stop switch. The BB combination is established when it is time to withdraw. Once the combination determination result No. 1 (BB01) of the character is selected, the BB combination is carried over to the next game until the BB combination is established. In addition, in a state where the winning of the BB combination is carried over, when the re-playing combination or the small winning combination is selected as the winning combination, the corresponding symbol of the re-playing combination or the small combination is preferentially drawn onto the effective line 29. Reel control is performed (the establishment of the BB combination may be prioritized).

Next, the main characteristic configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS.
<Function block>
As shown in FIG. 12, in the slot machine according to this embodiment, a bet operation for betting game medals (for example, a game medal insertion operation to the medal insertion slot 21), mainly from the functional viewpoint , 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23), reel rotation start operation (for example, tilting operation of the start lever 25) for rotating each of the stopped reels 3a to 3c, plural kinds of symbols Rotation stop operation for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3a, 3b, 3c that display the variable (for example, pressing operation of the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c), gaming medals betted or stored (credited) Corresponding to each game operation performed by the player, such as a clearing operation (eg, a pressing operation of the clearing switch 24) for paying out Operation signal output means 95 for outputting a game number (hereinafter referred to as "game operation signal" as appropriate), main control means 100 (corresponding to the main control board 60) for main control related to the progress of the game, It comprises sub-control means 200 (corresponding to the sub-control board 70) for performing predetermined effect control according to the situation.

  The main control means 100 is roughly divided into gaming state management means 110 for mainly managing the gaming state, game progress management means 130 for mainly managing the game progress, and main communication for controlling communication in the main control means 100. The control means 150 is provided. Among them, the game state management means 110 includes setting change / confirmation control means 111, RT control means 112, replay operation control means 113, bonus game control means 114, freeze control means 115, game mode control means 116, AT control means. 117 and test specification control means 118.

  In addition, game progress management means 130, accepted medal management means 131, combination determination means 132, game progress information determination means 133, reel control means 134, stop display symbol determination means 135, payout medal management means 136, blocker control means 137, The display lamp control means 138, the main side push order management means 139, the mask processing means 140, and the push order game control means 141 are provided, and the main communication control means 150 is a control command transmission means 151 and an outer end signal transmission means 152. And a test signal transmission means 153. The above-described units in the main control unit 100 are the main CPU 61, the ROM 62, the RAM 63, the hardware such as the electronic circuit and the control program stored in the ROM 62 etc. arranged on the main control board 60 shown in FIG. It is a functional representation of software components.

(Each means constituting the gaming state management means 110)
When the setting key type switch 83 is operated to the ON state and the power switch 81 is operated to the ON state as it is in the setting change / confirmation control means 111, the setting value such as the combination determination probability at the present time is Each time the setting change switch 84 is operated to the ON state while displaying on a predetermined display, the set value is changed in, for example, six stages (set value 1 to set value 6), and the changed setting The values are configured to be displayed on a display. In this embodiment, when the setting change is performed, the information on the AT is cleared, but the information on the RT state described later is held as it is, and after the setting change, the RT state before the setting change is restored. (The information on the RT state may be cleared, and after changing the selection, the state may return to the non-RT described later).

  The RT control means 112 is configured to control setting of six RT states, non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4 (in BB internal) and RT5 (in BB), as shown in FIG. There is.

  Non-RT is an RT state which becomes a standard (normal state) in the present embodiment, and the probability that the replay player (type is replay players 1 and 2) is elected is a reference value (in this embodiment, approximately 1/1. It is set to 7.33 "). During this non-RT state, transition to RT1 is triggered when the condition P1 is satisfied. The condition P1 is that any one of the specific symbols 01 to 03 described above is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29.

  RT1 is a standard RT state similar to non-RT, and the probability that the re-playing combination (type is 1, 2, 5, 7, 8, 10 to 13) is the same value as the non-RT ((1) It is set to approximately "1 / 7.33". During RT1, transition to RT2 is triggered when the condition P2 is satisfied. The condition P2 is that the corresponding symbol of the replay player 5 (RT2 shift RP) is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29 (the replay symbol 5 is established).

  RT2 is a standard RT condition similar to non-RT and RT1, and the probability that the re-playing combination (type: 1-3, 6 to 8, 9 to 13) is won is the same as non-RT and RT1. It is set to a value (approximately "1 / 7.33"). During RT2, transition to RT3 is triggered by satisfaction of the condition P3 and transition to RT1 is triggered by satisfaction of the condition P1 or P4. Condition P3 means that the corresponding symbol of replay player 6 (RT3 shift RP) is stopped and displayed on effective line 29 (replay player 6 is established), condition P4 is replay player 3 Alternatively, the corresponding symbol of 4 (RT1 transition RP) is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29 (replay players 3 and 4 are established).

  RT3 is set to a value (approximately "1 / 1.53") that the probability of winning a replay player (type is 1-4, 7-11) is higher than that of non-RT, RT1 and RT2 It is in the RT state. During RT3, transition to RT1 is triggered when the condition P1 or P4 is satisfied.

  RT4 shifts from each RT state of non-RT and RT1 to RT3 when the condition P5 that the special part (BB part in this embodiment) is won and is not established (corresponding symbol is not displayed) is satisfied. It is an RT state during so-called bonus internal winning (during bonus internal winning). In this RT4, the probability that the replay player (type: replay players 1 and 2) wins is set higher than the non-RT, RT1 and RT2 and lower than RT3 (approximately "1 / 1.94") There is. Further, the transition to RT5 is triggered when the condition P6 is satisfied during RT4. The condition P6 is that the BB combination is established (the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29).

  RT5 is an RT state (bonus gaming state) when it is set to a state where it is permitted to perform BB gaming by the bonus game control means described later. In this RT5, it is set so that the combination determination result number 51 (winning I) that all the small combination (small combination 1 to 24) will be double-picked is always selected. In addition, during RT5, transition to non-RT is triggered when the condition P7 is satisfied. The condition P7 is that the bonus gaming state (BB game) is ended by the payout of game medals exceeding a predetermined number (450).

  The above-mentioned re-play operation control means 113 is a state where it is permitted to play the next game without betting the game medals held by the player when the re-play role is established (appropriately “re-play operation state (Referred to as “.)”. In addition, when it is set to the replay operation state, information (referred to as “replay operation state information” as appropriate) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (which will be described later). It has become so. Hereinafter, storing the replay operation state information is also referred to as setting or turning on the replay operation state flag, and clearing (erasing) the stored replay operation state information, the replay operation state flag It is also referred to as clearing or turning off.

  The bonus game control means 114 sets the state (hereinafter referred to as “BB operating state” as appropriate) to be permitted to perform the BB game from the next game, triggered by the establishment of the BB combination, and the end of the BB game It is configured to end the BB operation state triggered by satisfaction of the condition (disbursement of 450 or more game medals). Hereinafter, setting to the BB operating state is also referred to as "BB operating". Further, the bonus game control means 114 is configured to continuously execute the RB game while the BB is in operation. This RB game is internally controlled (not notified to the player in particular), and the first game is started at the start of the BB game, and the small role is played during the BB game (BB is in operation). Each time the game is completed twice, or every time two games end (i.e., every two games), the game is ended once and resumed immediately thereafter. In addition, when the BB game is ended, the RB game is also controlled to be ended (regardless of the number of times the small winning combination is made or the number of the game). In the present embodiment, the RB game in the BB game is set to end every time a small winning combination is established twice or every two games end, but each time a small winning combination is established eight times, Alternatively, it may be set to end every 12 games.

  Hereinafter, the state in which the RB game is executed is referred to as "RB operating state", and the RB game in progress is also referred to as "RB in operation". When the BB operating state or the RB operating state is set, information indicating that the BB operating state is in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (described later) (referred to as “BB operating state information” as appropriate) or Information indicating that the RB is in operation (referred to as “RB operation state information” as appropriate) is stored. Hereinafter, storing the BB operating state information [RB operating state information] is also referred to as setting or turning on the BB operating state flag [RB operating state flag] or the like, and storing the stored BB operating state flag [RB operating state flag Clearing [] is also referred to as clearing or turning off the BB operating state flag [RB operating state flag]. In addition, the above-described replay operation status flag, BB operation status flag, and RB operation status flag are collectively referred to as "operation status flag".

  The freeze control means 115 executes execution of control processing (for example, processing for receiving a bet operation, a reel rotation start operation, a reel rotation stop operation, etc.) related to the progress of the game, triggered by establishment of a predetermined condition (condition satisfaction). It is configured to set a freeze to be delayed for a predetermined time. In the present embodiment, an RB operation end standby time (details will be described later) as the freeze is set every time each RB game performed during the above-described BB game ends.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the game mode control means 116 has a game mode 0 (normal time), a game mode 1 (prompt), a game mode 2 (AT preparation), a game mode 3 (AT) and a game mode 4 (BB). Preparation) to control the setting of 7 game modes (words in parentheses are convenient names) such as game mode 5 (BB), game mode 6 (additional specialization preparation), and game mode 7 (additional specialization) It is configured.

  The game mode 0 is a non-AT mode (normal mode) which is set before winning the AT lottery described later. When the game mode 0 is set, the game mode 1 is entered when the condition Q1 is satisfied, and the game mode 4 is entered when the condition Q4 is satisfied. The condition Q1 is to win an AT lottery described later, and the condition Q4 is to win a BB role (corresponding symbol is not displayed).

  The game mode 1 is a non-AT mode set with an event of winning an AT lottery described later (hereinafter referred to as "AT winning"). In this game mode 1, sub-control means 200 mainly performs an effect (prediction effect) that suggests that AT is won (it is determined that AT is set). ing. When the game mode 1 is set, the game mode 2 is entered when the condition Q2 is satisfied, and the game mode 6 is entered when the condition Q4 is satisfied. The condition Q2 is that in the game mode 1, the number of games (hereinafter referred to as “precursor G number” as appropriate) determined by the AT precursor G number lottery (“G number” means “number of games”) described later is digested It is to be done.

  The game mode 2 is a mode under AT preparation which is set when the precursor G number is digested in the game mode 1 described above. When the game mode 2 is set, notification of the correct push order when the push order RT transition RP is selected (hereinafter referred to as “replay navigation” as appropriate) or the above push order bell is selected. The notification of the correct order of pressing (hereinafter referred to as “bell navigation” as appropriate. Replay navigation and bell navigation are collectively referred to as “pushing navigation” as appropriate) is performed. When the condition Q3 is satisfied in the game mode 2, the transition to the game mode 3 is made, and when the condition Q4 is satisfied, the transition to the game mode 6 is made. The condition Q3 is to be set to RT3 or that the stop switch is operated in a pushing order different from the correct pushing order notified by the pushing order navigation.

  Game mode 3 is a mode during AT. When the game mode 3 is set, the number of games managed (counted) by the later-described AT counter (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "the number of AT games") is set, and the push order navigation is executed. When the condition Q8 that the number of AT games is consumed (the value of the AT counter becomes "0") is satisfied when the game mode 3 is set, the game mode 0 or the game mode 1 ( When the AT stock number described later is "0" when the AT game number is consumed, the game mode 0 is selected, and when the AT stock number is "1" or more, the game mode is switched to 1), and the above condition Q4 is satisfied. Then, the game mode 6 is entered.

  The game mode 4 is a mode under BB preparation which is set by satisfying the above-mentioned condition Q4 (BB part winning) in the game mode 0 (therefore, the state without AT winning). When the condition Q5 is satisfied when the game mode 4 is set, the game mode 5 is entered. The condition Q5 is that the BB combination is established (the corresponding symbol of the BB combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29).

  The game mode 5 is a mode during BB which is shifted from the game mode 4 (therefore, the state without AT winning) when the BB combination is established. When the game mode 5 is set, the game mode 0 is entered when the condition Q6 is satisfied, and the game mode 2 is entered when the condition Q7 is satisfied. The condition Q6 means that the BB game is ended in the state where there is no AT winning (each game AT lottery is performed in the game mode 5 as described later) (AT stock number = 0), and the condition Q7 is AT The BB game is to end in the state of winning (AT stock number> 0).

  The game mode 6 is a mode for additional specialization preparation which is set by satisfying the condition Q4 (BB part winning) in the game mode 1, the game mode 2, and the game mode 3 (therefore, the AT winning state). is there. When the condition Q5 (BB combination established) is satisfied when the game mode 6 is set, the game mode 7 is entered. In the present embodiment, when the game mode 6 is entered (when the AT is won, the inside of BB (RT4) is entered), basically, notification of the correct pressing order (pushing order navigation) is performed. Not available (However, a special internal counter is provided. If the special role (BB role) is won, but the internal counter has not been set, the internal counter is set, and the number of games until the internal counter becomes 0 May be made to make it hard to notice that the game mode 6 has been shifted). The reason for not notifying the pushing order in the game mode 6 is to lower the payout rate in the inside of the BB. On the other hand, if it is not necessary to lower the payout rate in the BB interior, the pushing order may be notified even in the game mode 6.

  The game mode 7 is an additional specialization (an increase in the number of AT stock can be expected) mode shifted from the game mode 6 (therefore, AT winning state) by establishment of the BB combination. When the condition Q7 (the end of BB gaming in the AT winning state) is satisfied when the game mode 7 is set, the game mode 2 is entered. It should be noted that the AT stock number is incremented by “1” when transitioning from the game mode 6 to the game mode 7, and the AT stock number is decremented by “1” when the BB game ends and the game mode 7 ends. It has become.

  The AT control means 117 satisfies that the condition Q3 is satisfied when it is set to the above-mentioned game mode 2 (it is set to RT3 or different from the correct push order notified by the push order navigation An AT counter for managing the number of AT games described above is set by setting the setting condition of the AT as the setting condition of the AT being satisfied (the initial value "50" in the present embodiment). However, the numerical value can be arbitrarily changed. (At this time, transition to the game mode 3 is also performed by the game mode control means). Having the setting condition of the RT3 as the setting condition of the AT has a meaning of starting the AT at the RT3 which is advantageous for the player and which has a high probability of winning the replay player.

  On the other hand, the fact that the stop switch is operated in the pushing order different from the correct pushing order notified by the pushing order navigation is also set as the setting condition of the AT for the following reason. That is, in the game mode 2, although the AT counter is not set, the push order navigation is executed. For this reason, if it is determined that the transition to RT3 is set as the setting condition of the AT (the AT counter is not set even if the pushing order different from the pushing order notified in the game mode 2 is executed), the replay navigation line As long as the player executes a pushing order different from the informed pushing order, the game mode 2 is not set since the transition to RT3 is made. When the game mode 2 is set, the bell navigation is also performed. Therefore, by not following the replay navigation but following the bell navigation, it is possible to permanently maintain the period during which the game medals increase. Therefore, when a pushing order different from that notified in the game mode 2 is executed, the AT counter is set (transition to the game mode 3 is also performed), and the AT is started. . In this case, the AT is started with a non-RT, RT 1 and RT 2, in which the winning probability of the replay player is lower than RT 3. In addition, when the BB combination is won when the game mode 2 is set, the game mode 6 (if the BB combination is established, it shifts to the game mode 7 further), so the player intentionally follows the push order navigation If it is permitted to maintain the game mode 2 due to the absence, there may be a situation where the AT stock number may increase without the AT being started, so there is a meaning to avoid it.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the value of the set AT counter is decremented by “1” every game (except during the game modes 6 and 7), and the AT is terminated when the AT counter reaches “0”. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the AT is that the game for the number of AT games (50 games) has been consumed. In addition, as a change aspect, the fact that there was a payout of a predetermined number of game medals during the AT period, that a predetermined number of winning numbers (total number of differences between the number of payouts and the number of bets) was obtained, or the predetermined number The end condition of the AT may be that the bell navigation is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the AT counter is not decremented as described above when the BB combination is won or established and the game mode is set to 6, 7 with the AT counter set. It is also possible to In this way, even if the BB combination is won or established when it is set to AT, it is not a loss for the player (from the state before winning the BB combination after the end of the BB game AT Can resume). Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, even if the AT is set by executing the pushing order different from the pushing order notified in the game mode 2 (the AT counter is set), the subsequent steps Also, although the notification of the order of pressing is performed, the notification of the order of pressing may not be performed (a period during which the order of pressing is not notified may be limited to only a few games).

  The test specification control unit 118 determines whether the slot machine 1 is a test specification or a mass production specification (a specific determination method will be described later), and a predetermined value is determined according to the determination result. Control processing is executed (for example, setting a later-described winning information output period timer, etc. outputs a test signal to be described later when it is determined to be a test specification, but outputs if determined to be a mass production specification Not) (details will be described later). Here, the test specification is, for example, a specification for a type test examination for determining whether or not a newly developed gaming machine (slot machine) conforms to a predetermined standard, and the mass production specification is a sale. It means the specification for (for amusement arcade setting). The control programs and the like written in the ROM 62 have the same contents regardless of whether they are test specifications or mass production specifications.

(Each means constituting the game progress management means 130)
The above-mentioned receiving medal management means 131 is led to the receiving passage (in the present embodiment, the receiving passage) among the game medals (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "inserted game medals") inserted from the medal insertion slot 21. Game medals detected by the inserted medal sensor 28 b (hereinafter referred to as “accepted game medals” as appropriate) to control whether to be directly betted or be credited game medals. It is configured. In the present embodiment, when the bet number (BET number) does not reach the maximum bet number (in the embodiment, the bet number required to execute the game (the prescribed number "3"), the accepted game medals Is a game bet to be bet directly, the bet number has reached the maximum bet allowed number, and the credited number is credited to the accepted game medal if the number of credits has not reached the maximum allowed number of credits ("50" in this embodiment) It is configured to be a game medal to be played.

  Further, in the game set to the replay operation state, the acceptance medal management means 131 performs automatic bet processing (the number of game medals is the same as the number of bets in the previous game without reducing the number of game medals held by the player). A process of setting a betted state is configured to be performed. When the bet number has reached the maximum bet allowed number and the credit number has reached the maximum credit allowed number, the inserted game medals are returned without being accepted.

  The combination determining means 132 is triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 (the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively accepted), and a plurality of combinations are determined based on a predetermined combination determination probability (selection probability, winning probability). It is configured to perform a combination determination process for selecting at least one combination determination result number from among the combination determination result numbers. This combination determination process is performed by random number lottery using the random number generator 66 and the sampling circuit 67 shown in FIG. Specifically, after one random number (number) is acquired (latched and read) by the sampling circuit 67 from the random number sequence generated by the random number generator 66, the acquired random number is a plurality of combination determination result numbers It is configured to determine which of the combination determination results corresponds to and select the combination determination result number.

  When one combination determination result number is selected in the combination determination process, the game combination corresponding to the selected combination determination result number becomes the establishment permitted combination in the game. In addition, information of the selected combination determination result number is stored in a predetermined storage area (described later) of the RAM 63. The area in which the information on the combination determination result number of the prize is stored is set separately from the area in which the information on the combination determination result number of the winning and RP is stored. Hereinafter, to store the information on the winning combination / RP combination determination result number [character combination determination result number], set the winning combination / RP combination determination result flag [ordinary combination determination result flag] or to ON, etc. It is called to clear the information of the winning combination / RP combination determination result number [character combination determination result number] stored and it is OFF or clear the winning combination / RP combination determination result flag [bonus determination result flag] It is referred to as

  The information on the winning combination / RP combination determination result number stored in one game is the point at which the game is over (in the present embodiment, the later game ending check is made, regardless of whether or not the small winning combination or the replay role is established). Cleared in processing) (as another mode, it clears at the start time of the next game (for example, at the time of start lever operation reception) or overwrites the information of the winning combination determination result number selected in the next game without clearing May be On the other hand, once the information on the combination determination result number of the role is stored, it is carried over to the next game while being stored until the special combination (BB combination) is established. In the present specification, the state in which the information on the part determination result number of the item is carried over while being stored is referred to as being in the process of winning the part BB or being referred to as inside BB.

  The above-mentioned game progress information determination means 133 is mainly configured to execute various lottery for determining the information necessary for proceeding the game. In this embodiment, as such a lottery, an AT lottery, an AT precursor G number lottery, and a pressing order game lottery are performed.

  The AT lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to set the AT, and when the game mode 0 or 3 described above is set, a predetermined winning combination determination result number (in the present embodiment, a combination during the gaming mode 0) It is performed when the determination result numbers 15 to 22 and 48 to 50 and the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22) are selected during the game mode 3, and every game is performed when the game mode 5 or 7 is set. . The selection items and the selection probability in the AT lottery are as shown in FIG. When an AT is won, the AT stock number for identifying the settable number of ATs is incremented by one (the value of the counter (initial value "0") set to count the AT stock number is "+1". Is supposed to be). As another mode, the AT selection probability may be set to a different value according to the game mode, or a lottery may be separately performed to determine the AT selection probability.

  The AT precursor G number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games up to AT setting (predictive G number), which is performed when AT is won in the AT lottery in the game mode 0 described above. The selection items and the selection probability in the AT precursor G number lottery are as shown in FIG. When the precursor G number is determined, a counter for counting it (hereinafter referred to as "precursor counter") is set (the initial value is a value selected in the AT precursor G number lottery), and every game from the next game, precursor G The number is decremented by one (the value of the precursor counter is decremented by one). Note that, as another aspect, without performing the AT precursor G number lottery, the precursor G number may be set uniformly, or the precursor G number may not be set.

  In the push-to-place hit game lottery, when the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 (6 choice push back order bells) are selected when the above-mentioned game mode 3 is set, the push-to-go hit game described later is executed. It is a lottery to determine whether or not. The selection items and the selection probability in the pressing order game lottery are as shown in FIG.

  The reel control means 134 confirms that the minimum game time has elapsed, triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 (the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively accepted), and then the reels 3a to 3c is started to rotate, and after all the reels that have been started to rotate, the stop switches 26a, 26b and 26c are sequentially operated (each operation of the stop switches 26a to 26c is effectively accepted. ) Is used as a trigger to sequentially stop the corresponding reels 3a to 3c.

  The rotation stop control of each of the reels 3a to 3c is based on each stop table (not shown) set (set) according to the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process, and the operation mode of the stop switches 26a to 26c It is performed according to (pushing order, operation timing, etc.). In the respective reels 3a to 3c, the respective reels 3a to 3c are stopped within a predetermined allowable stop time (for example, 190 milliseconds) from the timing when the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are operated (in this embodiment, The maximum number of sliding pieces is performed within 5 frames).

  That is, as a result of the winning combination determination process, when a predetermined gaming combination is selected as the establishment permissible combination, the corresponding symbol of the selected gaming combination on the effective line 29 as far as possible within the range of the above-mentioned permissible suspension time. In order to stop display, in the case of a loss, stop control of the reels 3a to 3c is performed so that no corresponding symbol of any game player is stop displayed on the effective line 29. In the present embodiment, when the re-playing role or the small winning combination is won during the BB carry-over, the re-playing role or the small winning combination is prioritized (the priority is changed although the re-playing combination is higher). Yes) Re-revolution combination priority or small combination priority reel rotation stop control to be established is to be performed.

  The stop display symbol determination means 135 determines which symbol the symbol stopped and displayed by the reels 3a to 3c is, and a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line 29 establishes a game combination. It is configured to determine if it is.

  Information indicating that the corresponding symbol of the re-playing combination (hereinafter also referred to as the “re-playing operation design”) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (appropriately, “re-playing operation symbol display information” when the re-playing combination stands. Also, when a special combination (BB combination) is established, information indicating that the corresponding symbol of the BB combination (hereinafter also referred to as “BB operation pattern”) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (as appropriate) It is comprised so that "BB operation symbol display information" may be memorize | stored in the predetermined storage area (it demonstrates again later) of said RAM63. Hereinafter, storing the replay operation symbol display information is referred to as setting or turning on the replay operation symbol display flag or the like, and clearing the replay operation symbol display information information stored therein is the replay operation symbol It is called clearing the display flag or turning it off. Similarly, storing the BB operation symbol display information is referred to as setting or turning on the BB operation symbol display flag, etc. Clearing the BB operation symbol display flag to clear the stored BB operation symbol display information It is called "off" or the like. In addition, the re-playing operation symbol display flag and the BB operation symbol display flag are collectively referred to as "operation symbol display flag". The data of the operation symbol display flag is used to generate data of the above-mentioned operation state flag (replay operation state flag, BB operation state flag and RB operation state flag) (details will be described later) and at the start of the next game It is cleared (when the operation of the start lever 25 is received).

  The above-mentioned payout medal management means 136 is a storage addition in which the number of game medals according to the small winning combination established when the small winning combination is established is added to the credit number when the credit number has not reached the maximum credit allowable number. If the number of credits has reached the maximum allowable number of credits due to the payout, the payout is made by the actual payout for driving the hopper 50 via the hopper drive circuit 52. Further, the payout medal managing means 136 causes the hopper 50 to count the number of game medals or the number of credited game medals when the settlement operation (pressing operation of the settlement switch 24) is effectively accepted. It is made to drive and pay back.

  The blocker control means 137 outputs a blocker signal for controlling the above-mentioned blocker 48, and switches the blocker 48 between an ON state (playing game medal acceptable state) and an OFF state (playing game medal acceptance not possible). Is configured as. When the blocker 48 is turned off, the gaming medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 are guided to the return passage and returned. However, the insertion of the game medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 28a.

  The display lamp control means 138 includes the above-mentioned various display lamps (MAX-BET display lamp 46a, BET lamp 46b, insertable display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, replay display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, Control regarding lighting and extinguishing of the number indication lamp 46g, the CRE lamp 46h, and the WIN lamp 46j) is configured to be performed via the display lamp control circuit 47. When the WIN lamp 46 j is made to function as a main-side push order notification device, the main-side push order management means 139 controls the WIN lamp 46 j.

  The main-side push-order management means 139 is a push-order instruction number (A0 to A9) preset according to the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process. (A10) is selected as the push order instruction number to be determined by. In this embodiment, each push order instruction number is set as shown in the push order instruction number-corresponding push order-display content correspondence table of FIG.

  The push order instruction number A0 is selected when not notifying the push order, and the corresponding push order is "unknown". The push order instruction numbers A1 to A6 are selected when it is desired to notify from the first push order to the third push order, and the corresponding push order is set as shown in the table of FIG. For example, the corresponding pressing order of the pressing order instruction number A2 is "right and left middle", and the corresponding pressing order of the pressing order instruction number A5 is "right and left middle". Furthermore, push order instruction numbers A7 to A9 are selected when playing the push order hit game described later, and the corresponding push orders are “left?” (First press order is “left” (The rest is unknown), "Medium ??" (First press order is "Medium" and the rest is unknown), and "Right ??" (First press order is "Right" and the rest is unknown). In addition, push order instruction number A10 is not selected by the main side push order management means 139, and when it is desired to notify a symbol "character" to be aimed by eye pushing in the inside of the BB (there is no corresponding push order) (Sub control means 200) side is determined.

  The correspondence between the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process and the push order instruction number selected by the main side push order management means 139 is shown in the combination determination result number-push order instruction number correspondence table of FIG. That's right. As illustrated, the selected push order instruction number is different in the above-described game modes 2 and 3 in accordance with the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process. For example, when combination determination result number 7 is selected, push order instruction number A1 is selected, and when combination determination result number 32 is selected, push order instruction number A4 is selected, combination determination result numbers 1, 1 When 15 to 22 or 48 to 51 (corresponding to "other" in the table) are selected, the pushing order instruction number A0 is selected.

  Although two push order instruction numbers (one indicated in parentheses) are described for the part determination result numbers 6, 11 to 14, in this embodiment, the push order instruction in the one without parentheses is described. Although the number is selected, it means that the push order instruction number in parentheses may be selected as another mode. Further, with regard to the winning combination determination result numbers 23 to 28, in addition to the pushing order instruction number selected when the pushing order hitting game described later is not performed, the pushing order instruction selected when the pushing order hitting game is performed The numbers are shown in parentheses. For example, when the winning combination determination result number 25 is selected, only the pressing order instruction number A3 is selected when the pressing order placement game is not performed, and when the pressing order placement game is performed, the pressing order designation number A3 is selected. It also indicates that the push order instruction number A8 is selected. On the other hand, in the above-described game modes 0 and 4 to 7, the push order instruction number A0 is selected regardless of the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process.

  Further, the main-side push-order management means 139 causes the WIN lamp 46 j to function as a main-side push-order alarm and notifies of the selected push order instruction number. Specifically, the push order instruction number is notified using two 7-segment lamps (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "7-segment") provided on the WIN lamp 46j. FIG. 18 shows an example of the notification mode. FIG. 18A shows a mode in the case where the pressing order instruction number A2 is displayed, in which “=” is displayed in the 7 segments on the left and “2” is displayed in the 7 segments on the right. FIG. 18C shows a mode in the case of displaying the push order instruction number A8, in which “=” is displayed on the left 7 segments and “8” is displayed on the right 7 segments. Note that “=” displayed on the left 7 segments is to distinguish from the case where the number of payouts is displayed on the WIN lamp 46 j. Further, when the push order instruction number is displayed, when the push order instruction number selected corresponding to the push order bell is displayed (in the case of bell navigation), the push selected according to the push order RT transition RP is The display mode may be changed so that it is possible to distinguish which case is the same push order instruction number depending on whether the order indication number is displayed (in the case of replay navigation). For example, it may be considered to make the position of “=” displayed in the left 7 segments higher in the case of the bell navigation. When the push order instruction number A0 is selected, the display by the WIN lamp 46j is not performed (see FIG. 16 for the correspondence between each push order instruction number and the display content by the WIN lamp 46j).

  As another mode, the display of the pressing order instruction number by the WIN lamp 46 j may be performed in binary. For example, as shown on the right side of FIG. 18F, the push sequence numbers etc. are displayed by making bits 0 to 6 in the case of displaying in binary numbers correspond to the lamps at each position of 7 segments. . FIG. 18F is a mode in the case of displaying “0001001” (corresponding to push order indication number A9) in binary notation in the left or right 7 segments, and the lamp at the corresponding bit position is lit. . As a modified example, the winning combination determination result number may be displayed by the WIN lamp 46 j.

  In the present embodiment, the switching between the use of the WIN lamp 46 j as the main-side push order notification and the use as the indicator of the number of payouts of game medals is performed at the following timing. That is, after displaying the number of payouts in one game, when the bet operation is performed in the next game, the WIN lamp 46 j is temporarily turned off. Then, the push order instruction number is displayed at an arbitrary timing from when the start lever 25 is operated to when each reel turns into a constant speed rotation state. Further, in response to the stop of all the reels, the WIN lamp 46 j displaying the push order instruction number is turned off, and thereafter, the number of payouts is displayed according to the payout processing of the game medals. When the bet operation is performed, the WIN lamp 46 j is not turned off and the display switches to “00” etc., and when the start lever 25 is operated, the pressing order instruction number is displayed from that state You may do so. Similarly, when the display of the push order instruction number is switched to the display of the number of payouts, the WIN lamp 46 j is not turned off, and the display of the push order instruction number is switched to the display of “00” etc. The number of payouts may be displayed directly from the state of displaying or displaying the pressing order instruction number.

  The mask processing unit 140 performs mask processing to replace information on the winning combination / RP combination determination result number selected by the combination determination processing with information on the effect group number (as another aspect, the combination of the combination and the combination Mask processing may also be performed for the determination result number). The effect group number is obtained by classifying the winning combination / RP combination determination result numbers selected by the combination determination process into a plurality of groups (sorting according to the type of winning combination), and associating them with each group. . The correspondence between the effect group number and the winning combination / RP combination determination result number is as shown in the effect group number-combination determination result number correspondence table of FIG. As illustrated, in the present embodiment, effect group numbers 0 to 21 are set as effect group numbers. Each effect group number is associated with the type of the winning combination determination result number of the winning combination / RP selected by the winning combination determination processing. For example, the effect group number 2 is associated with the winning combination determination result numbers 2 to 6 (replays B1 to B6) of the RT migration RP, and the effect group number 11 is the winning combination determination result number 21 (orders among pushing chances) The effect group number 15 is associated with the winning combination determination result numbers 35 to 40 (prize C1 to C6) among the six-option push order bells, in association with the replay H 2).

  As described above, the mask processing for replacing the winning combination / RP combination determination result number selected by the combination determination processing with the effect group number is performed, and the information of the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control means 200. There are That is, the sub-control means 200 may change the color and the content of the background of the image effect according to the type of the game combination that has become the winning combination (the establishment acceptable combination) by the combination determination process. For this reason, the sub-control means 200 which has received the information of the effect group number by associating the effect group number according to the type of the winning combination / RP result determination result number selected by the role determination process, According to the number information, it is possible to determine the content of the image effect and the like. For example, when information of the effect group number 19 is received, effects (strong effects) are given to give the player a sense of expectation, and when information of the effect group number 18 is received, the player is expected It is possible to decide to perform rendering (weak rendering) that does not give a feeling.

  In addition, there are the following advantages by performing such mask processing. The effect group number is one effect with respect to a plurality of combination determination result numbers for combination determination result numbers (push order RT transition RP or push order bell) that become advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the pushing order. Since the group number is associated, for example, although it is possible to specify whether the winning order RT transition RP has been won or the pressing order bell has been won, etc., it is possible to win the winning combination determination result number corresponding to any correct pressing order. It can not be identified until it has been done. That is, in spite of the fact that the information transmission path from the main control means to the sub control means is illegally accessed and information on the combination determination result number (a correct answer based on that is There is an advantage that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of trying to acquire push order information illegally. As described above, it is difficult to specify the correct touch order which is advantageous for the player by removing the information on the operation mode (pushing order) of the stop switch from the information of the winning combination / RP combination determination result number selected in the mask processing as described above. It has a meaning that makes In the present embodiment, when the push order is not notified, the information of the push order instruction number A0 (push order unknown) is transmitted, whereby the above-described effect of preventing fraudulent acts is provided. It is possible to raise

  In the mask processing of this embodiment, the information on the winning combination / RP combination determination result number selected in the combination determination processing and stored in the predetermined storage area is rewritten (overwritten) to the effect group number. When the information on the combination determination result number is transmitted to the sub control means 200, the information on the combination determination result number for winning and RP stored in the predetermined storage area is read out, and the information on the combination determination result number read out is read out. Based on the information on the effect group number (effect group number command described later) is generated, the effect group number command may be referred to as a buffer for transmission to the sub control unit 200 (hereinafter referred to as “CB”. CB is an abbreviation of command buffer). It is set to As described above, by performing the mask processing when transmitting the command, there is no need to provide an area for storing the effect group number in the RAM or the like, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage area. Of course, information on the effect group number to be transmitted may be generated and stored in advance.

  As a modified example of the mask processing, the combination determination result number for mask processing may be used instead of the effect group number. The combination determination result number for the mask process is not selected by the combination determination process, but the combination determination result number (one of 0 to 51) selected by the combination determination process is the combination determination result for the mask process. It is set to be used in place of the number. The correspondence between the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process and the combination determination result number for mask processing can be set as shown in FIG. 20, for example. In the illustrated example, combination determination result numbers 52 to 73 are set as combination determination result numbers for mask processing (in order to make it easy to distinguish each combination determination result number for mask processing in the winning names in the figure). For convenience. The combination determination result numbers for the respective mask processes are associated with the types of combination determination result numbers selected by the combination determination process. For example, the combination determination result number 55 (pushing order RT transition RP2 (mask)) is associated with the combination determination result numbers 7 to 11, and the combination determination result number 65 (6 choice push order bell 1 (mask)) is a combination determination result It corresponds to the numbers 23-28. In the case of this modification, not the information on the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process but the information on the combination determination result number for mask processing associated with the combination determination result number is transmitted to the sub control means 200 Be done. Even when the combination determination result number for such mask processing is used, the same effect as the case where the effect group number is used can be obtained.

When performing the mask processing, it is not necessary to associate one effect group number with a plurality of combination determination result numbers for the combination determination numbers of winning and RP as follows.
(1) A difference in push order does not affect game advantage or disadvantage (there is no influence on withdrawal balls). A combination determination result number of a replay role (for example, combination determination result numbers 1, 15 to 22).
(2) A combination determination result number of a winning combination (for example, combination determination result numbers 41 and 51) in which there is no difference in the number of obtained game medals due to the difference in push order.
(3) The winning combination determination result number (for example, combination determination result numbers 48 to 50) of the winning combination in which the number of game medals that can be acquired itself is small (for example, less than the specified number of bets).
(4) The winning combination determination result number of the winning combination of (2) and (3) above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the mask processing is performed regardless of the game mode or the RT state (thereby, the control program can be simplified), but there is no need to notify the pressing order (for example, In the game mode 0, 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, the mask process is performed, and in a situation where it is necessary to notify the pressing order (for example, the game mode 2, 3), the mask process is not performed, and the winning combination is determined. Information on the result number may be transmitted to the sub control means as it is.

  The pressing order game control means 141 is configured to control a pressing order game. In the pressing order hit game, the player is notified by concealing part or all of the pressing order in which the correct pressing order is made, and the player can execute the correct pressing order in order to obtain a predetermined benefit (game medium In addition, setting of AT, addition of the number of AT games, etc. In this embodiment, addition of the number of AT stock is given. In this embodiment, in the game mode 3 described above, when the winning combination is won in the pushing order placement game lottery executed when the winning combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 (six option pushing order bells) are selected, the pushing order assignment is It is set to set the game. When the pushing order hitting game is set, the pushing order indication number (any one of A7 to A9) for the pushing order hitting game corresponding to the correct pushing order is determined, and the pushing order indication number according to the pushing order indication number Informing (informing at least a part of the pushing order) is performed. The sub (sub control unit 200) side recognizes that the pressing order hit game has been set by receiving the pressing order number for the pressing order hit game.

  Also, in the push-to-place hit game, every time the player operates the stop switch, it is determined whether or not the correct push order is made, and if it is the correct push order, the success information indicating that is the substitution control means Sent to On the other hand, if it is not the correct pressing order, failure information indicating that is transmitted. On the basis of the information, the sub control means 200 having received these pieces of information determines whether or not the pushing order hit game has succeeded, and executes an effect (pushing order hit game success effect or failure effect) accordingly. It has become. In addition, it is determined whether or not the pressing order is correct, and the timing for transmitting success information or failure information corresponds to the operated stop switch after transmitting information indicating that the stop switch has been operated. It can be any timing before sending information indicating that the reels have stopped. On the other hand, the timing may be between the transmission of the information indicating that the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch has stopped and the transmission of the information indicating that the other stop switch has been operated.

(Each means constituting the main communication control means 150)
The control command transmission unit 151 is configured to transmit a control command including various information related to the game at a predetermined timing. For example, as a control command to be transmitted triggered by the operation of the start lever, a control command including information indicating which game mode is set to one of the game modes 1 to 7 (hereinafter referred to as “game mode as appropriate Control command (hereinafter referred to as “RT command”) including information indicating which RT state among non-RT and non-RT and RT1 to RT5 is set (hereinafter referred to as “command”), information on push order designation number Control commands including information on control commands (hereinafter referred to as “push order instruction number command” as appropriate) and effects group number (mask determination result number for winning / RP winning combination) (hereinafter referred to as “effect group number command appropriately Control command including information on the part determination result number of the item (hereinafter referred to as “part determination result number command of . In addition, collectively the role determination result number command of the effect group number command and the character object is referred to as a "role determination result command") there is. In addition to this, a control command including information of setting value, a control command including information of value of AT counter, a control command including information of AT stock number, and a control command including information indicating effect contents to be executed in the sub control means Etc. may be transmitted when the start lever is operated.

  In addition, the control command transmission unit 151 performs control including information indicating that the first stop operation has been received when the first stop operation (the operation of the stop switch for stopping the first reel) is received. The command (hereinafter referred to as “first stop acceptance command” as appropriate) is transmitted, and includes the information of the first stop based on the first stop (stop of the reel corresponding to the first stop operation) as a trigger. A control command (hereinafter referred to as "first stop command" as appropriate) is transmitted. Similarly, a control command including information indicating that the second stop operation has been received (hereinafter, “appropriately,” as needed, is triggered when the second stop operation (the operation of the stop switch for stopping the second reel) is received. A control command (hereinafter referred to as appropriate) including information on the second stop of the trunk, which is transmitted as “second stop acceptance command” and is triggered by the second stop of the trunk (stop of the reel corresponding to the second stop operation) Send “second stop command”. Similarly, a control command including information indicating that the third stop operation has been received (hereinafter referred to as “the third stop operation (hereinafter referred to as“ first A control command (hereinafter referred to as “when necessary,” which will be referred to as “three stop acceptance command”) including information on the third toll stop triggered by the third toll stop (stop of the reel corresponding to the third stop operation). Send a third stop command). Furthermore, after determining the stop symbol, a control command including information on the stop display symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “all stop command” as appropriate because it is used as a command indicating that all turns have stopped), game medals A control command including information on the number of payouts (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a “number-of-payouts command” as appropriate) is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, in response to the start lever being operated, the combination determination process is performed to select the combination determination result number, and the push order designation number is determined based on the selected combination determination result number. It is supposed to be. However, the command transmission to the sub control means is such that the push order instruction number command is performed earlier than the combination determination result command (rendering group number command and combination combination determination result number command of the feature). . That is, the information storage in the predetermined storage area of the RAM is performed with the combination determination result number prior to the push order instruction number, but the setting of the information to the transmission buffer (CB) is by the push order instruction. The number command is performed before the role determination result command.

  In the present embodiment, the combination determination result number command of the combination is used as a command indicating that the start lever has been operated, and the secondary control means receives the combination determination result number command of the combination. As an opportunity, an effect to be performed when the start lever is operated is started. As a result, since it is not necessary to transmit a command indicating that the start lever has been operated as another command, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main control means. Further, as described above, by transmitting the push order instruction number command prior to the combination determination result command, the secondary control means that receives the control command in this order precedes the rendering processing based on the combination determination result command. It is possible to start pushing order navigation effects etc. described later as effect processing based on the pushing order instruction number command, or start pushing order navigation effects etc. during the effect processing based on the combination determination result command. Communication between the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200 (sub main control unit 200A) can be performed in only one direction from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200 (sub main control unit 200A). There is.

  The outer end signal transmission unit 152 is configured to transmit an outer end signal to a data counter, a hall computer or the like when a predetermined gaming state is reached. In this embodiment, the BB signal and the RB signal are transmitted as the outer end signal. The BB signal is turned ON when the condition for transition to game mode 3 (AT) is satisfied, and the termination condition for game mode 3 (transition condition from game mode 3 to another game mode) is satisfied. Is turned off. On the other hand, the RB signal is turned on when the BB combination is established, and turned off when the BB game is over. However, when transitioning to game mode 3 via game modes 0 and 1 (non-AT state), the RB signal is also turned on together with the BB signal. When the BB signal is ON, the BB signal is not turned off even if the BB combination is won, and when the BB combination is established, the BB signal is turned off and the RB signal is turned on. This is because if the BB signal is turned off by winning the BB role, the BB signal is turned off even though the termination condition of the game mode 3 is not satisfied, and it is known to the player that the BB role is won. It is because it In addition, a display lamp (referred to as a "bonus lamp") for notifying that the BB combination is won, which is managed by the main control means, is provided, and the BB combination is established when the notification has already been made. The BB signal may be turned off even before. However, the BB signal is not turned OFF when it is notified that the BB combination has been won not by such a bonus lamp but by the liquid crystal display device managed by the sub control means.

  When the slot machine 1 has a test specification, the test signal transmission unit 153 transmits various information for test to the test apparatus connected to the slot machine 1 (generally, each signal is transmitted. It is configured to output (transmit) a "test signal" as appropriate. As a test signal output in this embodiment, a symbol stop test signal, an operation state test signal, and a winning information test signal may be mentioned. The symbol stop test signal is a signal for transmitting information (information on push order and push position) about the optimum operation mode of each stop switch, and a predetermined output port for serial communication (as appropriate “output port SO0 for test Output as a serial signal. The operation state test signal is a signal for transmitting the presence or absence of replay operation state, the presence or absence of BB operation state, and the presence or absence of RB operation state, and a predetermined output port for parallel communication (appropriately "test output port PO8" Output as a parallel signal. The winning information test signal is a winning item test information (consisting of information of the winning combination determination result number of the bonus item and information of an identifier for making the test apparatus identify information of the winning combination determination result number of the bonus item), Or, the prize winning / RP winning information (consisting of the information of winning combination / RP combination determination result number and the information of the identifier for identifying that the test device is the information of winning combination / RP combination determination result number) These signals are output as parallel signals from a predetermined output port for parallel communication (referred to as “test output port PO7” as appropriate).

  The symbol stop test signal described above is output only once in the symbol stop test signal output process described later, which is executed in response to the start lever operation (the same signal is output a plurality of times consecutively (for example, twice)) It may be done). On the other hand, the operation state test signal is output each time the timer interrupt process is executed in the timer interrupt process described later. In addition, although the above-mentioned winning information test signal is also output each time the timer interrupt processing is executed, the winning of the state where the actual winning information (information of the winning combination determination result number) is set (carried) The information test signal is output only for a predetermined period (referred to as a "winning information output period" as appropriate) after accepting the start lever operation, and other than that period, the winning information test in a state where actual winning information is not set. A signal is output (details will be described later).

  In the present embodiment, test signals other than the above test signals will not be described in detail, but as other test signals, a signal for transmitting the set state of RT (referred to as “RT information test signal” as appropriate) (Described in the second embodiment), a signal for transmitting the lighting state of various display lamps, a signal for transmitting the rotational state of each reel, a signal for transmitting the payout state of gaming medals, and a set value Signals for transmitting information of the From the test device, a command signal for betting game medals, a command signal for starting rotation of all reels, a command signal for stopping rotation of each reel, a command signal for changing setting values, etc. Each command signal for executing the game is output, and according to each command signal, each control process for the main control means 100 and the sub control means 200 to execute the game (the process similar to the process performed in the mass production specification) Processing) is to be performed.

  On the other hand, the sub-control means 200 mainly performs sub-main control means (also referred to as "first sub-control means") 200A that mainly performs management (instructions) of lamp effects, image effects and sound effects; It comprises sub-sub control means (also referred to as "second sub-control means") 200B for controlling (executing) an effect.

  Sub-main control means 200A roughly includes an effect management means 210 and a sub-main communication control means 230. The effect management unit 210 includes a sub-side push order management unit 211, a game effect management unit 212, a notification effect management unit 213, and a lamp effect control unit 214. The sub main communication control unit 230 includes a control command receiving unit 231, The effect command transmission means 232 and the state command reception means 233 are provided. The above-mentioned respective means in the sub main control means 200A are the sub main CPU 71, the ROM 72, the RAM 73, the hardware such as the electronic circuit and the control program stored in the ROM 72 arranged on the sub main control board 70A shown in FIG. Etc. are functionally represented.

(Each means constituting the effect management means 210)
When the sub-side push order management means 211 is set to any of the game modes 2, 3, 4 and 6 described above, a predetermined combination determination result command from the main control means 100 and a predetermined push order designation number When a command is received, a push order instruction number different from the content of the received push order instruction number command can be uniquely determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, a push order instruction including a combination determination result command (effect group number command) including any information of effect group numbers 1, 7 to 12 and information of push order instruction number A0 When a number command is received, it is possible to determine any of push order instruction numbers A1 to A6 instead of the push order instruction number A0. In the case of receiving a combination determination result command (combination determination result number command of combination) including information of combination determination result number 1 of the combination and a push order instruction number command including information of push order instruction number A0 The push order instruction number A0 can be determined instead of the push order instruction number A0.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the effect group number 1 corresponds to the winning combination / RP combination determination result number 1 which is a normal RP, and the effect group numbers 7 to 9 are combination order determination result number 17 for the push order cherry RP. The effect group number 12 corresponds to the combination determination result numbers 20 to 22, which are the pushing order chance RP. The winning combination / RP combination determination result numbers are combination determination number numbers in which the profits obtained by the pushing order by the player do not change (become advantageous or disadvantageous). Note that whether or not to determine another push order instruction number instead of the push order instruction number A0 is left to the judgment of the sub-side push order management means 211 (the main control means 100 may make an instruction) ). For example, in the game mode 6 (preparative specialization preparation), on condition that a situation where a BB combination is not established continues for several games, a symbol "character" to be aimed at by blinding is informed in the game where the combination determination result of the loss is given For example, determining the push order instruction number A10 is given as an example.

  The above-mentioned game effect management means 212 is mainly for the purpose of improving the interest of the game and enhancing the game property, the execution time of the effect (hereinafter referred to as "game effect") by the image or sound executed by the sub-sub control means 200B, etc. It is configured to manage based on a control command from the main control means 100. The game effects include, for example, continuous effects, single-shot effects, and assist effects.

  A continuous effect is an effect that is continuous over a plurality of game periods, and an image that becomes a continuous story mainly using the image display device 11 is displayed over a plurality of game periods, An example is one that displays an effect image or the like that symbolizes being in AT. In addition, when performing continuous rendering or one-shot rendering described below, rendering using the rendering lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b or the decoration lamps 32a, 32b, the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b You may perform combining the production which was.

  The one-shot effect is a one-on-one effect that occurs when a specific situation occurs in the course of the game. For example, an effect such as displaying an image that implies an expectation of winning a game combination by the image display device 11 at the time of rotation of each reel may be mentioned. Further, the value of the added AT stock number (for example, a character such as "+1") is triggered by the winning of AT in the above-mentioned AT lottery performed in the main control means 100 (the addition of the AT stock number). The effect displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11 may also be mentioned as an example of a one-shot effect.

  The assist effect is an effect for assisting the player mainly during the AT setting, and in the present embodiment, mainly to the information of the pressing order instruction number transmitted by the pressing order instruction number command from the main control means 100. In response, a push order navigation effect (refers to the above-described push order navigation performed on the side of the secondary control means) is performed. The push order navigation effect is a single effect which displays the push order according to the push order instruction number on the display screen 11a to the player using the liquid crystal display device 11 as the sub-side push order display. (The replay navigation effect as the above-described replay navigation and the bell navigation effect as the bell navigation may be set, and the performance mode of both may be changed). When the pressing order instruction number is uniquely determined by the sub control means (sub side pushing order management means 211), the pushing order navigation effect is performed according to the pressing order instruction number determined by the sub control means.

  As a specific mode of push order navigation effect, for example, when a push order instruction number A2 (corresponding push order “right and left middle”) is determined, as shown in FIG. 18B, the corresponding push order is set. When the numerals to be shown are arranged and displayed from the left in the order of “1, 3, 2” and the push order instruction number A8 (correspondence push order “medium ??”) for the push order game is determined, FIG. As shown in D), a mode in which the numbers indicating the first pressing order to be notified and the symbols of "?" Indicating the second and third pressing orders not displayed are arranged and displayed from the left in the order of "?, 1,?" Are mentioned as an example. Furthermore, when push order instruction number A10 (designed character "character" to aim at) is determined, as shown in FIG. 18 (E), the aspect which displays the character information "Aim at character !!" is mentioned as an example. (See FIG. 16 for an example of display when the other push order instruction number is determined.)

  Also, in the case of displaying from the first push order to the third push order, as shown in FIG. 18 (G), when the player operates the first stop switch in accordance with the displayed first push order, When the player operates the second stop switch in accordance with the displayed second pressing order, the display of the second pressing order is extinguished, and the player displays the third pressed order in accordance with the displayed third pressing order. The display of the third pressing order may be extinguished when the stop switch is operated. In addition, when the player operates the stop switch in the order different from the displayed pressing order, the pressing order navigation effect may be ended immediately. Furthermore, when the pressing order is displayed, the voices of "Naka", "Hidari", and "Migi" are output from the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. so as to match the operation timing of each stop switch. You may do so.

  The notification effect management means 213 mainly executes the time of execution of effects (hereinafter referred to as “informing effect”) by images and sounds to be executed by the sub-sub control means 200B for the purpose of notifying the player of information related to the game. It is configured to manage based on a control command from the main control means 100. As the notification effect, for example, an error notification effect that reports that an error has occurred with character information such as "error occurrence" or that an image is being prepared at the time of power failure recovery is called "image in preparation" The effect etc. which alert | report with text information are mentioned.

  The lamp effect control means 214 is configured to control various illumination effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b, the decoration lamps 32a, 32b, and the back lamps 38a to 38d.

(Each means constituting sub main communication control means 230)
The control command receiving unit 231 is configured to receive the control command from the main control unit 100 and store the control command in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for the received control command).

  Based on the control command from the main control unit 100, the above-mentioned effect command transmission means 232 sub-sub-controls an effect command (for example, an effect command including information on push order instruction number (pushing order) etc.) It is configured to transmit to the means 200B.

  The status command reception unit 233 receives a status command (for example, a status command including information indicating that a reception error of a rendering command has occurred) from the sub-sub control unit 200B, and receives a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, reception Is configured to be stored in the command buffer for the status command.

  Sub-sub control means 200 B is roughly divided into sub main control means 200 A configured as described above, and includes effect execution control means 250 and sub sub communication control means 270. The effect execution control means 250 comprises a game effect execution control means 251 and a notification effect execution control means 252, and the sub-sub communication control means 270 comprises an effect command reception means 271 and a state command transmission means 272. The above-described means in the sub-sub control means 200B are the sub-sub CPU 75, the ROM 76, the RAM 77, the hardware such as the electronic circuit and the software such as the control program stored in the ROM 76 disposed on the sub sub control board 70B shown in FIG. It is a functional representation of what is composed of wear.

(Each means constituting the effect execution control means 250)
The game effect execution control unit 251 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a and 15b, and the like based on the effect command from the sub main control unit 200A, and to execute the above-described game effect.

  The notification effect execution control unit 252 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a and 15b, and the like based on the effect command from the sub main control unit 200A, and execute the above-described notification effect.

(Each means constituting sub-sub communication control means 270)
The effect command receiving unit 271 is configured to receive the effect command from the sub main control unit 200A, and store the effect command in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 77 (for example, a command buffer for the received effect command).

  The state command transmission unit 272 is configured to transmit the above-mentioned state command to the sub main control unit 200A.

  The transmission of the control command from the control command transmitting unit 151, the transmission of the effect command from the effect command transmitting unit 232, and the transmission of the state command from the state command transmitting unit 272 are all performed by the serial communication method (parallel It may be performed by the communication method). Each of the transmitting units 151, 232 and 272 has the same configuration, and the command buffer (CB) as a storage area for temporarily storing the command to be transmitted, and processing such as writing and reading of the command to be transmitted. And a command transmission unit for transmitting a command by serial communication.

  The CB has a plurality of storage areas distinguished by each address, and is configured to be able to store one byte of command data in each storage area. The command processing unit generates command data to be transmitted, writes it in the address area indicated by the write pointer of CB, and reads command data previously written from the address area indicated by the read pointer of CB, and outputs the command data. It is configured to write in TDR (transmission data register) of the transmission unit. The command transmission unit is configured to transfer the command data written to the TDR to a TSR (transmission shift register), and to perform serial conversion and transmission there.

  One command in the present embodiment is usually configured by 2 bytes (checksum is configured by 1 byte). The communication method is asynchronous (asynchronous), and has 1 stop bit and 1 parity bit (even parity) (the communication method and command configuration can be changed as appropriate).

<Notice timing of push order>
Next, the timing of pressing order notification (pushing order navigation) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, in the slot machine 1, the main control unit 100 mainly determines the push order to be notified (also determined by the partial sub control unit 200), and the push order notification is performed by the main control means and the sub control means. It is supposed to be done by both. FIG. 22 shows the timing of the basic push order notification. In the drawings and in the following description, "main" and "sub" mean main control means and sub control means, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 22, when the start lever is operated, the game mode command (any command of game modes 1 to 7) or RT command (non-RT, RT 1 to 5) is sent from main to sub. Command of RT status), push order instruction number command (any command of push order instruction numbers A1 to A9 when notifying push order, command of push order instruction number A0 when not notifying), effect group A number command (any command of effect group numbers 0 to 21) and a combination determination result number command of a role (a combination determination result number 0 or 1 command of a combination) or the like is transmitted.

  In addition, the above-mentioned game mode command, RT command and push order instruction number command are within the range shown by double arrows in the figure (in push order instruction number command, push order notification by the main side push order indicator was performed In the latter case, although the transmission order is arbitrary, these commands are transmitted when the effect group number command and the role combination determination result number command of the role (as mentioned earlier, both are generically called the combination determination result command) Is sent before the reel reaches a constant speed rotation (in the present embodiment, the command is determined so that it is reliably transmitted before the reel reaches a constant speed rotation). Is sent before the start of rotation).

  In addition, the first stop acceptance command, the second stop acceptance command, and the third stop acceptance command are transmitted from the main to the sub when the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation are received. The first stop command, the second stop command and the third stop command are transmitted from the main to the sub, triggered by the first stop, the second stop and the third stop. Furthermore, after the stop symbol determination, all stop commands are transmitted from the main to the sub.

  When informing the pushing order, in the main, for example, the pushing order informing is started before transmitting the pushing order instruction number command (see FIG. 23A), and after transmitting the full rotation stop command, The push order notification is ended before sending the payout amount command of (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, in the sub, for example, after receiving the push order instruction number command, the push order notification is started while the reel reaches the constant speed rotation (see FIG. 23A), and the third stop acceptance command is After the reception, the push order notification is ended before the third stop command is received (see FIG. 22). As described above, in the present embodiment, the period of pressing order notification by the main is set to be longer than the period of pressing order notification by the sub. Even if the push order number transmitted to the sub is not correctly transmitted and the push order notification by the sub is not correct by starting the push order notification by the main earlier, the player is correct by the push order notification by the main. Since the pushing order can be known, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  It should be noted that the notification of the pushing order by the sub is ended halfway (if it is different from the pushing order notified by the player) (it may not be ended). That is, when the pressing order of the second stop operation is different from the notification pressing order, the pressing order notification is ended until the second stop command is received after the second stop acceptance command is received, If the pressing order of the first stop operation is different from the notification pressing order, the pressing order notification is ended after the first stop acceptance command is received until the first stop command is received. By ending on the way, it is also possible to perform an effect of notifying that the pushing order is different thereafter. In the present embodiment, the main push order notification does not end halfway even if the push order by the player is different from the push order notified (in this way, the player carefully checks the informed push order. May), but may end. In this case, it is preferable to end the push order notification by the main after or at the same time after the end of the push order notification by the sub. After the notification of the order of pressing by the main is completed, the notification of order of pressing by the sub may be ended. Further, as the start timing of the push order notification by the main, it is possible to set arbitrarily as long as it is until the reel rotates at a constant speed after the start lever is operated.

  In the present embodiment, basically, the push order notification by the main is started by operating the start lever, but for example, the fact that the reel has started to rotate and that the reel has reached constant speed rotation As an opportunity, push order notification can be started. In addition, when notification of the first pressing order is not performed, and the second and third notification of the pressing order are performed when the player makes the correct first pressing order, the first stop operation reception has been received. With this as an opportunity, notification of push order may be started. Further, when it is determined that the pushing order by the main player is different from the pushing order notified by the player, another pushing order is newly determined, and it is switched to the notification of the pushing order. In the case of switching the pressing order notification by the main, the pressing order notification by the sub may also be switched.

  As a change example of the start timing of the push order notification, as shown in FIG. 23B, the push order notification by the main and the push order notification by the sub may be simultaneously started. Further, as another example of changing the start timing of the push order notification, as shown in FIG. 23C, the push order notification by the sub may be started earlier than the push order notification by the main. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the push order instruction number A0 (not notifying the push order) is determined on the main side, the push order instruction number may be uniquely determined on the sub side. . In that case, the notification of the order of pressing by the main is not performed and only the notification of order of pressing by the sub is performed, but the start timing and the end timing of the notification of the order of pressing by the sub may be the same as those described above. it can.

<Circuit configuration of main control board (difference between test specification and mass production specification)>
Next, in the case where the slot machine 1 is manufactured as a test specification (specification for receiving a predetermined test) and in the case where it is manufactured as a mass-production specification (specification for setting up a game arcade) The differences in the circuit configuration of the main control board will be described. The main IC shown in FIG. 24 is a one-chip microcomputer on which predetermined circuit components (main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, interface circuit etc.) disposed on the above-mentioned main control board 60 (see FIG. 2) are mounted. , Terminals D0 to D7 for parallel signal output, terminals TX0 to TX3 for serial signals (there are terminals dedicated to output and terminals capable of input / output switching), terminals PI0 to PI7 for parallel signal input, etc. (There are various other terminals, but only some of them are shown).

  A plurality of parallel signal output ports (two of which are set as the above-mentioned test output ports PO7 and PO8) are provided in the main IC, and the signal data from each output port is , And are output from the terminals D0 to D7. Furthermore, a plurality of serial signal output ports (one of which is set as the above-mentioned test output port SO0) are provided inside the main IC, and test signals from the test output port SO0 are provided. Is output from the terminal XO0 (it is a terminal dedicated to output in this embodiment, but may be a terminal capable of input / output switching). In addition, a plurality of input ports for parallel signals are provided inside the main IC, and signal data is input to each input port through the terminals PI0 to PI7.

  In addition, although the test ICs 1 and 2 and the connectors CN 1 and CN 2 shown in FIG. 24 are mounted in the case of the test specification, they are not mounted in the case of the mass production specification. In the case of the test specification, the input terminals D0 to D7 of the test IC1 and IC2 are connected to the terminals D0 to D7 of the main IC, and the output terminals Q0 to Q7 of the test IC1 and the test IC2 The output terminals Q0 to Q7 are respectively connected to the signal input portions 1 to 8 and 9 to 10 of the connector CN1. Further, the signal input unit 2 of the connector CN2 is connected to the terminal TX0 of the main IC. The test signals (the operation state test signal and the win information test signal described above) output from the test output ports PO7 and PO8 are transmitted through the test IC1 and IC2, the connector CN1 and a predetermined relay device (not shown). Is sent to a test device (not shown). Further, the test signal (the symbol stop test signal described above) output from the test output port SO0 is transmitted to the test apparatus via the connector CN2 and the relay device.

  Further, a resistor R1 (for example, a resistance value of 4.7 kΩ) shown in FIG. 24 is mounted between a power supply voltage VCC (for example, a voltage value of 12.5 V) and a terminal PI0 in the case of test specification (in the case of mass production specification). Is a pull-up resistor that is not mounted, and a resistor R2 (for example, a resistance value of 0 kΩ) is mounted between the reference potential (0 V) and the terminal PI0 in the mass production specification (not mounted in the test specification) ) Is a pull-down resistor. Thus, by changing the resistance (and mounting position) to be mounted between the test specification and the mass production specification, the potential of the terminal PI0 is high level (hereinafter "H level") in the case of the test specification. In the case of mass production specifications, it is configured to be low level (hereinafter referred to as "L level"). In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the H level or the L level, and based on the determination result, the test specification is at H level, and the mass specification is at L level. Is to be identified.

  The resistance value of the resistor R2 can be set to an arbitrary value (for example, a resistance value of 4.7 kΩ) as long as the potential of the terminal PI0 becomes L level when mounted. However, considering that there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as shorting the power supply VCC and the terminal PI0 may be performed in order to cause the test specification to be erroneously recognized despite being actually a mass production specification. The resistance value of the resistor R2 is preferably set to a value as low as possible. If the resistance value of the resistor R2 is low, when the power supply VCC and the terminal PI0 are short-circuited, the current value flowing in the main IC becomes excessive and the main CPU 61 is stopped, thereby preventing the game from being performed illegally Because it is possible to Also, contrary to the above, mount the resistor R1 between the power supply voltage VCC and the terminal PI0 in the mass production specification, and mount the resistor R2 between the reference potential and the terminal PI0 in the test specification You may do so. In this case, if the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the L level, the test specification may be identified, and if it is the H level, the mass production specification may be identified.

  Further, instead of changing the mounted resistors R1 and R2 between the test specification and the mass production specification, the resistance is used regardless of which specification as in the modified example M1 shown in FIG. 25 (A). With both R1 and R2 mounted, it is possible to identify which of the two specifications by switching the open / close state of the switch provided between the terminal PI0 and the resistor R2 between the test specification and the mass production specification. It may be configured to Specifically, in the test specification, the switch is open (in this case, the terminal PI0 is pulled up and the potential is H level). In the mass production specification, the switch is closed (in this case, the terminal PI0). When the voltage divider with resistances R1 and R2 is connected and the potential is L level), the test specification is when the potential of the terminal PI0 is H level, and the mass production specification is when L level. And may be identified. Alternatively, conversely, in the test specification, the switch is closed (in this case, the potential of the terminal PI0 is L level), and in the mass production specification, is open (in this case, the potential of the terminal PI0 is H level). When the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the L level, it may be identified as the test specification, and when it is at the H level, it may be identified as the mass production specification. When adopting such a modification M1, a configuration for restricting the operation of the switch (for example, providing a thickness at a position corresponding to the switch of the substrate case) so that the switch can not be operated illegally, In the state of being housed in the substrate case, it is preferable to provide the switch in an open state).

  Further, as a circuit configuration connected to the terminal PI0, the aspect of the modification M2 shown in FIG. 25 (B) may be adopted. In this modification M2, four resistors R4 (for example, resistance value 13 kΩ), R5 (for example, resistance value 0 kΩ), R6 (for example, resistance value 62 kΩ), R7 (for example, resistance value 39 kΩ) arranged as illustrated. ) Is connected to the terminal PI0. Of these four resistors, the resistors R4, R6 and R7 remain mounted in either the test specification or mass production specification, and the resistor R5 is mounted in the test specification, mass production specification Is not mounted (ie, in the case of test specification and mass production specification, the voltage dividing circuit connected to the terminal PI0 is replaced). In this example, the potential of the terminal PI0 is L level in the test specification in which the resistor R5 is mounted, and is H in the mass production specification in which the resistor R5 is not mounted. Therefore, the potential of the terminal PI0 is L If it is a level, it is identified as a test specification, and if it is an H level, it is identified as a mass production specification. Alternatively, conversely, the resistor R5 is not mounted in the case of the test specification but is mounted in the case of the mass production specification, and the test specification, L when the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the H level. If it is a level, it may be identified as a mass production specification.

In the modification M2, the potential at the terminal PI0 (= the potential at the point B in the drawing) can be calculated as follows.
· In the case of a voltage divider circuit that mounts the resistor R5 Potential at point A = ((R5 (R6 + R7) / (R5 + R6 + R7)) / (R4 + ((R5 (R6 + R7))) / (R5 + R6 + R7))) × 12.5 = 0 (V)
Potential at point B = potential at point A = 0 (V)
· In the case of a voltage divider circuit in which the resistor R5 is not mounted: Potential at point A = ((R6 + R7) / (R4 + R6 + R7)) × 12.5 11 11 (V)
Potential at point B = (R7 / (R4 + R6 + R7)) × 12.5 ≒ 4.3 (V))

  Also, as the circuit configuration connected to the terminal PI0, the aspect of the modification M3 shown in FIG. 25C may be adopted. In this modification M3, a voltage dividing circuit including three resistors R8 (for example, a resistance of 1.5 kΩ), R9 (for example, a resistance of 1 kΩ) and R10 (for example, a resistance of 0 kΩ) arranged as illustrated. Connect to terminal PI0. Of these three resistors, the resistors R8 and R9 remain mounted in either the test specification or the mass production specification, and the resistor R10 is mounted in the test specification, the mass production specification (Ie, in the case of the test specification and the mass production specification, the voltage dividing circuit connected to the terminal PI 0 will be replaced). In this example, the potential of the terminal PI0 is L level in the test specification in which the resistor R10 is mounted, and H in the mass production specification in which the resistor R10 is not mounted. Therefore, the potential of the terminal PI0 is L If it is a level, it is identified as a test specification, and if it is an H level, it is identified as a mass production specification. Alternatively, conversely, the resistor R10 is not mounted in the case of the test specification, but is mounted in the case of the mass production specification, and the test specification, L when the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the H level. If it is a level, it may be identified as a mass production specification.

In the modification M3, the potential of the terminal PI0 (= the potential at the point C in the drawing) can be calculated as follows.
· In the case of a voltage divider circuit that mounts the resistor R10 Potential at point C = ((R9 · R10) / (R9 + R10)) / (R8 + (R9 · R10) / (R9 + R10))) × 12.5 = 0 ( V)
· In the case of a voltage divider circuit in which the resistor R10 is not mounted: Potential at point C = (R9 / (R8 + R9)) × 12.5 = 5 (V)

  In the case of a configuration in which a pull-up resistor or a pull-down resistor is connected to the terminal PI0, it is necessary to replace the resistor mounted on the substrate depending on whether it is a test specification or a mass production specification. On the other hand, in the case of the modified examples M2 and M3, the manufacturing process is simplified because it is only necessary not to mount a part of the plurality of resistors mounted in the test specification in the mass production specification. There is an advantage to gain. Of course, in the case of the modified examples M2 and M3, the resistance mounted on the substrate is replaced depending on whether it is a test specification or a mass production specification, thereby changing the voltage dividing circuit connected to the terminal PI0. You may Moreover, about the specific structure of a voltage dividing circuit, the thing of arbitrary aspects is employable.

<Storage area of information>
Next, a storage area of information in the main control means of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, a first PRG area and a second PRG area are set in the ROM (ROM 62 in FIG. 2) (PRG is an abbreviation of program). In the first PRG area, a control program (program for determining a winning combination, a program for reel control, etc.) related to the progress of a normal game, and data used in the control program (a winning symbol selection table, a symbol stop table, etc.) are stored. It is an area. The second PRG area includes a control program for preventing fraudulent activity, a control program for testing (a program for transmitting a test signal, etc.), and data used in the control program (a stop acceptance specification table, described later, etc.) Is an area to be stored. Of course, there is no problem in storing these in the first PRG area even if it is a control program for preventing fraudulent activity or a control program for testing.

  On the other hand, in the RAM (RAM 63 in FIG. 2), a first PRG area corresponding area and a second PRG area corresponding area are set. The first PRG area corresponding area is a storage area mainly used by the control program stored in the first PRG area, and the second PRG area corresponding area is mainly used by the control program stored in the second PRG area. Storage area. The control program stored in the first PRG area is permitted to both write (including change) and read data to the first PRG area corresponding area, but write data to the second PRG area corresponding area Is not permitted and only read is permitted. Similarly, in the control program stored in the second PRG area, both writing and reading of data are permitted for the second PRG area corresponding area, but writing of data is permitted for the first PRG area corresponding area. It is not possible to read only. When the process by the control program stored in the first PRG area is shifted to the process by the control program stored in the second PRG area, the interrupt is prohibited (stored in the first PRG area in the timer interrupt process). (Except when transitioning from processing by the control program to processing by the control program stored in the second PRG area), protection (saving) of information stored in each register before the transfer is performed. Further, when returning from the process by the control program stored in the second PRG area to the process by the control program stored in the first PRG area, an interrupt is permitted (stored in the second PRG area in the timer interrupt process) Information on each protected register is restored (except when transitioning to processing by the control program stored in the first PRG area from processing by the control program).

  In the present embodiment, storage areas (address areas) shown in FIG. 27 are set in the first PRG area corresponding area. The operating state flag storage area (address number “F01CH” (“H” at the end means hexadecimal number) in the RAM) shown in FIG. 6A corresponds to the operating state flag described above. It is set as an area for storing information as to whether or not it is in the re-play mode, whether it is in the BB mode, and whether it is in the RB mode. Bit 0 of this operation state flag storage area corresponds to the aforementioned replay operation state flag. And, storing the information of “1” in the bit 0 corresponds to setting (ON) the aforementioned replaying operation status flag, and storing the information of “0” represents the replaying operation status flag It corresponds to clearing (OFF). Also, bit 3 of the operating state flag storage area corresponds to the aforementioned BB operating state flag. And storing the information of “1” in this bit 3 corresponds to setting the above-mentioned BB operating state flag (ON), and storing the information of “0” clears the BB operating state flag ( It corresponds to turning off. Furthermore, bit 4 of the operating state flag storage area corresponds to the aforementioned RB operating state flag. And storing the information of “1” in this bit 4 corresponds to setting (ON) the above-mentioned RB operation status flag, and storing the information of “0” clears the RB operation status flag ( It corresponds to turning off. In the present embodiment, bits 7 to 5, 2, 1 of the operating state flag storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state (cleared state) where information of "0" is stored.

  The operating symbol display flag storage area (address number "F043H" in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27 (B) corresponds to the above-mentioned operating symbol display flag, and whether or not the replaying operation symbol is displayed. Or, it is set as an area for storing information on whether or not the BB operation symbol is displayed. Bit 0 of this operation symbol display flag storage area corresponds to the aforementioned re-play operation symbol display flag. And, storing the information of “1” in this bit 0 corresponds to setting the re-playing operation symbol display flag (ON), storing the information of “0” re-playing operation symbol display flag It corresponds to clearing (OFF). Also, bit 3 of the operating symbol display flag storage area corresponds to the aforementioned BB operating symbol display flag. And storing the information of "1" in this bit 3 corresponds to setting the BB operation symbol display flag (ON), and storing the information of "0" clears the BB operation symbol display flag ( It corresponds to turning off. Note that, in the present embodiment, bits 7 to 4 and 2 and 1 of the operation state flag storage area are unused areas, and are in a state where information of “0” is always stored (cleared state).

  The winning combination / RP combination determination result number storage area (address number “F048H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27C is an area in which information of the combination determination result number of winning combination / RP described above is stored. . Bits 5 to 0 of the winning combination / RP combination determination result number storage area correspond to the aforementioned winning combination / RP combination determination result flag. And, in this bit 5 to 0, numerical data of the winning combination determination result number of the winning combination / RP selected by the winning combination determination process (binary numerical data. Storing “(B: binary number)”) corresponds to setting (ON) the winning combination / RP combination determination result number flag, and storing “0” information in all of bits 5 to 0 Is equivalent to clearing (OFF) the winning combination / RP combination determination result number flag. In the present embodiment, bits 7 and 6 of the winning combination / RP combination determination result number storage area are unused areas, and information “0” is always stored (cleared state).

  A combination determination result number storage area (referred to as an address number “F049H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27D is an area in which information of the combination determination result number of the combination described above is stored. Bit 0 of the combination determination result number storage area corresponds to the combination determination result flag described above. And storing the information of "1" in this bit 0 corresponds to setting (ON) the combination determination result number flag, and storing the information of "0" is the combination determination result It corresponds to clearing (OFF) the number flag. In the present embodiment, bits 7 to 1 of the combination determination result number storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state where information of “0” is stored (cleared state).

  A push order designation number storage area (address number "F0B8H" in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27E is an area in which information of the selected push order designation numbers A0 to A9 is stored. In this push order instruction number storage area, numerical data of push order instruction numbers A0 to A9 in bits 3 to 0 (binary numerical data. For example, if push order instruction number A3, "3" = "0011 B" In the case of the push order instruction number A6, storing “6” = “0110 B”) corresponds to storing the information of the push order instruction number. In the case of the push order instruction number A0, numerical data “0” = “0000 B” is stored in bits 3 to 0, which is the same as clearing bits 3 to 0. The numerical data stored in the push order instruction number storage area is cleared at the end of the game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the push order instruction number A0 is selected (push order instruction numbers A1 to A9). Is not selected), the process of storing the numerical data "0" is not performed (may be performed). Further, in the present embodiment, bits 7 to 4 of the push order designation number storage area are unused areas, and are in a state where information of “0” is always stored (cleared state).

  Although not shown in the figure, in order to cope with the case where push order instruction numbers A7 to A9 are selected, information of push order instruction numbers A1 to A6 is stored in addition to the push order instruction number storage area. A storage area (hereinafter referred to as a "storage area for pressing order determination") is set. The push order instruction numbers A7 to A9 are selected when the game mode 3 is set, and any of the win determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected by the win determination process and the above push order hit game is performed. If one of the winning combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected regardless of whether or not the winning sequence hit game is won, any of the pressing order instruction numbers A1 to A6 is selected. Is to be elected first. Therefore, two presses of a normal push order instruction number (one of push order instruction numbers A1 to A6) and a push order instruction number for a push order placement game (one of push order instruction numbers A7 to A9) are made. A state occurs in which the order number is selected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the normal push order instruction number (any one of A1 to A6) is configured to be stored not only in the push order instruction number storage area described above but also in the push order assignment storage area. When the push order instruction number (any of A7 to A9) for the push order hit game is selected, information of the normal push order instruction number stored in the push order instruction number storage area before that While the key is pressed and rewritten to the push order instruction number information for the hit order hit game, the information of the normal push order indication number stored in the push order hit determination storage area is held as it is. Then, when the push order instruction number information stored in the push order instruction number storage area notifies the push order (especially, the push order instruction number for the push order hit game indicates the push order in the push order hit game The information on the pressing order instruction number stored in the pressing order determination storage area is used to determine whether or not the pressing order game is correct. In addition, as the storage timing of the information, when the information of the normal push order instruction number is stored in the push order instruction number storage area, the same information should be stored also in the push order application determination storage area. Can. On the other hand, when the normal push order instruction number is selected, the information is stored only in the push order instruction number storage area, and when the push order instruction number for the push order hit game is selected, the push order instruction number The information of the normal push order instruction number stored in the storage area is transferred to the push order determination storage area, and the push order instruction number information for the push order hit game is stored in the push order instruction number storage area. May be

  The winning information output period timer storage area (address number "F030H" in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27F is the above-mentioned winning information test signal (actual winning when the slot machine 1 has a test specification. The timer value of a timer (referred to as a "winning information output period timer") set to identify whether it is a period (the above-mentioned winning information output period) for outputting information in a set state It is an area where information is stored. In the win information output period timer storage area, timer value (binary number) information ("25" at the time of setting the timer) of the win information output period timer is stored in bits 4 to 0, and the timer allocation described later Every time the loading process is performed, information of values "24" to "0" obtained by sequentially subtracting "1" is stored. In the present embodiment, bits 7 to 5 of the winning information output period timer storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state where information of “0” is stored (cleared state). The winning information output period corresponds to a period (= 2, 235 ms × 24 = 53.64 ms) in which a timer interrupt process described later is executed 24 times.

  When the slot machine 1 has a test specification, the information on the winning combination / RP combination determination result number stored in the above-mentioned winning combination / RP combination determination result number storage area is information on the winning combination / RP combination determination result number in the test apparatus. The information of an identifier (referred to as a "winning / RP identifier" as appropriate) for identifying a certain thing is added and configured as the aforementioned winning / RP winning information, and from the above-mentioned test output port PO7, the winning information test It is output to the test device as a signal. Specifically, the winning / RP winning information consists of 8-bit data, the upper 2 bits are data of the above-mentioned winning / RP identifier data, and the lower 6 bits are the data of winning / RP combination determination result number. Ru. When the win / RP win information is output as a win information test signal, each bit D7 to D0 of the test output port PO7 (terminal D7 of the main IC shown in FIG. 24 as shown in FIG. 28A). Among the bits D5 to D0 corresponding to D0 to D0, respectively, data ("0") of the winning or RP combination determination result number stored in the bits 5 to 0 of the above-mentioned winning combination / RP combination determination result number storage area The data of any of “51” to “51” are set, and the data (“0” in bit D 7 and the data “1” in bit D 6) of the identifier of winning / RP is set in bits D 7 and D 6 .

  Similarly, the information on the combination determination result number of the combination stored in the combination determination result number storage area is an identifier for identifying that the test apparatus is the information on the combination determination result number of the combination (as appropriate The information of “character identifier” is added and configured as the aforementioned item winning information, and is output from the test output port PO7 to the testing apparatus as the winning information test signal. Specifically, the item winning information is composed of 8-bit data, with the upper 2 bits being data of the above-mentioned item identifier, and the lower 6 bits being being data of the item determination result number of the item. Then, when the prize winning information is output as a winning information test signal, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), the bits D5 to D0 among the bits D7 to D0 of the test output port PO7 are described above. Data of bits 5 to 0 of the role determination result number storage area is set (bit D0 is data of the result determination number of the role of the role (“1” or “0”), “0” to bits D5 to D1 Data is set, and data of an identifier of a character (data of "1" in bit D7 and data of "0" in bit D6) is set in bits D7 and D6.

  When the slot machine 1 is in the test specification, whether or not it is a replaying operation status (the above-mentioned replaying operation status flag is ON or OFF) stored in the above operation status flag storage area, the BB operating status Information (whether or not the above-mentioned BB operation state flag is ON or OFF) and whether or not it is the RB operation state (whether or not the above-mentioned RB operation state flag is ON or OFF) The information (referred to as “information”) is output from the above-mentioned test output port PO8 to the test apparatus as the above-mentioned operation state test signal. Specifically, the operation status flag information is composed of 8-bit data, and the lowermost bit is the ON / OFF data (“1” or “0”) of the replay operation status flag, and from the lower The fourth bit is the data (“1” or “0”) of the BB operation status flag ON / OFF, and the data of the fifth bit is the RB operation status flag ON / OFF (“1” or “0” ). When the operating state flag information is output as an operating state test signal, as shown in FIG. 28C, the bits of the operating state flag storage area for each bit D7 to D0 of the test output port PO8. Data 7 to 0 are set (bit D4 is data of ON / OFF of RB operation status flag, bit D3 is data of ON / OFF of BB operation status flag, bit D0 is replay operation status flag Data "0" is set to ON / OFF data, bits D7 to D5, D2 and D1).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning combination / RP identifier information is added to the winning combination / RP combination determination result number information stored in the winning combination / RP combination determination result number storage area, and the winning / RP winning information is Configured, it is output to the test device from the test output port PO7 as a winning information test signal (the same applies to winning combination winning information), but about the area for storing winning combination · RP winning information, winning combination winning information Is not provided. This is effective in that the increase of the storage area used can be suppressed when the storage capacity of the RAM is small. On the other hand, as a modified example, an area for storing winning and RP winning information and prize winning information may be provided in the RAM. FIG. 29 (A) shows an example in which a winning / RP winning information storage area (address number “F04CH” in the RAM) for storing winning / RP winning information is set in the RAM, FIG. 29 (B) Shows an example of setting a prize winning information storage area for storing prize winning information (referred to as an address number "F04DH" in the RAM) in the RAM.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the stop acceptance designation table T1 shown in FIG. 30A and the stop acceptance designation table T2 shown in FIG. 30B are stored in the second PRG area of the ROM, the area is set. It is done. As shown in FIG. 30, the stop acceptance designation table T1 includes 24 continuous address areas (address numbers "** 00H" to "** 27H" in the ROM) in the second PRG area of the ROM The stop acceptance specification table T2 stores four consecutive address areas (address numbers in the ROM "**" in the second PRG area of the ROM). 30H "to" ** 33H ".

  The stop acceptance specification table T1 outputs the above-described symbol stop test signal (signal for transmitting information on the optimum push order and the push position) to the test apparatus in the state not in the BB operation state (BB non-operation) Is a table to be referenced. In the stop acceptance designation table T1, in the four storage areas from address number "** 00H" to "** 03H", the optimum push order and push position corresponding to push order instruction number A0 (push order unknown) Information is stored. Specifically, data of “0” corresponding to the numerical value (optimum pressing order) of push order instruction number A0 is stored in the storage area of address number “** 00H”, and the address number “** 01H” is stored. In the storage area, data of the left reel stop reception position (the optimum push position on the left reel) is stored. Similarly, in the storage area of address number "** 02H", data of the middle reel stop reception position (the optimum push position on the middle reel) is stored, and in the storage area of address number "** 03H", the right reel is stopped. Data of the reception position (the optimum push position on the right reel) is stored. The data of the left reel stop receiving position is data of a symbol number ("3" in this embodiment) in the left reel. This stops when the symbol of symbol number 3 in the left reel is at a predetermined position (referred to as the upper position in the display window W) when the push order instruction number A0 is selected during BB non-operation. It means that it is optimal to perform the operation (the probability that the game winning combination will be established is the highest) (the same applies to the data of the middle reel stop acceptance position and the data of the right reel stop acceptance position).

  In addition, in the four storage areas (address numbers “** 04H” to “** 07H”) following the four storage areas corresponding to push order designation number A0, push order designation number A1 (“left middle right”) The information of the optimum push order and push position corresponding to is stored, and in the subsequent four storage areas (address numbers "** 08H" to "** 0BH"), push order instruction number A2 ("right and left middle") In the stop acceptance designation table T1, information on the optimum push order and push position corresponding to each of the push order instruction numbers A0 to A9 is stored, such that information on the optimum push order and push position corresponding to is stored. It is stored in each of four consecutive storage areas. The stored data "127" in the stop acceptance designation table T1 means that the optimum pressing position is an arbitrary position (there is no difference between the pressing positions with advantage and disadvantage).

  On the other hand, the stop acceptance designation table T2 is a table referred to in order to output the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal to the test apparatus during BB operation. In the stop acceptance designation table T2, in the four storage areas from address number "** 30H" to "** 33H", the optimum push order and push position corresponding to push order instruction number A0 (push order unknown) Information is stored. Specifically, data "0" corresponding to the numerical value of push order instruction number A0 is stored in the storage area of address number "** 30H", and address numbers "** 31H" to "** 33H" In the storage area up to this point, respective data (all “127”) of the left reel stop reception position, the middle reel stop reception position, and the right reel stop reception position are stored.

<Output timing of test signal>
Next, the output timing of the test signal described above will be described. As outlined above, the above-mentioned winning information test signal is subjected to timer interrupt processing in timer interrupt processing described later which is executed every predetermined fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). Although outputted each time, the winning information test signal in the state where the actual winning information is set is outputted only during the above-mentioned winning information output period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), the above-mentioned winning information output period timer is set for the prize winning information, and the period is only for the period from "24" to "13". In each timer interrupt process executed in step (c), it is set to the test output port PO7, and is output to the test apparatus as a winning information test signal 12 times in total. On the other hand, the winning / RP winning information is set in the test output port PO7 in each timer interrupt process executed in that period, only when the timer value of the winning information output period timer is from "12" to "1". Similarly, a total of 12 times is output to the test apparatus as a winning information test signal. That is, the period from "24" to "1" of the timer value of the winning information output period timer is the winning information output period, and other than that, the winning information in a state where the actual winning information is not set. A test signal (for example, a signal of "00000000B") is output.

  In the reel rotation start preparation process described later, the above-mentioned winning information output period timer must secure at least the minimum game time (from the start of the reel rotation in one game to the start of the reel rotation in the next game). It should be set after confirming that the required time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has passed. For this reason, in one winning information output period, from the time when the winning information test signal in which the winning item test information is set is first output, the winning information in which the winning item information is set in the next winning information output period The time until the test signal is first output is naturally greater than the minimum game time. Therefore, in the test apparatus, it is possible to confirm that the minimum game time is secured by checking at which timing the output of the winning information test signal in which the bonus item winning information is set is started. Become. Therefore, it is not necessary to output another signal indicating that the minimum game time is secured to the test apparatus (thereby reducing the burden of control processing).

  The above operation state test signal is also output each time the timer interrupt process is executed, similarly to the winning information test signal, but the replay operation state flag BB is set to the operation state test signal. The operating state flag and the RB operating state flag are turned on and off at the following timing. That is, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the replaying operation status flag is set from OFF to ON in the later-described game start processing in the game after the replaying operation symbol is displayed, when the game is over (described later It is turned off in the game end check processing). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31C, the BB operating state flag is set from OFF to ON in the game start process in the game after the BB operating symbol is displayed, and at the same time, the RB operating state flag is also switched from OFF to ON It is set.

  The BB operation state flag once set to ON is continuously turned ON until the termination condition of the BB game (disbursement of game medals of over 450) is satisfied. On the other hand, after the RB operating state flag is set to ON together with the BB operating state flag, it is temporarily switched to OFF every two games (every time an RB gaming end condition is satisfied) and set to ON again. . The standby time (freeze) at the end of the RB operation outlined above is set between the time when the RB operation state flag is switched to OFF and the time it is set to ON again. In the embodiment, it is set as a period (= 2.235 ms × 5 ≒ 11 ms) in which timer interrupt processing described later is executed five times. That is, within the waiting time at the end of RB operation, the BB operation state flag is set to ON, and the RB operation state flag is set to OFF, and in each timer interrupt process executed during that time, the above operation state flag The operation state test signal carrying information is output from the test output port PO8 a total of five times. Meanwhile, during the same time, the game progress control process described later is not executed, and the reception of the game operation is not performed.

  In addition, the standby time at the end of RB operation is for letting the test device identify that the RB game is operating continuously (intermittently) while temporarily becoming inactive during BB operation, and any time It can be set to However, the standby time at the end of RB operation is set even in the case of mass production specifications (it may not be set in the case of mass production specifications), and the freeze during the standby time at the end of RB operation is This is different from a general freeze that is set to cause the player to recognize in order to obtain an effect on the presentation, so a short time during which the player does not feel uncomfortable (cannot recognize that it is freezing) It is preferable to set (for example, about 2.235 × 2 to 25 ≒ 4.5 to 56 ms). The above-mentioned standby time at the end of RB operation (≒ 11 ms) is a short time during which the player does not feel discomfort in the mass production specification, and in the test specification, the test apparatus correctly recognizes the OFF period of the RB operation status flag. It is set as a sufficient time to get.

  Further, the symbol stop test signal is output in a symbol stop test signal output process described later. In this embodiment, the symbol stop test signal output process is performed after the start lever operation reception (in fact, after being transmitted from the test apparatus, after receiving a signal indicating that the start lever has been operated (game start command signal) 2.) It is designed to be performed before the processing (which is performed in the reel rotation start preparation processing described later) which determines whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. This has the following advantages. That is, in a test such as a type test, the symbol stop test signal may be required to be output within a predetermined time after receiving the game start command signal, but the predetermined time is set to be shorter than the minimum game time (Eg, 2 seconds). On the other hand, in the test, if it is played in the shortest time, the time from the reception of the game start command signal to the reception of the next game start command signal is considerably shorter than the minimum game time, for example, about 1 second. there is a possibility. In that case, if the symbol stop test signal output process is executed after the process to determine whether the minimum game time has elapsed, there is a possibility that the request for the output timing of the symbol stop test signal can not be met. On the other hand, it is possible to sufficiently respond to such a request by performing processing before determining whether the minimum game time has elapsed. Also, while it is necessary to execute various control processes after the process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, in the test, the next game start command is received after the game start command signal is received. Since the time until the signal is received becomes short, there is a time margin after the game start instruction signal is received until the minimum game time elapses. Therefore, even if the symbol stop test signal output process is performed before the process of determining whether the minimum game time has elapsed, the processing load can be reduced.

[Major control processing]
Hereinafter, main control processing performed in the above-described slot machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. Below, among the control processing performed in the main control unit 100, test specification determination preparation processing, game progression control processing, and timer interrupt processing will be described first with reference to FIGS. Next, among various control processes performed in the sub main control unit 200A, particularly, program start process, sub main loop process, and power-off process will be described using FIGS.

<Test specification judgment preparation process>
The test specification determination preparation process is a process performed when the power is turned on. As shown in FIG. 32A, first, the input port is read (step R11). In this input port reading, in particular, reading of each potential level of the above-mentioned terminals PI0 to PI7 is performed. Next, it is determined whether the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level (step R12). The test level refers to the level (H level or L level) set as the potential level of the terminal PI0 when the slot machine 1 has a test specification. That is, if the terminal PI0 is set to H level in the test specification, the test level is H level, conversely, if the terminal PI0 is set to L level in the test specification, the test level is It means L level. If it is determined in step R12 that the potential at the terminal PI0 is at the test level, the flag under test (a flag for identifying whether the potential at the terminal PI0 at power-on was at the test level) is turned on. (Step R13) and return. If the level is not at the time of test, the in-test flag is not set and the process returns.

  As in the modified example J1 shown in FIG. 32B, in the test specification determination preparation process, the process may not be performed particularly including the process of confirming the potential level of the terminal PI0. Further, as in the modified example J2 shown in FIG. 32C, the flag during test is not set, and the potential level (H level or L level) of the terminal PI0 is stored in a predetermined storage area such as RAM (RAM 63). You may carry out (step R14A).

<Playing progress control processing>
The game progress control process to be described next is a basic process that is repeatedly executed during the game, and as shown in FIG. 33, first, the game start process is performed (step S1). In this game start process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, information on a symbol combination display flag is acquired (step S31). Specifically, the A register (main CPU 61) has a data value (data value of the operating symbol display flag) stored in the operating symbol display flag storage area (see FIG. 27B). Process the same as for. Next, it is determined whether or not the BB operation symbol is displayed in the previous game (step S32). Here, if the BB operation symbol is displayed, data on the number of obtainable game medals ("450") at the time of BB operation (at the time of operation start) is stored in a predetermined storage area (step S33) and the process proceeds to step S34. If the BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S34 without performing the process of step S33.

In this step S34, data of the operating state flag is generated. Specifically, the following processes (1) to (5) are performed.
(1) The data of the address of the operation state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) is stored in the HL register. Specifically, since the address of the operation symbol display flag storage area is "F01CH", the H register value = "F0H" and the L register value = "1CH".
(2) Data value stored in the A register (= data value of the operation symbol display flag) and data value stored in the storage area of the address stored in the HL register (= operation status flag storage area) OR operation of = data value of operation state flag), and the result of the operation is stored in A register.
(3) The data value stored in the A register (= the data value obtained by the above OR operation) is stored in the C register.
(4) The data value of bit 3 (= BB) in the data value stored in the A register (= data value obtained by the above OR operation) and the data value of the operation symbol display flag (= 8 bit data value) AND the 8-bit data value (= "00001000B") in which the data value corresponding to the operation symbol display flag is "1" and the data values of other bits are "0", and the operation result is A Store in register.
(5) An operation is performed to shift the data value stored in the A register (= data value obtained by the above AND operation) to the left by 1 bit, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

  After the process of step S34, the operation state flag is updated (step S35). Specifically, the data value stored in the A register and the data value stored in the C register after the process of (5) in step S34 are ORed with each other and stored in the A register. . Then, the updated operating state flag is stored (step S36). Specifically, processing is performed to store the data value stored in the A register in the storage area of the address stored in the HL register (= operation state flag storage area). As a result, the information on the previous operation status flag is replaced with the information on the updated operation status flag.

As a specific example of the processes (2) to (5) in step S34 described above and the processes of steps S35 and S36, when the BB operation symbol is displayed in the previous game (hereinafter referred to as "specific example 1"), When the BB operation pattern is already displayed and the BB and RB are in operation (hereinafter referred to as "example 2"), the BB operation symbol is already displayed and the BB is in operation but the RB is not in operation ( Hereinafter, it will be shown how the value of each register changes with respect to “specific example 3”.
[Specific example 1]
(Step S34)
(2) A register value: "00001000B"
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00000000B"
A register value after OR operation: "00001000B"
(3) A register value: "00001000B"
C register value: "00001000B"
(4) A register value: "00001000B"
Data value when bit 3 is "1" and other bits are "0": "00001000B"
A register value after AND operation: "00001000B"
(5) A register value (before left shift): "00001000B"
A register value (after left shift): "00010000B"
(Step S35)
A register value: "00010000B"
C register value: "00001000B"
A register value (after OR operation): "00011000B"
(Step S36)
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00011000B"
[Specific Example 2]
(Step S34)
(2) A register value: "00000000B"
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00011000B"
A register value after OR operation: "00011000B"
(3) A register value: "00011000B"
C register value: "00011000B"
(4) A register value: "00011000B"
Data value when bit 3 is "1" and other bits are "0": "00001000B"
A register value after AND operation: "00001000B"
(5) A register value (before left shift): "00001000B"
A register value (after left shift): "00010000B"
(Step S35)
A register value: "00010000B"
C register value: "00011000B"
A register value (after OR operation): "00011000B"
(Step S36)
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00011000B"
[Specific Example 3]
(Step S34)
(2) A register value: "00000000B"
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00001000B"
A register value after OR operation: "00001000B"
(3) A register value: "00001000B"
C register value: "00001000B"
(4) A register value: "00001000B"
Data value when bit 3 is "1" and other bits are "0": "00001000B"
A register value after AND operation: "00001000B"
(5) A register value (before left shift): "00001000B"
A register value (after left shift): "00010000B"
(Step S35)
A register value: "00010000B"
C register value: "00001000B"
A register value (after OR operation): "00011000B"
(Step S36)
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00011000B"

  Next, it is determined whether the RB operation has been started (step S37). Specifically, an XOR operation is performed on the data value stored in the A register and the data value stored in the C register, a zero flag (set to a specific bit of the F register, and the result of the operation is "0" If so, it is determined whether or not the data of "1" is stored "1". Here, if the zero flag ≠ “1”, it is determined that the RB operation is started, and the process proceeds to step S38. If the zero flag = “1”, the process does not proceed to step S38 and returns. In this step S38, information on the number of possible games (two) and the number of possible winnings (two) at the time of RB operation is stored. Specifically, data of “2” is stored in the RB game available number counter and the RB winning possible number counter set in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 63, respectively.

  At the return from the game start process, the process proceeds to step S2 of FIG. 33, and game medal management is performed. Specifically, when the game medal is inserted (cared) by the player or the bet switch is operated, the bet number and the credit (reserved) number are managed, and the clearing switch is operated. And perform a settlement process for repaying betted game medals and stored game medals. Further, in the case of the replay operation state, an automatic bet process is performed in which the game medals of the same number as the bet number in the previous game are betted.

  After performing the game medal management, the process proceeds to step S3. Then, it is determined whether the bet number matches the specified number and the operation of the start lever is accepted. If the determination here is yes, the process proceeds to step S4, and if no, the process returns to step S2. In step S4, the blocker is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S5.

  In step S5, a combination determination process is performed. Specifically, first, a random number latch for selecting one random number from among the random number sequence generated by the random number generator 66 or the like is performed. Next, the latched random number (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "latch random number") is read, and one combination determination result number is selected based on the read latch random number and the combination lottery table. Then, information on the selected combination determination result number is stored in the above-mentioned winning combination / RP combination determination result number storage area or combination combination determination result number storage area.

  After the combination determination process is performed, it is determined which game mode of the game modes 0 to 7 is set (step S6). And according to the game mode set, game mode 0 (lever) processing (step S7), game mode 1 (lever) processing (step S8), game mode 2 (lever) processing (step S9), game mode 3 (lever) process (step S10), game mode 4 (lever) process (step S11), game mode 5 (lever) process (step S12), game mode 6 (lever) process (step S13), game mode 7 (game S7) The lever) processing (step S14) is performed.

  In the game mode 0 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 35A, first, it is determined whether or not one of the combination determination result numbers 15 to 22 and 48 to 50 is selected in the combination determination process. It determines (step S41). Here, if any one of the winning combination determination result numbers is selected, the above-mentioned AT lottery is performed (step S42), and it is determined whether or not the AT is won (step S43). Here, if the AT has been won, the AT stock number is incremented by one (step S44). Specifically, processing is performed to "+1" the value (initial value "0") of the AT stock number counter set in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 63. Then, the above-mentioned sign G number lottery is performed (step S45), and the process returns. On the other hand, when the combination determination result numbers 15 to 22 and 48 to 50 are not selected in the determination of the step S41, the process of the steps S42 to S45 is performed, and the determination of the step S43 returns AT. If the game has not been won, the processing in steps S44 and S45 is returned to the execution.

  In the game mode 1 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 35B, the process returns without performing any process. In the game mode 2 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 35C, a pressing order instruction number setting process is performed (step S51). In this push order instruction number setting process, as shown in FIG. 35D, it is determined which combination determination result number (combination determination result number of winning and RP) has been selected (step S52). Then, if one of the combination determination result numbers 2, 7, 12, 23, 29, 35, 42 is selected, the push order instruction number A1 is selected (step S53), and the combination determination result numbers 3, 8, If one of 24, 30, 36, 43 is selected, the push order instruction number A2 is selected (step S54), and any one of the combination determination result numbers 4, 9, 13, 25, 31, 31, 37 is obtained. Is selected, the push order instruction number A3 is selected (step S55). Similarly, when one of the combination determination result numbers 5, 10, 26, 32, 38, 45 is selected, the push order instruction number A4 is selected (step S56), and the combination determination result numbers 6, 11, 27 , 33, 39, 46 are selected, the push order instruction number A5 is selected (step S57), and any of the combination determination result numbers 28, 34, 40, 47 is selected, A push order instruction number A6 is selected (step S58). Although not shown, the information of the selected push order designation number is stored in the above-mentioned push order designation number storage area (see FIG. 27E), and the process returns. If a combination determination result number other than those described above is selected, return is made without selecting any push order instruction number, but if the push order instruction number A0 is selected and the information is stored, The same is true (since the information of the push order instruction number is cleared at the end of the game, but the cleared state is the same as the state of storing the push order instruction number A0 information ("00000000B").

  In the game mode 3 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36A, first, the pressing order instruction number setting process is performed (step S61). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not any of the winning combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 has been selected (step S62), and if it has been selected, the above-described push order hit game lottery is performed (step S63). It is determined whether or not the game lottery has been won (step S64). Here, in the case of winning, it is determined which of the combination determination result numbers among the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 has been selected (step S65), when the combination determination result number 23 or 24 is selected Selects the push order instruction number A7 (step S66), and when the combination determination result number 25 or 26 is selected, the push order instruction number A8 is selected (step S67), and the combination determination result number 27 or 28 is selected If it has been selected, a push order instruction number A9 is selected, and the process proceeds to step S69. On the other hand, if the winning combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 are not selected in the determination of step S62, the process directly proceeds from there to step S69, and if the pressing order hit game lottery is not won in the determination of step S64 From there, proceed directly to step S69.

  As described above, in the game mode 3 (lever) process, when any one of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected by the combination determination process, the normal push order instruction number (one of A1 to A6) is selected. While being elected, when the pushing order winning game lottery is won, a pushing order instruction number (A7 to A9) for the pushing order game is also selected. As described above, the push order instruction number for the push order hit game is used to notify the push order in the push order hit game, and the normal push order instruction number is used to determine whether or not the push order hit game is correct Used for

  In step S69, it is determined whether or not any of the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 has been selected in the combination determination process. Here, when any one of the winning combination determination result numbers is selected, the above-mentioned AT lottery is performed (step S70), and it is determined whether or not the AT is won (step S71). Here, if AT has been won, "1" is added to the AT stock number (step S72), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the winning combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 are not selected in the determination of step S69, the processing of steps S70 to S72 is not performed and the process returns. If AT is not won in the determination of step S71, , And returns without performing the process of step S72. In addition, the combination determination result numbers 17-22 which become an execution opportunity of AT lottery are selected only in RT3 state. Therefore, the game mode 3 is set but the RT3 is not set (for example, if the game mode 2 is not followed by the push order navigation, it shifts to a game state other than RT3 and is set to the game mode 3 The AT lot is not made and the AT stock number is not added.

  In the game mode 4 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36B, the process returns without performing any process. In the game mode 5 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36C, an AT lottery is performed (step S81), and it is determined whether AT is won (step S82). Here, if AT has been won, "1" is added to the AT stock number (step S83), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the AT is not won, the process returns to the step S83 without performing the process. In the game mode 6 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36D, the process returns without performing any process. In the game mode 7 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36E, an AT lottery is performed (step S91), and it is determined whether AT is won (step S92). Here, if AT has been won, "1" is added to the AT stock number (step S93), and the process returns. On the other hand, when the AT is not won, the process returns to the step S93 without performing the process. As described above, when the game modes 5 and 7 are set, an every game AT lottery is performed.

  At the return from the game mode 0 (lever) process or the game mode 7 (lever) process described above, the process proceeds to step S15 in FIG. 33 to perform push order instruction display process. Specifically, the pressing order (see FIG. 16) according to the pressing order instruction number (one of A1 to A9) selected in the game mode 2 (lever) process or the game mode 3 (lever) process is a WIN lamp A process of displaying on 46j (a process of setting data of push order instruction number in A register, and a process of setting data of push order instruction number set in A register to predetermined output port) is performed. When none of the push order instruction numbers A1 to A9 is selected, notification of the push order by the WIN lamp 46j is not performed. Further, in the game modes other than the game modes 2 and 3, the pressing order instruction number is not selected, and the notification of the pressing order by the WIN lamp 46j is not performed.

  After the push order instruction display process is performed, it is determined whether the slot machine 1 has a test specification (step S16). Specifically, it is determined whether the above-mentioned in-test flag is set to ON, and if it is set to ON, it is determined to be a test specification, and if it is not set to ON, it is determined that it is a mass production specification. judge. In addition to the above, various methods described later (for example, in the reel rotation start preparation processing shown in FIGS. Can be adopted to determine whether to set. If it is determined in step S16 that the test specification is found, the interrupt (for example, execution of timer interrupt processing described later) is inhibited (step S17), and symbol stop test signal output processing described next is performed (step S18) .

  This symbol stop test signal output process is executed by the control program stored in the above-mentioned second PRG area (see FIG. 26), and as shown in FIG. 37A, the preparation process is first performed (Step S1801). Specifically, save the stack pointer in the first PRG area, set the stack pointer in the second PRG area, save the data stored in each register, and the like. Next, the above-described stop acceptance designation table T2 (see FIG. 30B) is set (step S1802). Specifically, the top address ("** 30H") of the stop acceptance designation table T2 is set in the HL register. Then, it is determined whether or not the BB is in operation (step S1803). Specifically, the data of the operating state flag stored in the operating state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) described above is set in the A register, and the value set in the A register is shifted right by one bit. Do. For example, when the BB and RB are in operation, the A register value initially becomes "00011000B", and after shifting right, becomes "00001100B" (in this case, the zero flag = "0"). Further, it is determined whether or not the cellar flag = "1". When "1", it is determined that the BB operation is not in progress, and when it is "0", it is determined that the BB operation is in progress. Right shift is not performed, and it is determined whether the value of bit 3 of the A register value is "1". If it is "1", it is determined that BB operation is in progress, and if it is "0" It may be determined that it is not during BB operation.

  If it is determined in step S1803 that the BB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S1804 to set the above-described stop acceptance designation table T1 (see FIG. 30A). Specifically, the top address ("** 00H") of the stop acceptance specification table T1 is set in the HL register (when it is determined that the BB is not in operation, the stop acceptance specification table T2 remains set. ). Then, the designated table address corresponding to the push order designation number selected earlier is set (step S1805). Specifically, the numerical value of the push order instruction number (for example, "3" for A3, "6" for A6, and the stop acceptance designation table T2 is set (in BB operation), always the push order instruction Since the number is A0, data “0” is set in the A register, the value set in the A register is added to the A register, and the value of the A register after addition is added to the A register again. This corresponds to four times the value initially set in the A register. Furthermore, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register. That is, a new address corresponding to the push order designation number is set in the HL register by adding a value obtained by multiplying the value of the push order designation number by 4 to the head address of the stop acceptance designation table T1 or T2.

  In step S1806, a push order designation command output request is set. Specifically, the upper value ("71H") of a predetermined value ("7100H") for identifying that it is data of a push order instruction number is set in the D register, and the HL register is further set. Set the value stored in (matching) the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “0” to the value stored in E. (Set to “0” to the value in the HL register) (The value of the HL register has not been updated). Next, proceeding to step S1807, the symbol stop test signal output is performed.

  In this symbol stop test signal output, as shown in FIG. 37B, first, the address data is saved (step S1821). Specifically, the data of the address stored in the HL register is saved in the stack area. Next, the address of the data register of the test output port for serial communication (the test output port SO0) is set (step S1822). Specifically, the address (“FE 53 H”) of the data register of the test output port SO 0 is set in the HL register. Next, the first command is written (step S1823). Specifically, the value of the D register is set to the address indicated by the value of the HL register. Subsequently, the second command is written (step S1824). Specifically, the value of the E register (the above "71H") is set to the address indicated by the value of the HL register. Next, a SUM command is calculated (step S1825). Specifically, the value of the D register is set in the A register, the value of the E register is added to the value of the A register, and "2" is added to the value of the A register. Then, the value of the A register and “10000000B” are ORed.

  Next, the SUM command is written (step S1826). Specifically, the A register value is set to the address indicated by the value of the HL register (the data register of the test output port SO0). Then, the address data is restored (step S1827), and the process returns. Specifically, the return of the address data is a process of setting the data of the address saved in the stack area in the HL register. The following effects can be obtained by using the above SUM command as follows. That is, as described above, since the test signal is output to the test apparatus through the relay device, the relay device is configured to determine whether the first and second commands are correct or incorrect based on the SUM command. It is possible to output the first and second commands to the test apparatus when it is determined to be correct, and not to output it when it is determined to be an error. This can prevent the design stop test signal carrying incorrect information from being output to the test apparatus. Note that the relay device determines whether the first and second commands or the SUM command is the data value of bit 7 (“0” for the first and second commands, and “1” for the SUM command). It can be judged by

  After execution of the symbol stop test signal output, the process advances to step S1809 to set a left reel stop acceptance position designation command output request. Specifically, the value of the D register is incremented by "1". That is, the value of the D register changes from "71H" to "72H". The value "72H" is a high-order value of the value ("7200H") set to identify that it is data of the left reel stop accepting position. Furthermore, the value stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the value of the HL register is set in the E register (instead of performing the process of adding “1” to the value of the HL register, the HL register The value of has not been updated). Next, proceeding to step S1810, the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal output is performed.

  After execution of the symbol stop test signal output, the process proceeds to step S1811, and a middle reel stop acceptance position designation command output request is set. Specifically, the value of the D register is incremented by "1". That is, the value of the D register changes from "72H" to "73H". The value "73H" is a high-order value of the value ("7300H") set to identify that it is data of the middle reel stop receiving position. Furthermore, the value stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the value of the HL register is set in the E register (instead of performing the process of adding "2" to the value of the HL register, the HL register The value of has not been updated). Next, proceeding to step S1812, the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal output is performed.

  After execution of the symbol stop test signal output, the process proceeds to step S 1813 to set a right reel stop acceptance position designation command output request. Specifically, the value of the D register is incremented by "1". That is, the value of the D register changes from "73H" to "74H". The value "74H" is an upper value of the value ("7400H") set to identify that the data is at the right reel stop accepting position. Furthermore, the value stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "3" to the value of the HL register is set in the E register (instead of performing the process of adding "3" to the value of the HL register, the HL register The value of has not been updated). Next, proceeding to step S1814, the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal output is performed.

  After execution of the symbol stop test signal output, the end process (step S1815) is performed and the process returns. In this end processing, restoration of data stored in each register, restoration of the stack pointer in the first PRG area, and the like performed in the preparation processing of step S1801 are performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the symbol stop test signal output process is performed after the pressing order instruction number is selected and the process of displaying it (pushing order instruction display process) is performed. By doing this, the process of storing the information of the selected push order indication number in the push order indication number storage area and the process of reading out and displaying the push order indication number information stored therein are continuously performed. As it becomes possible, the flow of processing becomes smooth. On the other hand, after selecting the push order instruction number, it is possible to execute the symbol stop test signal output process and then execute the symbol stop test signal output process. In this case, the information of the selected push order instruction number The process of storing the pressing order number stored in the pressing order number storage area and the process of reading out and displaying the information of the pressing order number stored therein are performed across the symbol stop test signal output process, so the process flow is It may be complicated or the display may be delayed.

  At the return from the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal output processing, the process proceeds to step S19 in FIG. 33, the interrupt is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S20. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S16 that the test specification is not satisfied, the process proceeds directly to step S20 from there. In this step S20, the data of the push order instruction number is stored in the transmission buffer (the above CB) to the sub control means (sub). By storing the data in the transmission buffer, data of the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub.

  Next, a mask process is performed on the winning order / RP push order instruction number (step S21), and data of the effect group number (see FIG. 19) determined by the mask process is stored in the transmission buffer (step S22). By storing data in the transmission buffer, data of the effect group number is transmitted to the sub. Further, the data of the pushing order designation number of the character is stored in the transmission buffer (step S23). By storing the data in the transmission buffer, data of the pushing order designation number of the bonus is transmitted to the sub.

  Next, a reel rotation start preparation process is performed (step S24). In this reel rotation start preparation process, as shown in FIG. 38A, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed (step S101). Specifically, the value of the minimum game time timer described next is Read out and determine whether it is “0” or not, if “0”, determine that the minimum gaming time has elapsed and proceed to the next step; if not “0”, the minimum gaming time has elapsed It judges that it is not, and performs processing which repeats this judgment. The minimum game time is, as described above, a time that must be secured at least from the start of rotation of all reels in one game to the start of rotation of all reels in the next game (for example, For 4.1 seconds). Next, the minimum game time is newly set (step S102). Specifically, a value of “1836” (1836 × 2.235 ms ≒ 4100 ms) is set in the minimum game time timer set in the predetermined storage area of the RAM. The set timer value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process described later is executed, and remains "0" after becoming "0".

  Next, it is determined whether the in-test flag is ON (step S103). Here, if the in-test flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S103, the above-described winning information output period timer is set (set value is “25”), and the process returns. The set timer value is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process described later is executed, and remains at "0" after it becomes "0". On the other hand, if the in-test flag is not ON, the winning information output period timer is not set and the process returns. As described above, in the reel rotation start preparation process in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the test specification is not the test specification (mass production specification) when the power is turned on, and the in-test flag is set OFF, the winning information output period timer is set. It will not be done. As described later, since the test signal carrying the actual winning information is not output if the winning information output period timer is not set, it is possible to prevent the winning information from being acquired illegally from the test signal. .

  Incidentally, as a modification (for example, an example corresponding to the modification J1 of the test specification determination preparation processing described above (see FIG. 32B)), the reel rotation start preparation processing (modification K1 shown in FIG. 38B). ) May be performed. In this reel rotation start preparation process (Modified example K1), after setting a new minimum gaming time (Step S102A) by checking the lapse of the minimum gaming time (Step S101A), reading of the input port (specifically, terminal PI0 Each potential level of .about.PI 7 is read (step S1021A), and it is determined whether the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level (step S1022A). Here, if the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level, the win information output period timer is set (step S104A) and the process returns, while if it is not at the test level, the win information output period timer is not set. Return to In the case of this modification K1, it is determined in the reel rotation start preparation process every game whether or not it is a test specification. If it is determined in one game that it is not the test specification, the winning information output period timer is not set, and the test signal carrying the actual winning information is not output, but in the subsequent game it is the test specification (PI 0 When it is determined that the test is a test level), the win information output period timer is set, and a test signal carrying actual win information is output. For this reason, there is no need to perform processing to determine whether or not the test specifications are applied when the power is turned on, and there is an advantage that control processing at power on can be simplified. If fraudulent activity is performed, there is a risk that the winning information may be illegally obtained from the test signal.

  As another modified example (for example, an example corresponding to modified example J2 of the test specification determination preparation process described above (see FIG. 32C)), the reel rotation start preparation process (modified example K2) shown in FIG. ) May be performed. In this reel rotation start preparation process (Modification K2), after setting a new minimum gaming time (Step S102B) by checking the lapse of the minimum gaming time (Step S101B), reading of each potential level of the terminals PI0 to PI7 is performed. Then (step S1021B), it is determined whether or not the potential of the current terminal PI0 (obtained this time) is the test level (step S1023B). Here, when the potential of the terminal PI0 at this time is the test level, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at power on is also the test level (the potential at the terminal PI0 at this time and the potential of PI0 at power on are It is determined whether both match at the test time level) (step S1024B). Then, if the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of power on is also at the test level, the win information output period timer is set (step S104B), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the potential of the terminal PI0 at this time is not the test level or if the potential of PI0 at power on is not the test level, the winning information output period timer is not set and the process returns. In the case of the modified example K2, when the potential of PI0 at the time of power on is not the test level, the winning information output period timer is not set even if the potential of PI0 is thereafter the test level. Therefore, even if the fraudulent act of artificially setting PI0 to the test level is performed, it is possible to prevent the winning information from being illegally obtained from the test signal.

  As yet another modification (for example, another example corresponding to modification J2 of the test specification determination preparation processing), reel rotation start preparation processing (modification K3) shown in FIG. 38D may be performed. . In this reel rotation start preparation process (Modification K3), after setting a new minimum gaming time (Step S102C) by checking the lapse of the minimum gaming time (Step S101C), reading of each potential level of the terminals PI0 to PI7 is performed. Then (step S1021C), it is determined whether or not the potential of the current terminal PI0 (obtained this time) is the test level (step S1023C). Here, when the potential of the terminal PI0 at this time is the test level, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at power on is also the test level (the potential at the terminal PI0 at this time and the potential of PI0 at power on are It is determined whether both match at the test time level) (step S 1024 C). Then, if the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of power on is also at the test level, the win information output period timer is set (step S104C), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the potential of the terminal PI0 at this time is the test level, but the potential of PI0 at power on is not the test level, change the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at power on to the test level ( Step S1025C) Return.

  Then, in the case where the potential of the terminal PI0 at this time is the test level and the potential of the changed PI 0 at the power-on is also the test level in the rumbling start preparation process (modification K3) in the next game The winning information output period timer is set. Thus, in the case of Modification K3, even if the potential of PI0 at power-on is not at the test level, and thereafter the potential of PI0 is at the test level, the potential of PI0 at power-on is also at the test There is a possibility that the winning information output period timer is set in the subsequent game after being rewritten to the level. Therefore, even if the potential of PI0 at power-on is erroneously stored due to the influence of noise or the like, it is possible to correct the potential and output a test signal carrying actual winning information. In the mass production specification, there is a possibility that an illegal act of artificially setting PI0 to the test level may be performed, but at this stage when the potential of the terminal PI0 and the potential of PI0 at the time of power on do not match. By setting to perform error notification, the game clerk or the like is alerted, and then it is possible to monitor whether or not the fraudulent activity has taken place, whereby the winning information is illegally obtained from the test signal. Can prevent that.

  Further, as another modification example (for example, another example corresponding to modification example J2 of the above test specification determination processing), reel rotation start preparation processing (modification example K4) shown in FIG. 39A is performed. It is also good. In this reel rotation start preparation process (Modification K4), after setting a new minimum gaming time (Step S102D) by checking the lapse of the minimum gaming time (Step S101D), reading of each potential level of the terminals PI0 to PI7 is performed. Then (step S1021D), it is determined whether the potential level of the current terminal PI0 (obtained at this time) matches the potential level of the terminal PI0 stored at power-on (step S1026D). Here, if the two match, it is determined whether the potential of the terminal PI0 at this time is the test level (step S1027D). Then, if the potential of the terminal PI0 at this time is the test level, the win information output period timer is set (step S104D) and the process returns, and if it is not the test level, the win information output period timer is not set. Return On the other hand, if the potential level of the terminal PI0 does not match the potential level of the terminal PI0 at the time of power on in step S1026D, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of power on is changed to the mass production level (step S1028D) Return.

  Thus, in the case of the modification K4, when the potential level of the terminal PI0 does not match the potential level of the terminal PI0 at power on, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at power on is changed to the level at mass production . Then, even if the potential level of the terminal PI0 read in the reel rotation start preparation process (modification K4) in the subsequent game is the test level, the potential level of the terminal PI0 at the time of power on (mass production level) And the win information output period timer is not set. When the potential level of the terminal PI0 acquired after the next game is the mass production level, it matches the potential level of the terminal PI0 when the power is turned on, but when the potential level of the terminal PI0 is the test level Since there is no such event, the winning information output period timer is never set. That is, when the situation where the potential level of the terminal PI0 at the time of power on and the potential level of the newly acquired terminal PI0 do not coincide even once, the win information output period timer is not set thereafter and the test signal Can prevent fraudulent acquisition of winning information.

  As another modification example (example corresponding to modification examples L1 and L2 of test signal etc. output processing described later), the reel rotation start preparation processing (modification example K5) shown in FIG. 39B may be performed. Good. In this reel rotation start preparation process (Modification K5), a new minimum game time is set (Step S102E) by confirmation of elapse of the minimum game time (Step S101E), and then a winning information output period timer is set (Step S104E) And return. As described above, in the case of the modified example K5, in the reel rotation start preparation process, the process for determining whether or not it is the test specification is not performed (it is performed in the timer interrupt process described later).

  Furthermore, as another modification example (for example, another example corresponding to modification examples L1 and L2 of test signal etc. to be described later), the reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K6) shown in FIG. You may In this reel rotation start preparation process (Modification K6), after setting a new minimum game time (Step S102F) by confirmation of the lapse of the minimum game time (Step S101F), the process proceeds to Step S1031F, and is selected by the winning combination determination process The information on the combination determination result number is acquired. Specifically, the data value stored in the above-mentioned combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27D) is set in the H register, and the above-mentioned winning combination / RP combination determination result is set in the L register. The data value stored in the number storage area (see FIG. 27C) is set. Next, identifier data is set (step S1032F). Specifically, the bit 7 of the H register is set to "1" and the bit 6 of the L register is set to "1". Next, combination determination result information is stored (step S1033F). Specifically, the H register value is stored in the above-mentioned bonus item winning information storage area (see FIG. 29B), and the L register value is stored in the above-mentioned winning / RP winning information storage area (FIG. ))). Then, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104F), and the process returns. As described above, also in the case of the modification K6, in the reel rotation start preparation process, the process for determining whether or not it is the test specification is not performed (it is performed in the timer interrupt process described later).

  At the return from the reel rotation start preparation process, the process proceeds to step S25 of FIG. 33, where the reel stop management process is performed. In this reel stop management process, while managing the rotation state from the rotation start of each reel to the constant speed state, when the operation of the stop switch is accepted, the received timing and the result of the winning combination determination process A stoppable position is determined accordingly, and processing is performed to manage the rotation state from the deceleration of the reel to the stop.

  Next, display determination processing for confirming stop display symbols on each reel is performed (step S26), and payout processing is performed (step S27). In this payout process, when the symbol combination stopped and displayed is the corresponding symbol of the winning combination (small combination) for which the game medal is to be paid out, the game medal is paid out. The payout of the game medals is performed by processing to be added to the storage number when storage is possible, and is performed by actually paying out the game medals from the hopper when the storage number reaches the upper limit value.

  Next, a game end check process is performed (step S28). In this game end check process, as shown in FIG. 40, first, the data of the winning combination determination result number is cleared (step S111). Specifically, data of the winning combination / RP combination determination result number stored in the above-mentioned winning combination / RP combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27C) (winning / RP combination determination result number flag) Do the process of clearing the In addition, in the game in which the BB operation symbol is stopped and displayed, data of the combination determination result number of the combination stored in the above-mentioned combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27 (D)) It also performs processing to clear the combination determination result number flag). Subsequently, the re-game operation state flag is cleared (step S112). Specifically, processing is performed to set bit 0 of the above-described operation state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) to “0” (clear the re-play operation state flag).

  Next, a BB operation management process is performed (step S113). In this BB operation management process, as shown in FIG. 41A, first, the operation state flag is checked (step S131). Specifically, the data value stored in the operation state flag storage area is set in the A register. Further, the A register value is shifted to the right by one bit. For example, when BB and RB are in operation, the A register value when set is “00011000B”, and the A register value after right shift is “00001100B”. Further, at this time, sero flag = “0”. Next, it is determined whether the BB operation is in progress (step S114). Specifically, it is determined whether the zero flag is "0" or "1". If "0", it is determined that the BB is in operation, and if it is "1", the BB is not in operation. The right shift is not performed, and it may be determined whether bit 3 of the A register value when it is set is “1” (in BB operation) or “0” (in BB non-operation). Good.

  Here, when it is determined that the BB is in operation, data of the medal obtainable number (remaining number) in the BB is acquired (step S133). Specifically, processing is performed to set data of the obtainable number (remaining number) of game medals stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM in the A register. Next, it is determined whether the BB operation has ended (step S134). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value set in the A register is “0” (= the number of medals paid out in BB is more than “450”) (or whether the zero flag is “1”). If it is "0", processing is performed to judge that the BB operation is ended, and if it is not "0", it is judged that the BB operation is continued. Here, when it is determined that the BB operation is ended, the BB operation state flag and the RB operation state flag are cleared (step S134). Specifically, processing for saving the A register value (in this case, "00000000B") is performed in the operation state flag storage area. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S132 that the BB is not in operation, the processing in steps S133 to S135 is not performed and the process returns. If it is determined in step S134 that the BB operation is continued, the processing in step S135 is not performed. Return to

  At the return from the above-described BB operation management processing, the process proceeds to step S114 in FIG. 40, and it is determined whether or not the RB is in operation. Specifically, it is determined whether bit 4 of the data value stored in the operation state flag storage area is "1" or "0", and if it is "1", RB is in operation, "0" If it is, processing to determine that the RB is not activated is performed. Here, when it is determined that the RB is in operation, the RB operation management process is performed (step S115).

  In this RB operation management process, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), first, the number of possible games in RB is decremented by "1" (step S141). Specifically, processing is performed to update the value of the above-mentioned RB available game number counter by subtracting “1”. Next, it is determined whether or not the number of possible games in RB is "0" (step S142). Specifically, processing to determine whether the value of the updated RB gaming number counter is “0” (or whether the zero flag is “1” as a result of the operation of updating the counter value) I do. Here, if the number of possible games in RB is not “0”, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts of gaming medals in the current game is “0” (= whether or not a small winning combination has not been established) (step S143). Here, if the number of medals paid out is not “0” (= if the small winning combination is established), the possible number of winnings in RB is decremented by “1” (step S144). Specifically, processing is performed to update the above-mentioned RB winning possible number counter by subtracting “1”.

  Next, it is determined whether the RB operation has ended (step S145). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated RB winning possible number counter is “0”, and if “0”, the RB operation end is determined, and if not “0”, the RB operation is determined to be continued Do the processing. Here, if it is determined that the RB operation has been completed, or if it is determined in step S142 that the number of possible games in the RB is "0", the RB operation state flag is cleared (step S146). Specifically, processing is performed to update bit 4 of the operating state flag storage area to "0". Next, the standby time at the end of RB operation is set (step S147). Specifically, processing is performed to set “0” = “00000000B” in the B register and “5” = “00000101B” in the C register. Next, a waiting time waiting process described next is performed (step S148), and the process returns. If it is determined in step S143 that the number of medals paid out is "0", the processing in steps S144 to S148 is not performed and the process returns. If it is determined in step S145 that RB operation is continued, The processing in the above steps S146 to S148 is not performed, and the processing returns.

  In the waiting time waiting process, as shown in FIG. 41C, it is first determined whether the waiting time has elapsed (step S151). Specifically, the value of the BC register is determined, and if the B register value = “0” and the C register value = “0”, it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed; otherwise, the waiting time has elapsed It determines that it does not do. Here, when the waiting time has not elapsed, an interruption waiting process is performed (step S152). In this interruption waiting process, as shown in FIG. 41 (D), the interruption counter value is acquired (step S161). Specifically, the lower 8 bits of the 16-bit counter value in the interrupt counter set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (here, two address areas "F02BH" and "F02CH") are set. The process of setting the data of the counter value (the value stored in "F02CH") to the A register is performed. Then, the process stands by until the interrupt counter value changes (the interrupt counter value is updated in step MT13 of the timer interrupt process described later) (step S162). Specifically, the arithmetic processing for subtracting the counter value stored in "F02C" from the A register value is executed, and if the arithmetic result is "0" (zero flag = "1"), the interrupt counter value changes. It is determined that there is no, and if the operation result is not "0" (if the zero flag = "0"), it is determined that the interrupt counter value has changed. After execution of the interrupt waiting process, the waiting time is updated ("1" is subtracted from the value of the C register) (step S153), and the process returns to step S151.

  At the return from the above-described RB operation management process, the process proceeds to step S116 in FIG. 40 to execute RT transition process. In this RT transition processing, as shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not it is set to non-RT (step S171), and if it is not set to non-RT, it is determined whether or not it is set to RT1. (Step S172). Here, if it is set to RT1, it is determined whether or not replay player combination 5 (RT2 transition RP) is established (step S173), and if it is established, it is set to RT2 (step S174), Return On the other hand, if it is determined in step S172 that RT1 is not set, it is determined whether RT2 is set (step S175). Here, if it is set to RT2, it is determined whether or not the replay player combination 6 (RT3 transition RP) is established (step S176), and if it is established, it is set to RT3 (step S177), Return If it is determined in step S176 that the replay player combination 6 is not established, it is determined whether the replay player combination 3 or 4 (RT1 shift RP) is established (step S178). In the case, RT1 is set (step S179), and the process returns.

  Further, if it is determined in step S175 that RT2 is not set, it is determined whether RT3 is set (step S180). Here, if it is set to RT3, it is determined whether or not the replay player combination 3 or 4 (RT1 transition RP) is established (step S178), and if it is established, it is set to RT1 (step S179). ), To return. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S180 that RT3 is not set, it is determined whether RT4 is set (step S181). Here, if it is set to RT4, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been established (step S182), and if it has been established, it is set to RT5 (step S183) and the process returns. If it does, maintain the setting of RT4 and return. In addition, if it is not set to RT4 in this step S181 (in this case, it is set to RT5), it is determined whether or not the number of game medals paid out during BB has exceeded "450" ( Step S184), if exceeding, set to non-RT (step S185), return, and if not exceeding, maintain the setting of RT5 and return.

  In addition, if it is set to non-RT in the determination of the above-mentioned step S171, or if the replay role 3 or 4 is not established in the determination of the above-mentioned step S178, it is determined whether or not the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. (Step S186), if it is stopped and displayed, it is set to RT1 and returns. On the other hand, if the specific symbol is not displayed stopped, or if the replay player combination 5 is not established in the determination of the above-mentioned step S173, it is determined whether the BB combination is won in the game or not It is determined whether or not the result number 1 has been selected (step S188). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S189), and if not, it is set to RT4 (step S190), and the process returns. If it has, the setting is made to RT5 (step S191) and the process returns. If the BB player has not won, the setting of the RT state is maintained and the process returns.

  At the return from the RT transition process, the process proceeds to step S117 in FIG. 40, and it is determined which game mode of the game modes 0 to 7 is set. Then, according to the set game mode, game mode 0 (all stop) processing (step S118), game mode 1 (all stop) processing (step S119), game mode 2 (all stop) processing (step S120) , Game mode 3 (all stop) process (step S121), game mode 4 (all stop) process (step S122), game mode 5 (all stop) process (step S123), game mode 6 (all stop) process (step S124) The game mode 7 (all stop) process (step S125) is carried out.

  In the game mode 0 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 43A, first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is won in the game (step S201). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S202), and if it is established, the game mode 5 is set (step S203), and the process returns. If not, the game mode 4 is set (step S204) and the process returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination has not been won, it is determined whether the AT stock number is greater than "0" (step S205). Here, when the AT stock number is larger than “0”, the AT stock number is decremented by “1” (step S206), and the precursor counter (the number of precursor G selected in the AT precursor G number drawing is managed to control the RAM 63). The number of precursor Gs selected in the AT precursor G number lottery is set in the counter (set in the predetermined storage area) (step S207), the game mode 1 is set (step S208), and the process returns. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S205 that the AT stock number is "0", the processing in steps S206 to S208 is returned to.

  In the game mode 1 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is won in the game (step S211). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S212), and if it is established, the game mode 7 is set (step S213), and the AT stock number is further determined. Is incremented by 1 (step S214), and if not established, the game mode 6 is set (step S215), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination has not been won, the value of the precursor counter is decremented by "1" (step S216), and it is determined whether the value of the precursor counter is "0" (step S217). Here, if the value of the precursor counter is "0", the game mode 2 is set (step S218) and the process returns, and if the value of the precursor counter is not "0", the setting of game mode 1 is maintained. Return.

  In the game mode 2 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 43C, first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is won in the game (step S221). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S222), and if it is established, the game mode 7 is set (step S223), and the AT stock number is further determined. Is incremented by 1 (step S224), and if not established, the game mode 6 is set (step S225) and the process returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination has not been won, it is determined whether or not it is set to RT3 (step S226). Here, if it is set to RT3, the game mode 3 is set (step S228), and then the value of the AT counter is set to "50" (step S229), and if it is not set to RT3. It is determined whether or not the pushing order by the player matches the pushing order of the pushing order instruction number notified (step S227). Here, if they do not match, the game mode 3 is set (step S228), the value of the AT counter is further set to "50" (step S229), and if they match, the game mode is It returns without changing the setting and without setting the AT counter.

  In the game mode 3 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 44A, first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is won in the game (step S231). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S232), and if it is established, the game mode 7 is set (step S223), and the AT stock number is further determined. Is incremented by 1 (step S234), and if not established, the game mode 6 is set (step S235), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination has not been won, it is determined whether or not the winning combination game lottery has won (step S236). Here, if the player has won the game, the pushing order by the player is not the pushing order instruction number (the pushing order instruction number for the pushing order hit game (A7 to A9), but is usually stored for determination. It is determined whether or not the push order of the push order instruction number (A1 to A6)) matches the push order (step S237), and if it agrees, the AT stock number is incremented by 1 (step S238). The process advances to step S239, and if they do not match, the process directly proceeds to step S239. In step S239, the value of the AT counter is decremented by "1". Next, it is determined whether the value of the AT counter is "0" (step S240). If the value of the AT counter is "0", it is determined whether the number of AT stock is larger than "0". (Step S241). Here, when the AT stock number is larger than "0", the AT stock number is decremented by "1" (step S242), the precursor counter is set to "1" (step S243), and the game mode 1 is set. (Step S244) It returns. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S241 that the AT stock number is "0", the processing in steps S242 to S244 is not performed, the game mode 0 is set (step S245), and the process returns. In the case where the value of the AT counter is not “0”, the processing of the steps S241 to S245 is not performed, and the setting of the game mode 3 is maintained and the process returns.

  In the game mode 4 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 44B, first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established in the game (step S251), and if established, the game mode The setting is set to 5 (step S252), and the process returns. If not, the process of steps S251 and S252 is not performed, and the setting of the game mode 4 is maintained and the process returns.

  In the game mode 5 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 44C, first, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts of game medals in BB exceeds “450” (step S 261), In the case, it is determined whether the number of AT stock is larger than "0" (step S262). Here, when the AT stock number is larger than "0", "1" is subtracted from the AT stock number (step S263), the game mode 2 is set (step S264), and the AT stock number is "0". In the case, the processing of the above steps S263 and S264 is not performed, and the game mode 0 is set (step S265), and the process returns. If it is determined in step S261 that the number of payouts of game medals does not exceed "450", the processing in steps S262 to S265 is not performed, and the setting of game mode 5 is maintained and the process returns.

  In the game mode 6 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 45A, first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established in the game (step S 271), and if established, the game mode The AT stock number is set to 7 (step S272), and the AT stock number is further added by 1 (step S273). If not, the process of steps S271 to S273 is not performed, and the game mode 6 is set. Maintain and return.

  In the game mode 7 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), it is first determined whether or not the number of payouts of game medals in BB has exceeded “450” (step S 281). If so, the AT stock number is decremented by 1 (step S282), and the game mode 2 is set (step S283), and if not exceeded, the above steps S282 and S283 are not performed, and the game mode 7 is performed. Maintain the settings and return.

  At the return from the above-mentioned game mode 0 (all stop) process to game mode 7 (all stop) process, the game end check process shown in FIG. 40 is also ended and the process returns. By return from the game end check process, the process returns to step S1 of FIG. 33, and the game progress control process is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
In this embodiment, processing such as reading of each game operation signal output according to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by a player, detection (confirmation) of a signal level, transmission of each control command, drive control of a reel, etc. Is performed by a timer interrupt process which is performed every predetermined fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). In this timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), first, an interrupt initial process (register save, interrupt disable, etc.) is performed (step MT11), and then power off is detected. It is determined (step MT12). Here, if the power-off is detected, the power-off processing is performed (step MT24). In the power-off process, saving of a register, saving of a stack pointer, saving of an interrupt state, and the like are performed. In addition, information regarding the combination determination result and information regarding the RT state stored in a predetermined storage area, and processing such as calculation and storage of a checksum are also performed.

  On the other hand, if the power-off is not detected, a process of updating (subtracting “1”) the interrupt counter value is performed (step MT13), and timer measurement is performed (step MT14). In this timer measurement, subtraction, addition processing and the like of the timer value of any timer (the above-mentioned minimum game time timer, winning information output period timer, etc.) set in the above-mentioned game progress control processing are performed. Next, the input port is read (step MT15). In the reading of the input port, reading and storing of signal levels of the game operation signals and the like input to the input port, determination of the signal level, and the like are performed.

  Next, a reel drive control process is performed to control the driving of the reels 3a to 3c (rotation acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, etc.) (step MT16). In this reel drive control process, a reel drive pulse output indicating the timing to switch the output phase (excitation phase) of the stepping motor according to the reel drive state (stop, waiting for reel rotation, during acceleration, during constant speed, during deceleration) Processing such as updating of the counter value and acquisition, updating, and output of reel drive pulse data for driving the stepping motor is performed. In the next step MT17, it is determined whether or not reel drive control processing has been performed for all reels. If it has not been executed, the process returns to step MT16 to perform reel drive control processing again. On the other hand, if it is executed on all reels, port output processing is performed to perform excitation output of reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. (step MT18), and a control command to transmit the control command stored in the command buffer (CB) Transmission processing is performed (step MT19).

  Next, proceeding to step MT20, the external end signal (external signal) data stored in the predetermined storage area is read out, and the external end signal is outputted. Next, test signal etc. output processing described next is executed (step MT21), and after that, processing is performed to update the random numbers used for lottery etc. (step MT22), and interrupt termination processing (register return, interrupt Permission etc.) (step MT23), and interrupt return is performed. As shown in FIG. 46 (B), as a modification (for example, an example corresponding to the above-mentioned modification K5, K6 of the reel rotation start preparation processing (see FIGS. 39 (B) and (C)). After processing the outer end signal output of step MT20, it is judged whether or not the slot machine 1 has a test specification (step MT201), and when it is judged that it is not a test specification (a mass production specification), an output of test signals etc. The process may not be performed (the test signal is not output). The determination as to whether the test specification is made can be made based on the on / off state of the in-test flag, but various other methods described above can also be adopted.

  In the test signal etc. output process, as shown in FIG. 47, output data of the operation state test signal is set (step MT31). Specifically, processing of setting the data of the operating state flag stored in the operating state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) to the A register is performed. Next, an operation state test signal is output (step MT32). Specifically, processing of outputting (setting) the data of the operation state flag set in the A register to the test output port PO8 is performed. As a result, the operation state test signal carrying the operation state flag information is output (sent) to the test apparatus from the test output port PO8. As a modification, it does not have an address area for storing data of each operation state flag (replay operation state flag, BB operation state flag and RB operation state flag) such as operation state flag storage area collectively. The data of each operation status flag is stored in different address areas, and those data are combined with the data of one operation status flag by arithmetic processing using a register and output from the test output port PO8. It is also good.

  Next, the value of the winning information output period timer is acquired (step MT33). Specifically, processing of setting the data of the timer value of the winning information output period timer stored in the winning information output period timer storage area (see FIG. 27F) in the A register is performed. In addition, since the timer value of the winning information output period timer is decremented by "1" in the above-mentioned step MT14, in the process of the above-mentioned step MT33 in the first timer interrupt processing after the timer value is set to "25". The timer value is "24". Then, it is determined whether it is the output timing of the winning information (step MT34). Specifically, it is determined whether the timer value set in the A register is "0" (zero flag = "1"), and if it is "0", it is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning information, " If it is not "0", it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information.

  Here, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the prize winning information (step MT35). Specifically, an operation of subtracting “12.5” from the timer value set in the A register in step MT33 is performed, and when the operation result is larger than “0” (the timer value of the winning information output period timer is “24” At 13 "(carry flag (set to a specific bit of F register, and" 1 "data is stored when the result of operation is carry or borrowed) is" 0 " When it is determined that the output timing of the feature winning information) is smaller than "0" (when the timer value of the winning information output period timer is "12 to 1") (when the carry flag is "1" It is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning feature winning information))).

  Here, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning combination information, the address of the combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27 (D)) is set (step MT36). Specifically, the high-order value "F0H" of the address value "F049H" of the combination determination result number storage area is set in the H register, and the low-order value "49H" of the address value "F049H" is set in the L register. Do the process. Then, the output data of the winning feature winning information is set (step MT37). Specifically, the data of the combination determination result number of the combination stored in the combination determination result number storage area is set in the A register. Further, data of the feature identifier is set (step MT38). Specifically, processing is performed to set bit 6 of the A register to "0" and bit 7 to "1". Then, a winning information test signal is output (step MT42). Specifically, the data set in the A register is output (set) to the test output port PO7. As a result, a winning information test signal carrying actual winning information (here, winning item winning information) is output (sent) to the testing apparatus from the test output port PO7.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step MT35 that the output timing of the prize winning information is not determined, the process proceeds to step MT39, and the address of the prize / RP combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27C) is set. . Specifically, the upper value "F0H" of the address value "F048H" of the winning combination / RP combination determination result storage area is set in the H register, and the lower value "48H" of the address value "F048H" in the L register. Perform processing to set. Next, the output data of the winning / RP winning information is set (step MT40). Specifically, the data of the winning combination / RP combination determination result number stored in the winning combination / RP combination determination result number storage area is set in the A register. Further, data of winning / RP identifiers are set (step MT41). Specifically, processing is performed to set bit 6 of the A register to "1" and bit 7 to "0". Then, a winning information test signal is output (step MT42). Specifically, the data set in the A register is output (set) to the test output port PO7. As a result, a winning information test signal carrying actual winning information (here, winning / RP winning information) is output (sent) to the testing apparatus from the test output port PO7.

  If it is determined in step MT34 that the output timing of the winning information is not reached, the processing of steps MT35 to MT41 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step MT42, and a winning information test signal is output. In this case, a winning information test signal (signal of "00000000B") on which actual winning information is not carried is output (sent) to the test apparatus from the test output port PO7. As a modified example, when it is determined in step MT34 that the output timing of the win information is not reached, the output of the win information test signal may not be performed (return from step MT34 directly).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the period from "24" to "13" when the value of the winning information output period timer, the winning information test signal carrying the role winning information is output, and the winning information output period timer In the period from “12” to “1”, the winning information test signal carrying the winning / RP winning information is output. Further, during the period in which the value of the winning information output period timer is "0", the winning information test signal on which the actual winning information is not carried is output. As described above, the winning information output period timer is set when it is determined that the slot machine 1 is the test specification, and is not set when it is determined that it is the mass production specification (the timer value is always "0"). Therefore, in the mass production specification, the winning information test signal carrying the actual winning information is not output. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the illegal acquisition of the winning information from the winning information test signal.

  The test signal etc. output process (modification L1) shown in FIG. 48 is executed as a modification example of the test signal etc. output processing (for example, an example corresponding to the above-mentioned reel rotation start preparation processing (modification K5)). It is also good. Steps MT31A to MT34A and MT35A to MT42A in the test signal etc. output process (modification L1) are the same as steps MT31 to MT34 and MT35 to MT42 in the test signal etc. output process. The difference is that if it is determined in step MT34A that it is the output timing of the winning information, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 is a test specification (the specific determination method may adopt various methods described above) When it is determined that the test specification is not the test specification (the mass production specification), the output data (eg, “11111111B”) of the dummy winning information is set (step MT3402A). That is, in this test signal etc. output process (Modified example L1), when it is determined that the mass production is specified even at the output timing of the win information, the win information test signal carrying the dummy win information is output. It has become so.

  Furthermore, test signal etc. output processing (modification L2) shown in FIG. 49 is executed as another modification of test signal etc. output processing (for example, an example corresponding to the above-mentioned reel rotation start preparation processing (modification K6)). You may do it. Steps MT31A to MT34A and MT42A in the test signal etc. output process (modification L2) are the same as steps MT31 to MT34 and MT42 in the test signal etc. output process. If it is determined in step MT34B that the output timing of the winning information is reached, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 has a test specification (the specific determination method may adopt the various methods described above). (Step MT3401B), when it is determined that the test specification is not (mass production specification), the output data of the dummy winning information is set (step MT3402B) the same as the test signal output process (Modification L1) It is. The difference is that the processing of steps MT3403B to MT3406B is performed.

  That is, if it is determined in step MT3401B that the test specification is satisfied, the process proceeds to step MT3403B, and the address of the bonus item winning information storage area (see FIG. 29B) is set (step MT3403B). Specifically, the upper value "F0H" of the address value "F04DH" of the prize winning information storage area is set in the H register, and the lower value "4DH" of the address value "F04DH" is set in the L register. I do. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the prize winning information (step MT3404B), and if it is not the output timing of the prize winning information, the winning / RP winning information storage area (see FIG. 29A) Is set (step MT3405B). Specifically, the upper value "F0H" of the address value "F04CH" of the winning / RP winning information storage area is set in the H register, and the lower value "4CH" of the address value "F04CH" is set in the L register. Do the processing. Then, the output data of the winning information is set (step MT3406B). Specifically, when the address of the prize winning information storage area is set in the HL register, the data of the prize winning information is set in the A register, and the address of the winning / RP winning information storage area is set in the HL register. If yes, the data of winning combination / RP winning information is set in the A register. As described above, in the test signal etc. output process (Modification L2), the data of the winning information to which the identifier data is already added is directly set and output, so the process of setting the identifier data is not performed.

  Other control processes performed by the main control unit 100 include main control power on processing and main control setting change processing. The main control power-on process is a process that is performed when power supply to the main control unit 100 is started (when the power is turned on), and temporary stack pointer setting, checksum calculation, check, etc. are performed. It is processed so that the process of power supply recovery can be performed. In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting key type switch 83 is turned on. When the setting key type switch 83 is turned on, the process shifts to main control setting change processing described next. On the other hand, when the setting key type switch 83 is not turned on, return of the stack pointer or activation of the interrupt is performed, and further, information on the result of the combination determination stored in the predetermined storage area at the time of power off or A game is played based on the information about the RT state.

  The main control setting change process is a process executed when the setting key type switch 83 is turned on in the above-mentioned main control power on process, and the setting change command operation of the setting change switch 84 by a game clerk or the like is decided In this case, initialization of the stack pointer, initialization of the interrupt, and clear processing of the game information stored when the power is turned off are performed. In addition, the setting value set at the time of setting change is stored in a predetermined storage area, and the process proceeds to the aforementioned game progress control processing.

<Program start process>
Next, program start processing executed by the sub main control means 200A will be described. As shown in FIG. 50A, this program start process is started by turning on the power, and interrupts are inhibited first (step U11), and then various initialization processes (initialization of CPU and RAM) , Calculation of checksum, etc.) is performed (step U12). Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum value calculated at power-on matches the checksum value calculated and stored at power-off (step U13).

  Here, if the two match, it is determined whether or not the state (hereinafter referred to as "complete return") is recovered from the state where the power is cut off during one command processing of sub main loop processing described next Step U14) If complete return is permitted, the interrupt is permitted (step U15), and the process returns to the one command processing which was being executed at the time of power-off. On the other hand, if it is determined in step U13 that the checksums do not match, the RAM is cleared (step U16), and the flow shifts to sub main loop processing. Further, if it is determined in step U14 that the process has not completely returned, the process directly proceeds to sub main loop processing from there.

<Sub main loop processing>
In the sub main loop processing, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step V11), and then the operation of the WDT is started (step V12). Next, an interrupt is permitted (step V13), processing every 16 ms (monitoring whether or not the image display device has started normally, counting power on time, predetermined signal data (command) to be sent to the image display device The storage area (command buffer) is stored (step V14).

  Next, one command processing (processing based on a control command from the main control means 100, an example will be described later) is performed (step V15), and it is determined whether 16 ms (time can be set arbitrarily) has elapsed. (Step V16) If not elapsed, the process returns to the above-mentioned step V15. On the other hand, if 16 ms has elapsed, the process returns to step V11.

<Power-off process>
The power-off process shown in FIG. 50 (C) is a process started by the sub main control means 200A detecting the power-off. First, the WDT is stopped (step W11), and then the program start process is in progress. It is determined whether or not it is (step W12). Here, if the program start process is not in progress, the checksum is calculated (step W13), and various data (checksum calculation results, the address of the program being executed, etc.) are saved (held) (step W14) Proceed to step W15. On the other hand, in the determination of step W12, if the program start process is in progress, the process proceeds to step W15 without performing the process of steps W13 and W14.

  In step W15, it is determined whether 500 ms (the time may be set arbitrarily) has elapsed. Here, if 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process ends. On the other hand, if 500 ms has not elapsed, it is determined whether the power supply has recovered (step W16). Here, if the power is restored, the number of occurrences of instantaneous interruption is updated (step W17), the operation of the WDT is started (step W18), and the process returns to the process being executed when the power is turned off. On the other hand, if it is determined in step W16 that the power supply has not recovered, the process returns to step W15.

<1 command processing>
In one command processing shown in FIG. 51 (A), it is determined whether or not a control command (hereinafter referred to as "special role command") including information on a combination determination result number of a part has been received (step V101). Here, when the special role command is received, the process proceeds to step V102, and the process at the start lever time is executed. In the process at the time of the start lever, as shown in FIG. 51B, first, it is determined whether or not the push order instruction number is any of A1 to A9 (the push order is preceded by the special combination command). Since the control command including the information of the instruction number is received, the determination is made based thereon (step V121). Here, when the push order instruction number is any of A1 to A9, a push order navigation effect corresponding to the received push order instruction number is performed (step V122), and the process returns. On the other hand, when the push order instruction number is not A1 to A9 (in the case of A0), the process of step V122 is not performed, and the process returns.

  At the return from the process at the start lever time, the one-command process shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the determination of step V101 of one command processing, when the special part command is not received, the process proceeds to step V103, and a control command including information of reel rotation start (hereinafter referred to as "reel rotation start command") Is determined. Here, when the reel rotation start command is received, the process proceeds to step V104, processing such as switching of effects is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the reel rotation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V105, and whether a control command including information on first cylinder stop acceptance (hereinafter referred to as “first cylinder stop acceptance command”) is received It is determined whether or not. Here, when the first trunk stop acceptance command is received, the process proceeds to step V106, and the processing at the first trunk stop acceptance is performed.

  In the processing upon reception of the first trunk stop, as shown in FIG. 52A, first, it is determined whether or not push order navigation effects are being executed (step V141). Here, when the pushing order navigation effect is not being executed, the processing at the time of accepting the first cylinder stop is ended, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the pushing order navigation effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step V142, and it is determined whether or not the first pushing order executed by the player is correct. Here, if the pressing order is correct, the process proceeds to step V143, and processing for switching the pressing order navigation effect (including the deletion of the display of the first pressing order) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pushing order is incorrect, the process proceeds to step V144 to finish the pushing order navigation effect, and executes a failure effect (an effect notifying that the pushing order is incorrect) (step V145). Do.

  At the return from the process at the time of receiving the first trunk stop, the one command process shown in FIG. 51 (A) is also ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if it is determined in step V105 of the one command processing that the first cylinder stop acceptance command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V107 and a control command including information on the first cylinder stop (hereinafter referred to as “first It is determined whether or not the rotation stop command has been received. Here, if the first torso stop command has been received, the process proceeds to step V108, the processing of the prize expectation display (including the stop sound etc.) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the first trunk stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V109 to receive a control command (hereinafter referred to as "second trunk stop reception command") including information on the second trunk stop acceptance. It is determined whether it has been done. Here, when the second acceptance stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V110, and the processing for accepting the second acceptance stop is performed.

  In the process at the time of the second trunk stop acceptance, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), it is determined first whether or not the push order navigation effect is being executed (step V151). Here, when the pushing order navigation effect is not being executed, the processing at the time of accepting the second trunk stop is ended, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the pushing order navigation effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step V152, and it is determined whether the second pushing order executed by the player is correct. Here, if the pressing order is correct, the process proceeds to step V153, and processing for switching the pressing order navigation effect (including the deletion of the second pressing order display and the like) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pushing order is incorrect, the process proceeds to step V154, the pushing order navigation effect is ended, the failure effect is executed (step V155), and the process returns.

  At the return from the processing at the time of receiving the second trunk stop, the one command processing shown in FIG. 51 (A) is also completed and the processing returns. On the other hand, if it is determined in step V109 of the one command processing that the second cylinder stop acceptance command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V111, and a control command including information on the second cylinder stop (hereinafter referred to as “second command It is determined whether or not the rotation stop command has been received. Here, if the second cylinder stop command has been received, the process proceeds to step V112, and processing of winning expectation display (including the case of outputting a stop sound and a tempering sound) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, when the second trunk stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V113, and a control command (hereinafter referred to as "third trunk stop reception command") including information on the third trunk stop reception is received. It is determined whether it has been done. Here, when the third trunk stop acceptance command is received, the process proceeds to step V114, and the processing at the third trunk stop acceptance is performed.

  In the processing at the time of the third trunk stop acceptance, as shown in FIG. 52C, it is determined first whether or not push order navigation effects are being executed (step V161). Here, when the pushing order navigation effect is not being executed, the processing at the time of accepting the third cylinder stop is ended, and the process returns. On the other hand, when the pushing order navigation effect is being performed, the process proceeds to step V162, the pushing order navigation effect is ended, and the process returns.

  At the return from the processing at the time of receiving the third trunk stop, the one command processing shown in FIG. 51 (A) is also ended, and the processing returns. On the other hand, if it is determined in step V113 of the one command processing that the third trunk stop acceptance command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V115, and a control command including information on the third trunk stop (hereinafter referred to as "third It is determined whether or not the rotation stop command has been received. Here, if the third trunk stop command has been received, the process proceeds to step V116, processing of winning expectation display (including stop sound etc.) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the third trunk stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V117, and it is determined whether a control command (full trunk stop command) including information on a stop display symbol has been received. Here, when the full rotation stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V118, processing such as switching of effects is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, when the full cylinder stop command has not been received, the process returns as it is.

Second Embodiment
The slot machine according to the second embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as “the slot machine of the second embodiment”) will be described below mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. The slot machine of the second embodiment shares the configuration of the main part with the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the description of the common part will be omitted. Further, the flow of main control processing is also common to that of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is also omitted.

<Circuit configuration of main control board (difference between test specification and mass production specification)>
In the slot machine 1 described above, the potential of the terminal PI0 differs between the test specification and the mass-production specification by connecting a pull-up resistor, a pull-down resistor, or a voltage dividing circuit to the terminal PI0 of the main IC. (See Figures 24 and 25). On the other hand, in the slot machine of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, in the test specification, the terminal PI0 of the main IC and the terminal Q7 of the test IC 2 (a terminal for outputting a signal from the terminal D7 of the main IC ) (See the same figure (A)), and in the mass production specification, such special circuit is not provided because the test IC 2 is not mounted (the same) See Fig. (B)).

<Test signal output processing>
In the slot machine 1 described above, the control processing for outputting each test signal of the symbol stop test signal, the operation state test signal, and the winning information test signal to the test apparatus in the case of the test specification has been described. In addition to this, in the slot machine of the form, a control process at the time of outputting an RT information test signal for transmitting a setting state of RT will also be described. Although the control process (the symbol stop test signal output process shown in FIG. 37) having the same contents as the first embodiment is performed for the output of the symbol stop test signal, the output of the operation state test signal and the win information test signal is the first The control processing of the contents different from the one embodiment is performed. Hereinafter, control processing regarding the output of the RT information test signal, the operation state test signal, and the win information test signal will be described.

  First, in the present embodiment, a modified example J1 shown in FIG. 32B is adopted as a test specification determination preparation process to be executed when the power is turned on. That is, when the power is turned on, processing for determining whether it is a test specification or a mass production specification is not particularly performed. In addition, at the time of game start (before start lever operation acceptance), as shown in Figure 54 (A), processing (step S2011) which sets RT information output occasion distinction flag is executed (for example, game start which is shown in Figure 34) Execute as one step in the process). The RT information output occasion identification flag is a flag for identifying whether or not it is a timing to output an RT information test signal, which is set in a predetermined storage area (8-bit storage area) such as a RAM, and is set. The hour is set to the value of "10000000B". Also, after the RT information output occasional identification flag is set, as shown in FIG. 54B, a process (step S2021) of updating the RT information output occasional identification flag is executed every time the timer interrupt is executed (for example, Executed as processing in timer measurement (step MT14) in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The updating process at this time is performed as a process of right-shifting the value of the RT information output timing identification flag by one bit and maintaining the value of bit 7. Further, when the start lever operation is received, as shown in FIG. 54C, a process (step S2031) of clearing the RT information output occasional identification flag (setting to the value of "00000000B") is executed (for example, FIG. This process is executed between the processes of steps S102E and S104E in the reel rotation start preparation process (modification K5) shown in 39 (A)).

  The value of the RT information output timing identification flag set in this way is set to "10000000B every time the timer interrupt processing is executed, from when it is set at the start of the game until it is cleared when the start lever operation is accepted. (When set) → "11000000B" → "11100000B" → "11110000B" → "11111000B" → "11111100B" → "11111110B" → "11111111B" → "11111111B" ... sequentially updated, cleared and then set again In the meantime, the value of "00000000B" is updated so as to be maintained as it is. The RT information output timing identification flag is used to identify whether or not it is an output timing of the RT information test signal in a test signal etc. output process described below.

  The test signal etc. output process in this embodiment is replaced with the test signal etc. output process (see FIG. 47) executed in step MT21 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. First, it is determined whether the inspection signal is ON (step MT131). The inspection signal is a signal of “0” or “1” output from the terminal D7 of the main IC to the terminal PI0 of the test IC 2 through the terminal D7 and the terminal Q7 of the test IC 2 and the above special circuit. Then, set bit 7 (usually set to “0”) of the operation status test signal to “1” (hereinafter referred to as “set inspection signal ON”) and output “1”. The inspection signal is output and set to “0” (hereinafter referred to as “set the inspection signal OFF”) to output the inspection signal of “0” (hereinafter referred to as step MT131). The potential of the terminal PI0 is read out, and if it is "1" (H level), it is determined that the inspection signal is ON input, and if it is "0" (L level), it is determined that it is the inspection signal OFF input.

  Here, when it is determined that the inspection signal is ON, the process proceeds to step MT132, and the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON. The winning information output prohibition flag is a flag set in a predetermined bit (for example, bit 0) of a predetermined storage area such as a RAM to determine whether or not the actual output of the winning information is prohibited. The inspection signal is ON only during the period from step MT135 to step MT148 described later, and during the other periods, the inspection signal is normally OFF. Therefore, the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON when the potential of the terminal PI0 is forcibly set to "1" due to an illegal act or the like. In the present embodiment, once the win information output prohibition flag is set to ON, the win information test signal carrying actual win information is not output, whereby the win information is illegally acquired. It can be prevented. When the win information output prohibition flag is set to ON, an error notification may be performed. Further, when a predetermined error release operation is performed in response to the error notification, the winning information output prohibition flag may be set to OFF.

  After the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON in step MT132, or when it is determined that the inspection signal is OFF input in step MT131, the process proceeds to step MT133, and it is determined whether the winning information output prohibition flag is ON. . Here, when it is determined that the winning information output prohibition flag is not ON (OFF), it is determined whether it is the output start timing of the RT information or the winning information (step MT134). Specifically, when the value of the RT information output occasion identification flag is "10000000B", it is determined that it is the output start timing of the RT information, and when the value of the win information output period timer is "24", the output of the win information It is determined that it is the start timing, and otherwise, it is determined that it is not the output start timing. Here, when it is determined that it is the output start timing of the RT information or the win information, the process proceeds to step MT135, the operation state test signal in which the inspection signal is set to ON is output, and the process proceeds to step MT136. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the output start timing of the RT information or the win information, the process of step MT135 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step MT136.

  In this step MT136, it is determined whether or not the winning information output flag is ON. The winning information output flag is a flag set in a predetermined bit (for example, bit 0) of a predetermined storage area such as a RAM, for determining whether or not the actual winning information is permitted to be output. , And are set to ON in step MT138 described later, and set to OFF in step MT145. Here, when it is determined that the winning information output flag is not ON (OFF), it is determined whether the inspection signal is ON input (step MT137), and when it is determined as the inspection signal ON input, winning information output The flag is set to ON (step MT138), and the process proceeds to step MT139. On the other hand, when it is determined in step MT136 that the winning information output flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step MT139 without performing the processing in steps MT137 and MT138.

  In this step MT139, output data of RT information is set. Specifically, the data value of the RT information stored in a predetermined storage area such as a RAM is set in the A register. Subsequently, it is determined whether it is the output timing of RT information (step MT140). Specifically, when the value of the RT information output time machine identification flag is other than "00000000 B", it is determined that it is the output timing of RT information, and when the value of the winning information output period timer is "00000000 B", the output of RT information It is determined that it is not a timing. Here, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the RT information, the process proceeds to step MT147, and the RT information test signal is output. Specifically, the data set in the A register is output (set) to the test output port PO7. Thus, the RT information test signal carrying the RT information is output (sent) to the test apparatus from the test output port PO7.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the output timing of the RT information, the process proceeds to step MT141, and the output data of the prize winning information is set. Specifically, processing of setting the data of the combination determination result number of the combination stored in the combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27D) in the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether it is the output timing of the prize winning information (step MT142). Specifically, when the value of the win information output period timer stored in the win information output period timer storage area (see FIG. 27F) is “24 to 13”, at the output timing of the prize winning information. If it is determined that there is a value other than that, it is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning feature winning information. Here, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the prize winning information, it proceeds to step MT147, and outputs a prize winning information test signal. Specifically, the data of the accessory identifier is added to the data set in the A register, and the data is output (set) to the test output port PO7. As a result, the winning combination information test signal carrying the winning combination information is output (sent) to the testing apparatus from the test output port PO7. When the above-mentioned prize winning information storage area (see FIG. 29B) is provided, the data of the prize winning information stored therein is set in the A register, and the test apparatus is set. It may be output.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the output timing of the prize winning information, the process proceeds to step MT143, and the output data of the winning / RP winning information is set. Specifically, the data of the winning combination / RP combination determination result number stored in the winning combination / RP combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27C) is set in the A register. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the winning / RP winning information (step MT144). Specifically, when the value of the winning information output period timer is “12 to 1”, it is determined that it is the output timing of winning / RP winning information, and when the value is other than that, the winning / RP winning information is It is determined that the output timing is not reached. Here, if it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning / RP winning information, the process proceeds to step MT147, and a winning / RP winning information test signal is output. Specifically, the data of the identifier of winning / RP is added to the data set in the A register, and the data is output (set) to the test output port PO7. As a result, the winning / RP winning information test signal carrying the winning / RP winning information is output (sent) to the testing apparatus from the test output port PO7. When the above-mentioned winning / RP winning information storage area (see FIG. 29A) is provided, the data of winning / RP winning information stored therein is set in the A register, and the test is performed. It may be output to the device.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning / RP winning information, the process proceeds to step MT145, where the winning information output flag is set to OFF. Next, empty winning information is set. Specifically, data of "00000000B" is set in the A register as empty winning information. Next, the process proceeds to step MT147, and a win information test signal carrying empty win information is output. Specifically, the processing of outputting (setting) the data of "00000000B" set in the A register to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, a winning information test signal not carrying actual winning information is output (sent) to the test apparatus from the test output port PO7. Further, an operation state test signal in which the inspection signal is set to OFF is output (step MT148), and the process returns. If it is determined in step MT133 that the winning information output prohibition flag is ON, the process proceeds to step MT146 without performing the processing of steps MT134 to MT145, and the inspection signal ON is not input in step MT137. If it is determined that the above-described process is not performed, the process proceeds to step MT145 without performing the processes of steps MT138 to MT144.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the actual winning information is output only when the winning information output flag is set to ON and within the winning information output period. The winning information output flag is a timer interrupt process that is executed when RT information or winning information output start timing, an operation state test signal in which the check signal is set to ON is output, and thereafter, within the same timer interrupt process Only when the inspection signal ON input is confirmed in, the switch is set from OFF to ON. Further, when the inspection signal ON input is confirmed other than the above timing, the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON, and the actual winning information is not output. For this reason, even if it is attempted to forcibly set the potential of the terminal PI0 to "1" and erroneously recognize the inspection signal ON input and illegally acquire the winning information, in order to output the actual winning information Although it is necessary to set the potential of the terminal PI0 to "1" at the above timing, it is very difficult. As described above, it is extremely difficult for the slot machine of the present embodiment to illegally obtain actual winning information from the winning information test signal.

<Modification>
The modification will be described below.
In the above embodiment, the control program for symbol stopping test signal output processing is stored in the second PRG area, but may be stored in the first PRG area. In this case, it is preferable to store data of the stop acceptance specification tables T1 and T2 in the first PRG area. In addition, the control program for test signal output processing (including each modification) in the timer interrupt processing may be stored in the second PRG area, or processing for determining whether or not it is a test specification. The control program (including each modification) may be stored in the second PRG area. Further, the winning information output period timer may be set in the second PRG area, and a control program for processing of setting, updating and clearing the timer value may be stored in the second PRG area.

  In the above embodiment, the notification of the push order is performed from the time when the operation of the start lever is received until the time when each reel is in the constant speed rotation state, but from the time when the operation of the start lever in the previous game is received this time Because the time until the acceptance of the operation of the start lever in the game of is less than the minimum gaming time (in particular there is room until the minimum gaming time has elapsed), even if the operation of the start lever is accepted, the order of pushing immediately The notification of push order may be performed after setting the minimum game time for the next game without performing the notification of. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the time zone that the stop switch can not be operated even though the notification of the pushing order is given.

  Although not set in the above embodiment, a push order flag may be set as an index for identifying whether notification of push order is possible (in the above embodiment, the game mode) To identify whether or not notification of push order is possible). When the push order flag is ON, it indicates that the push order notification is possible, and when the push order flag is OFF, it indicates that the push order notification is not possible. By providing such a push order flag, it is possible to distinguish between the case where push order notification is possible and the case where push order notification is not possible even in the same game mode. For example, also in the game mode 0 (normal time), it is possible to set a situation where the push order flag is turned ON, and to play the push order hit game there. Also, in the above embodiment, game modes 2 (AT preparation) and 3 (AT) are managed as different game modes, but these are managed as one game mode, and the mode during AT preparation is during AT The AT flag may be set as an index for identifying whether the mode is the mode. When the AT flag is ON, it indicates that the mode is in the AT, and when the AT flag is OFF, it indicates that the mode is in preparation for AT.

  In the above embodiment, after the notification of pressing order by the WIN lamp 46j is started, each information of the pressing order instruction number, the effect group number, and the combination determination result number of the role is, in this order, the reel rotating at constant speed. Before being sent to the secondary control means (see FIG. 22). In order to ensure that the pressing order notification (pressing order navigation effect) is performed by the liquid crystal display device before the reel is in a constant speed rotation state, a pressing order instruction number, before the reel starts rotating, It is preferable that the respective information of the effect group number and the combination determination result number of the character and the like is set in the transmission buffer to the sub control means. In addition, when providing a pushing order flag, it is preferable to transmit the information of a pushing order flag to a sub earlier than each information of a presentation group number and a combination determination result number of a role. This is because in order to execute the push order notification by the liquid crystal display device in the process at the time of accepting the start lever operation, it is necessary to already confirm at the time whether the push order flag is ON.

  In the above embodiment, the game mode information and the RT state information are transmitted to the sub control means after the operation of the start lever is accepted, but may be transmitted before the operation of the start lever is accepted. Good. By doing this, the sub control means can know the game mode information and the RT state information before accepting the operation of the start lever, so that each process can be executed smoothly when the start lever operation is accepted. it can. For example, when transitioning from game mode 1 (precursor) to game mode 2 (AT preparation), a confirmation screen may be displayed indicating that the AT setting has been set, but before the start lever operation is accepted, game mode 2 By knowing to shift to (AT preparation), it becomes possible to display the finalized screen smoothly when the start lever operation is accepted. In addition, the number of AT games (remaining number) may be displayed when transitioning from game mode 2 (AT preparation) to game mode 3 (AT), but also in this case, the game is performed before the start lever operation is accepted. By knowing to shift to mode 3 (AT), it becomes possible to display the number of AT games smoothly at the time of accepting the start lever operation (specifically, before accepting the operation of the start lever, RAM The data of the number of AT games ("50") can be set in a predetermined storage area such as (RAM 77), and the data can be displayed on the liquid crystal display when the start lever operation is received. A number ("50") of data can be set, and then the data can be displayed earlier as compared to the case where the data is displayed on a liquid crystal display). When the AT flag is provided, it is preferable to transmit the information of the AT flag also before the operation of the start lever is received.

  In the above embodiment, as described above, in order to prevent intentional stay in the game mode 2 (AT preparation), if it is not in accordance with the push order navigation in the game mode 2, shift to the game mode 3 (AT) I am trying to set the AT counter. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load because it may be determined in game mode 2 whether or not the pushing order operation along the pushing order navigation has been made, but it is not intentional and erroneously different from the pushing order navigation The game mode 3 is also transitioned to when the pushing order operation is performed. Therefore, the game mode 3 is entered if the replay navigation is not followed, but the game mode 3 is not entered if the bell navigation is not followed (if the player is merely disadvantaged). Good. In this case, although it is possible to rescue the player who did not follow the Bernavi by mistake, it is necessary to determine whether he did not follow the Replay Navi or the Bernabi, so the processing load increases. In addition, when the RT state falls without following the push order navigation, the game mode 3 is entered, but when the push order navigation is not followed but the RT state does not fall, the game action mode 3 is entered You may not make it happen. In this case, since it is necessary to determine whether the RT state has fallen, in addition to determining whether the push order navigation has not been followed, the processing load increases. Further, in the above embodiment, when the game mode 2 is set, the RT state is set to RT3 to shift to the game mode 3, but when the RT3 shift RP is won, It may be made to shift to the game mode 3.

  In the above embodiment, the AT stock number is added if the push-to-place hit game is correctly answered, but adding the AT game number (adding the AT game number) may be a bonus. Further, a benefit (for example, a special player performs an image effect, etc.) may be given in the sub control means.

  In the above embodiment, when the setting is changed, the information on the AT (the number of AT games and the number of AT stock) is cleared, but the information on the RT state is maintained. It also has many RT states. On the other hand, during the non-internal (non-RT) which does not have many RT gaming states and has not won the bonus part, only the bonus internal (RT1) and the bonus (RT2) which are in the state of winning the bonus part. Even when the specification is changed so that most of the game period will be inside the bonus (inside specification), information on AT will be cleared, but information on RT state will be maintained, even if it is set to be inside the bonus. It is also good. In addition, when power is turned off, it is preferable to maintain information on the AT and to maintain information on the RT state (this may be the same as in the case of internal specs).

  In the above embodiment, the command transmission is performed by the serial communication method, but it has been described above that the command may be transmitted by the parallel communication method. However, in the case of the parallel communication method, since communication becomes possible even if any of the plurality of communication lines are disconnected, there is a possibility that erroneous information may be transmitted. Therefore, in the case of using the parallel communication method, a predetermined command (for example, "00000101B") is transmitted at the start of each game (for example, at the time of operation of the start lever). Send a command (for example, “1111010B”) in which “0” and “1” of each bit are reversed at the time of stop), and determine whether or not disconnection occurs based on the result of these logical operations You may do it.

  In the above embodiment, when the sub control means does not receive the push order instruction number, or when there is no push order to be notified preferentially, in the sub control means, the effect transmitted from the main control means The pushing order may be notified based on the group number and the combination determination result number.

  In the above embodiment, one terminal (terminal PI0) is used to determine whether it is a test specification or a mass production specification, but a plurality of terminals may be used. In addition, the aspects of the embodiments and the modifications described above can be used in combination as appropriate.

Third Embodiment
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the third embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as "the slot machine of the third embodiment"), specifically, the timing of lighting of a plurality of display lamps when a replay role is established. This will be described with additional reference to 56 to 60. In the slot machine of the third embodiment, a replay lamp, a 1 BET lamp, a 2 BET lamp, a 3 BET lamp, a start lamp, and a medal insertion enable lamp are provided as display lamps constituted by LED lamps and the like.

  The replay lamp is displayed when the symbol combination (also referred to as “replay symbol”) corresponding to the replay game (replay role in the previous game (also referred to as “replay role”) in the current game is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Is a lamp indicating that the game can be executed without betting the game medals held by the player), and corresponds to the above-described replay display lamp 46e. The 1-BET lamp indicates that the bet number of game medals is 1 or more, and corresponds to the above-mentioned 1-BET display lamp 46bA. The 2 BET lamp is a lamp that indicates that the number of bets on the game medal is 2 or more, and corresponds to the above-mentioned 2-BET display lamp 46bB. The 3BET lamp is a lamp that indicates that the number of bets on game medals is 3, and corresponds to the above-mentioned MAX-BET display lamp 46b. The start lamp is a lamp indicating that the start lever operation can be started (the state where the game can be started by operating the start lever), and corresponds to the above-mentioned game start display lamp 46d. The medal insertion enable lamp is a lamp indicating that it is possible to insert a game medal, and corresponds to the above-mentioned insertable display lamp 46c.

  When the re-play combination is established (when the replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line), the next game becomes the replay game, and the same number of game medals as the bet number in the previous game are bet by the automatic betting process. . At the time of replay game, the player does not have to bet the game medals themselves (it is not possible to bet themselves), so the case where a combination other than replay is established in the previous game or the game is lost The operation procedures performed by the person are largely different. Therefore, if the current game is a replay game and it is difficult for the player to know that the game bet is automatically betted, the player may be confused. Therefore, when playing a replay game, it becomes important to perform a smooth game at which timing the replay lamp, 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, 3 BET lamp, start lamp, and medal insertion enable lamp are turned on. .

  56 to 60 illustrate ten patterns with respect to the lighting timing of these display lamps, and these will be sequentially described below. In any of the patterns, the previous game is not a replay game, and the bet number in the previous game is “3”. In addition, after the replay symbol is displayed, the third stop switch (the stop switch for which the third stop operation was performed) is switched from the on state to the off state (the hand has left the third stop switch) . In FIG. 56 to FIG. 60, the timing at which the replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line (indicated as "replay symbol displayed" in the figure) as a timing that can be a trigger for switching the lighting state and non-lighting state of each display lamp. , When the third stop switch is switched from the on state to the off state (denoted as "when the third stop switch is off" in the figure), and the state where the game can be started by operating the start lever (operation of the start lever Indicates the three timings at which it can be accepted (indicated as "when start lever operation can be started" in the figure). Further, in the following description, for convenience, the period from the time of replay symbol display to the start lever operation start time is referred to as "replay game preparation period", of which time from the time of replay symbol display to the third stop switch off The period is referred to as "replay game preparation first half period", and the period from when the third stop switch is off to when the start lever operation can be started is referred to as "replay game preparation second half period". The length of the horizontal axis (the distance between each time point) in each of the timing patterns 1 to 10 does not accurately represent the actual time.

  In lighting timing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 56 (A), the replay lamp, the start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp are in the non-lighting state in the predetermined period before displaying the replay symbol, and the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp and 3 BET lamp are The lighting state is set (this point is the same in other lighting timing patterns 2 to 10). When the replay symbol is displayed, immediately thereafter (approximately simultaneously), the replay lamp is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state, and the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp are switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state. On the other hand, the 1-BET lamp remains lit, and the start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp remain unlit. The 2BET lamp and 3BET lamp switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state after the display of the replay symbol is then switched from the non-lighting state from the non-lighting state first in the period until the third stop switch is off (replay game preparation first half period) It switches to the lighting state, and then the 3 BET lamp switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state.

  During the period from the time when the third stop switch is off to the time when the start lever operation can be started (replay game preparation second half period), there is no change in the lighting / non-lighting state of each display lamp. That is, the replay lamp, 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp and 3 BET lamp, which are on when the third stop switch is off, remain on throughout the second half of the replay game preparation period, and are not on when the third stop switch is off. The start lamp and the medal insertion permission lamp remain unlit throughout the second half of the replay game preparation. When the start lever operation can be started, the start lamp changes from the non-lighting state to the lighting state, but there is no change in the lighting / non-lighting state of the other display lamps. In this lighting timing pattern 1, the medal insertion enable lamp is maintained in the non-lighting state even after the start lever operation startable time has elapsed. This is because during the replay game period, even if the number of stored game medals has not reached the upper limit, the game medals can not be inserted. It will also be returned. If medals can be inserted even during a replay game, the medal insertable lamp may be switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state simultaneously with the start lamp.

  As described above, the lighting timing pattern 1 does not include within the replay game preparation period (both the end points of the period, ie, when the replay symbol display and the start lever operation start are possible, includes both end points, or either The 1-BET lamp is maintained in the light-on state throughout the period before and after the end point may be included. Also, the replay lamp is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state prior to the start lamp. Furthermore, the replay lamp does not include the replay game preparation first half period (both end points of the period, that is, does not include the replay symbol display time and the third stop switch off time, but may include both end points or include either end point). It is preferable that the lamp be turned on (switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state) earlier than the 2 BET lamp, the 3 BET lamp, and the medal insertion enable lamp. Also, the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp are simultaneously turned off (switched from the lit state to the non-lit state) at the same time immediately after the replay symbol display, and then sequentially switched from the non-lit state to the lit state in the first half period of the replay game preparation It is supposed to be. Further, immediately after the replay symbol display, the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp are turned off at the same time as the replay lamp is turned on.

  In the lighting timing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 56 (B), the replay lamp is not lit up until immediately before the start lever operation start is possible, from before the replay symbol display, through the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off. It is maintained as it is, and it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state just before the start lever operation start is possible. The 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET lamp are maintained in the lit state throughout the replay game preparation period and before and after that period. The start lamp and medal insertion enable lamp are maintained in the non-lighting state until the start lever operation start is possible, and the start lever operation start is possible before the time of the start of the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off. At the same time, it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state simultaneously. When the medal insertion enable lamp lights up, it becomes possible to insert a game medal. This is because the game medals can be inserted if the number of stored game medals has not reached the upper limit even during the replay game, and the inserted game medals Is added to the number of storages (returned after reaching the upper limit of the number of storages) (same in the following lighting timing patterns 3 to 10).

  In lighting timing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 57 (A), the replay lamp remains in the non-lighting state until the start lever operation start is possible, from before the replay symbol display, through the replay symbol display time and the third stop switch off time. It is maintained, and when the start lever operation can be started, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET lamp are maintained in the lit state throughout the replay game preparation period and before and after that period. The start lamp and medal insertion enable lamp are maintained in the non-lighting state until the start lever operation start is possible, and the start lever operation start is possible before the time of the start of the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off. At the same time (and simultaneously with the replay lamp) it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 57 (B), the replay lamp is maintained in the non-lighting state during the first half of the replay game preparation from before the replay symbol is displayed, It does not include both end points, ie, when the third stop switch is off and when start lever operation start is possible, but it may include both end points or may include any one end point (for example, the third timing) Immediately after the stop switch is turned off), the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1-BET lamp is maintained in the lit state during and before and after the replay game preparation period. The 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are simultaneously turned off (switched from the lit state to the non-lit state) at the same time in the second half of the replay game preparation period (after the replay lamp is lit), and then the 2BET lamp It lights up first, and the 3 BET lamp lights up when the start lever operation can be started. In addition, as for the replay lamp, in the second half of the replay game preparation period, the 2 BET lamp, the 3 BET lamp, the start lamp and the medal are inserted before the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp are turned off (switched from the lit state to the non lit state). The enable lamp is turned on (switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state) before the light is turned on. The start lamp and medal insertion enable lamp are maintained in the non-lighting state until the start lever operation start is possible, and the start lever operation start is possible before the time of the start of the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off. At the same time, it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state at the same time (and simultaneously with the 3 BET lamp).

  In lighting timing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58 (A), 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp and 3 BET lamp continue to be lit from before the replay symbol display for the first half period of the replay game preparation, and within the latter half period of the replay game preparation (for example, At the same time, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off, the 1 BET lamp and the 2 BET lamp are simultaneously (or 1 BET) simultaneously until the start lever operation can be started. The lamp lights up slightly faster than the 2 BET lamp), and the 3 BET lamp lights up when the start lever operation can be started. The replay lamp is maintained in the non-lighting state throughout the replay game preparation first half period from before the replay symbol display, and simultaneously with the lighting of the 1 BET lamp and the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET lamp in the replay game preparation second half period. The lamp lights up earlier than the start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp (switching from the non-lighting state to the lighting state). The start lamp and medal insertion enable lamp are maintained in the non-lighting state until the start lever operation start is possible, and the start lever operation start is possible before the time of the start of the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off. At the same time, it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state at the same time (and simultaneously with the 3 BET lamp).

  In the lighting timing pattern 6 shown in FIG. 58 (B), the 1-BET lamp is maintained in the lighting state throughout the replay game preparation period and the period before and after that. The 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp continue to be lit during the first half of the replay game preparation from before the replay symbol display, and at a predetermined timing (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is off) within the second half of the replay game preparation, At the same time, the light is turned off (switched from the lighted state to the non-lighted state), and then the light is relighted in the order of the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp until it is possible to start the start lever operation. The replay lamp is maintained unlit throughout the replay game preparation first half period before the replay symbol display, and simultaneously with the extinguishment of the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp within the second half period of the replay game preparation, and the 2 BET lamp The 3 BET lamp, the start lamp, and the medal insertion enable lamp are lighted before relighting (switching from the non-lighting state to the lighting state).

  In the lighting timing pattern 7 shown in FIG. 59 (A), the replay lamp remains in the non-lighting state until the start lever operation start is possible, from before the replay symbol display, through the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off. It is maintained, and when the start lever operation can be started, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET lamp are maintained in the lit state throughout the replay game preparation period and before and after that period. The start lamp and medal insertion enable lamp are maintained in the non-lighting state until the start lever operation start is possible, and the start lever operation start is possible before the time of the start of the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off. At the same time (and simultaneously with the replay lamp) it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 8 shown in FIG. 59B, the 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp continue to be lit from before the replay symbol display for the first half of the replay game preparation period, and a predetermined period during the replay game preparation second half period. At the timing (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the light is simultaneously turned off (switched from the lighted state to the non-lighted state), and then lighted simultaneously when the start lever operation can be started. The replay lamp is maintained in the non-lighting state in the first half of the replay game preparation and in the second half of the replay game preparation before the time of displaying the replay symbol, and when the start lever operation can be started, the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp and 3 BET The lamp is turned on at the same time as the lamp is turned on (switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state). The start lamp and medal insertion enable lamp are maintained in the non-lighting state until the start lever operation start is possible, and the start lever operation start is possible before the time of the start of the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off. At the same time (at the same time as the replay lamp, the 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp) simultaneously, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 9 shown in FIG. 60 (A), the replay lamp is maintained in the non-lighting state for the first half of the replay game preparation from before the replay symbol display, and a predetermined time in the replay replay preparation second half period. At the timing (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1-BET lamp is maintained in the lit state during and before and after the replay game preparation period. The 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp are simultaneously turned off (switched from the on state to the off state) simultaneously at a predetermined timing (for example, immediately after the on of the replay lamp) in the second half period of the replay game preparation. By this time, the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp are turned on in this order. In addition, as for the replay lamp, in the second half of the replay game preparation period, the 2 BET lamp, the 3 BET lamp, the start lamp and the medal are inserted before the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp are turned off (switched from the lit state to the non lit state). The enable lamp is turned on (switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state) before the light is turned on. The start lamp and medal insertion enable lamp are maintained in the non-lighting state until the start lever operation start is possible, and the start lever operation start is possible before the time of the start of the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off. At the same time, it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state simultaneously.

  In the lighting timing pattern 10 shown in FIG. 60 (B), the replay lamp is maintained in the non-lighting state for the first half of the replay game preparation from before the replay symbol display, and a predetermined time in the second half of the replay game preparation period. At the timing (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET lamp are maintained in the lit state throughout the replay game preparation period and before and after that period. The start lamp and medal insertion enable lamp are maintained in the non-lighting state until the start lever operation start is possible, and the start lever operation start is possible before the time of the start of the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off. At the same time, it switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state simultaneously. In addition, the replay lamp lights up earlier than the start lamp and the medal insertion permission lamp light up in the second half period of the replay game preparation (switching from the non-lighting state to the lighting state).

  The difference in the lighting timing pattern causes an effective difference. Hereinafter, this point will be described. In the case of a pattern in which the start lamp and the medal insertable lamp are lighted simultaneously (lighting timing patterns 2 to 10 correspond), the player wishes to insert a game medal if the start lamp is lighted before the medal insertable lamp. Even if it thinks, there is a possibility that it may be mistaken that it can not be turned on by turning on the start lamp first, and conversely, if the medal insertion enable lamp is turned on before the start lamp, the start lever can not be operated There is a risk of misidentification. Therefore, by simultaneously turning on the start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp, it is possible to allow the player to judge smoothly the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever, and the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever are smoothed. It will be possible to

  A pattern (lighting timing patterns 1 to 4, 6, 7, 9) in which the 1-BET lamp is maintained in the lit state throughout the replay game preparation period (or throughout the replay game preparation period and the periods before and after it) , 10 apply), it is easy for the player to understand that the re-play combination has been established and the automatic bet has been made, and the fact that the re-play combination has been established can be notified to the player promptly. It becomes possible to carry out the progress of the game smoothly. A pattern in which the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp are maintained in the lit state over the replay game preparation period (or over the replay game preparation period and the periods before and after that) (the lighting timing patterns 2, 7, 10 are In the case of corresponding), it is easy for the player to understand that the replay role has been established and the automatic bet has been made, and the player can be notified immediately of the establishment of the replay role, so It is possible to make progress smoothly.

  In the case of a pattern in which the replay lamp is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state before the start lamp (lighting timing patterns 1, 2, 4 to 7, 9, 10 correspond), the replay lamp is turned on first The player is first notified that the replay role is established and the replay game is to be performed, and then the start lamp is turned on to indicate the progress status of the game (that the operation of the start lever has become possible). Since the player can be notified, it is possible to smoothly proceed with the game. If the replay lamp has a pattern that lights up earlier than the medal insertion enable lamp (switching from the non-lighting state to the lighting state) (lighting timing patterns 1, 2, 4 to 7, 9, 10 correspond), the replay lamp By lighting up first, the player is first notified that the replay role is established and the replay game is to be performed, and then the medal insertion enable lamp is turned on to allow the game medals to be inserted. Since the player can be notified, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the gaming situation smoothly.

  In the case of a pattern (lighting timing patterns 1, 4, 6, 7, 9 correspond) in which the replay lamp lights up before 3 BET lamp (or 2 BET lamp and 3 BET lamp) (switching from non-lighting state to lighting state) By turning on the replay lamp first, the player is first notified that the replay role is established and the replay game is to be performed, and then the 3 BET lamp (or 2 BET lamp and 3 BET lamp) is turned on. Since it is possible to notify the player that automatic betting has been performed, it is possible to smoothly carry out the game. In the case of a pattern in which the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp sequentially switch from the non-lighting state to the lighting state (lighting timing patterns 1, 4, 5, 6, 9 correspond), turn on the 2 BET lamp and 3 BET lamp in stages. Thus, the player can be more clearly notified that the automatic bet has been made, so that the game can be progressed smoothly.

  In the case of a pattern in which the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp turn off at the same time (switch from lighted to non-lighted) (lighting timing patterns 1, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 correspond), many display lamps light up In view of the possibility that it would be difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state if the state is left, the gaming state (replay role) is given to the player by temporarily turning off the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp simultaneously. It is possible to make it possible to quickly grasp the fact that the automatic betting is made). When the replay lamp has a pattern (lighting timing patterns 4 and 9 correspond) which are lit earlier than when the 2 BET lamp is once turned off, the replay lamp is lit first, whereby the replay role is established and the replay is performed. By notifying the player that the game will be played first and then turning off the 2 BET lamp, the player can be notified that the game medals will be bet automatically, so that the player can play the game. It becomes possible to make the situation be understood smoothly.

  I want to notify the player that the bet will be made automatically if the 2BET lamp (or 2BET lamp and 3BET lamp) turns off at the same time as the replay lamp lights up (lighting timing patterns 1 and 6 correspond). If the 2 BET lamp (or 2 BET lamp and 3 BET lamp) continues to light, the 2 BET lamp (or 2 BET lamp and 3 BET lamp) may be changed in view of the possibility that it may be difficult for the player to grasp the game state. By turning off the light once, it is possible to allow the player to quickly grasp the gaming state. Also, by turning on the replay lamp at the same time, it is possible to notify the player at an early stage that it is not necessary to insert a game medal. In the case of a pattern in which the 3 BET lamp and the start lamp are lighted simultaneously (lighting timing patterns 4, 5 and 8 correspond), the player can be notified promptly that the start lever can be operated, so the game can be made to progress smoothly. Is possible.

  If the previous game is a replay game and the current game is also a replay game, a pattern may be adopted in which the replay lamp is continuously lit from the previous game to the current game. . By continuously turning on the replay lamp, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the replay role has been established, so that it is possible to smoothly advance the game.

  It is also possible to constitute another lighting timing pattern by appropriately combining a part of the lighting timing patterns 1 to 10 described above. Each display lamp (Replay lamp, 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, 3 BET lamp, start lamp, medal insertion enable lamp) is lit by processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) on the main side (main control side). Turn off is controlled (part may be controlled by the sub side). The "simultaneous" when simultaneously turning on or off a plurality of display lamps includes the case where there is a slight time difference to some extent. For example, even if the timing of lighting or extinguishing is shifted by several interruptions between a plurality of display lamps, the player can not distinguish the timing shift, so there is no problem in simultaneous handling.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “the slot machine of the fourth embodiment”), specifically, additionally referring to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 as to the arrangement of electronic components on the control board. While explaining. The slot machine of the fourth embodiment is provided with a main control board 600 (corresponding to the above-mentioned main control board 60) for mainly performing control processing relating to the progress of the game.

  Various electronic components are mounted on the main control substrate 600. FIG. 61 shows a planar arrangement of main electronic components mounted on the main control substrate 600. As shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown, on the main control substrate 600, a microprocessor MP01 as an IC element having a CPU function, other IC elements IC01 to IC15 not having a CPU function, and resistors R01 to R01. R26, a collective resistor R31, R32, capacitors C01 to C05, C11 to C14, and connectors CN01 to CN04 are mounted. Further, on the main control substrate 600, pad portions P01 and P02 for mounting (soldering) a test IC element (not shown) used in type test are formed. Although other electronic components such as a diode and an LED may be mounted on the main control substrate 600, the illustration thereof is omitted.

  The microprocessor MP01 is a one-chip type microcomputer configured such that an IC chip mounted with a CPU, a ROM, a RAM and the like is enclosed in a rectangular parallelepiped package main body, and is on the main control board 600 via a socket S01. Has been implemented. The IC elements IC <b> 01 to IC <b> 15 are general-purpose IC elements configured by sealing an IC chip on which a plurality of predetermined logic circuits are mounted in a rectangular parallelepiped package main body. The resistors R01 to R26 are laterally placed (axial) resistors configured by sealing an electric resistance element in a cylindrical package, and the collective resistors R31 and R32 include a plurality of resistors. It is a vertical type (radial type) resistor configured to be housed in one package. The capacitors C01 to C05 are axial capacitors, and the capacitors C11 to C14 are radial capacitors larger than the capacitors C01 to C05. The connectors CN01 to CN04 are electrical components to be joined with a connector (not shown) on the harness side for electrically connecting the main control substrate 600 to another control substrate or an electric device, and each of the plurality of terminals And a box-like housing that encloses the terminal group.

  FIG. 62 shows the height relationship of each electronic component mounted on the main control substrate 600. As shown in FIG. As shown, the height of the microprocessor MP01 (the distance from the surface of the main control substrate 600 to the top surface of the package body of the microprocessor MP01 installed on the substrate surface via the socket S01) is H1. The electronic components taller than the height H1 of the microprocessor MP01 in the state mounted on the main control substrate 600 are the collective resistors (FIG. 62 illustrates the collective resistor R31, but the other components are the same. And radial type capacitors (in FIG. 62, the capacitor C12 is illustrated but the others are the same). All the other electronic components are shorter than the height H1 of the microprocessor MP01 (FIG. 62 illustrates only the axial type resistor R12, the IC element IC12, and the connector CN03, but the other axial type The same applies to resistors, IC elements, connectors, axial capacitors, etc.

<Direction of microprocessor and other IC elements>
As shown in FIG. 61, many IC elements IC01 to IC15 are mounted on the main control substrate 600. A circuit connected to each terminal of each IC element is formed on the main control board 600, and if the mounting position (direction) of the IC element is wrongly mounted, it naturally becomes nonfunctional. Therefore, when mounting the IC element, the mounting direction of the IC element is grasped on the basis of the position of the first pin 1P of the IC element, and to which position on the main control board 600 the 1st pin 1P is connected Implementation work may be performed while confirming. On the other hand, if the mounting direction of many IC elements (the position of the first pin 1P at the time of mounting) is different for each IC element, it takes time to confirm the mounting direction of each IC element, and the working efficiency decreases. It will

  Therefore, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, the mounting directions of the IC elements are aligned in accordance with the mounting direction of the microprocessor MP01 on the main control substrate 600. Specifically, in the microprocessor MP01, the direction (longer direction in the drawing) of the long side direction (long side direction of the upper surface of the package main body) coincides with the lateral direction in the drawing (direction of the main control substrate 600 (long side in this example)) Hereinafter, it is mounted in a state in which the first pin 1P of its housing terminal is located at the lower left in the drawing. The IC elements are mounted in a direction (horizontal direction) in which the long side direction (long side direction of the upper surface of the package body) matches the horizontal direction in the figure (horizontal direction), and the long side direction is vertical direction in the figure (main control There is an IC 14 and an IC 15 mounted in a direction (hereinafter referred to as “vertical direction”) coinciding with the other side (in this example, the direction of the short side) of the substrate 600. Among them, all of the ICs 01 to 13 mounted sideways are mounted with their respective first pins 1P positioned at the lower left in the figure, as with the microprocessor MP01. On the other hand, the ICs 14 and 15 mounted in the vertical orientation are both mounted with the respective first pin 1P positioned at the upper left in the drawing.

  As described above, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, the positions of the first pins 1P of the microprocessor MP01 and the IC elements IC01 to IC13 mounted in the same horizontal direction on the main control substrate 600 are aligned (both of them It is configured to come to the lower left position in the figure). Therefore, when mounting the IC elements IC01 to IC13, it is easy to confirm the mounting direction, so that it is possible to reduce mounting errors and to improve work efficiency. Further, in this example, also for the test IC element, the first pin is mounted sideways with the lower left position in the figure (for the first pin in each pad portion P01, P02) Land portions L1 and L2 are formed at the lower left position in the figure), which makes it difficult for mounting errors to occur.

  In this example, although the positions of the respective first pins 1P are aligned for all of the laterally oriented IC elements IC01 to IC13, some of the laterally oriented IC elements are mounted in the opposite direction. (The position of the first pin 1P is at the upper right in the figure) may be used as an IC element. In that case, it is preferable from the viewpoint of reducing mounting errors that the IC elements mounted in the reverse direction have a shape and size that can be easily distinguished from other IC elements. Further, the substrate surface may be divided into a plurality of areas, and the mounting direction of the IC element may be changed for each area. For example, the substrate surface is divided into a left area and a right area, and the lateral IC elements mounted in the left area are arranged such that the positions of the respective first pins are aligned in the lower left, and the right area In each of the laterally oriented IC elements mounted on the circuit board, the positions of the respective first pins may be arranged in the upper right.

<Distance between microprocessor and other IC elements>
When current is supplied to the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) installed on the main control substrate 600, noise may be generated from the IC elements. If such an IC element is placed near the microprocessor MP01, noise generated from the IC element may adversely affect the operation of the microprocessor MP01.

  Therefore, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, the IC element is not arranged in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01 on the main control substrate 600. Specifically, a virtual boundary formed in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01 (here, at a position away from the outer periphery of the package body of the microprocessor MP01 by the length W1 in the upper surface short side direction of the package body) In the region surrounded by the line BL1, no IC element is arranged. W1 is a length equal to or longer than the length (the mounting length) of one axial resistor (R01 to R26).

  As described above, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, all of the IC elements IC01 to IC15 mounted on the main control substrate 600 are at least the length in the upper surface short side direction of the package body of the microprocessor MP01 from the microprocessor MP01. W1 minutes are spaced apart. Therefore, even if noise is generated from the IC element, the possibility of the noise adversely affecting the operation of the microprocessor MP01 can be reduced. Preferably, each IC element is disposed apart from the microprocessor MP01 by at least twice the length W1.

<Height of electronic parts arranged around the microprocessor>
The microprocessor MP01 is automatically mounted on the main control substrate 600 by a mounting device such as a chip mounter. After holding the microprocessor MP01 and moving it to the upper side of the planned mounting position, the mounting device moves the microprocessor MP01 downward to a predetermined height and mounts it on the socket S01. If a component taller than the height of the microprocessor MP01 (height H1 at mounting) is mounted in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01, it differs from the planned mounting position due to a data input error at the planned mounting position, etc. When the mounting device moves the microprocessor MP01 downward at the position, the microprocessor MP01 and a jig for gripping the microprocessor MP1 may come in contact with tall parts.

  Therefore, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, components taller than the microprocessor MP01 are not arranged in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01 on the main control substrate 600. Specifically, in the vicinity area of the microprocessor MP01 (the above-mentioned boundary line BL1 formed at a position separated from the outer periphery of the package body of the microprocessor MP01 by the length W1 in the upper surface short side direction of the package body) In the enclosed region, components taller than the microprocessor MP01 (in this example, the collective resistors R31 and R32 and the radial capacitors C11 to C14) are not disposed. Note that even components in the vicinity area may be disposed as long as they are components shorter than the microprocessor MP01 (however, except for the IC element), but they may not be disposed.

  Thus, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, all components taller than the microprocessor MP01 (collective resistors R31, R32 and radial type capacitors C11 to C14) are all at least the microprocessor MP01 from the microprocessor MP01. The length W1 in the upper surface short side direction of the package main body is spaced apart. Therefore, when the mounting device moves the microprocessor MP01 downward at a position different from the planned mounting position, the microprocessor MP01 and a jig for gripping the microprocessor contact the tall parts, and the microprocessor MP01 It becomes possible to prevent tall parts from being damaged.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, as for the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as “the slot machine of the fifth embodiment”), specifically, the built-in RWM (hereinafter referred to as “main control unit 100 described above”) The memory map of “RAM” will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.
In such a memory map of RAM, setting value data area, external signal data area, RAM checksum data area, control command buffer area, stack pointer temporary storage buffer area when power failure occurs, unused area, save data storage Areas etc. are included.
Note that the above-mentioned unused area means an area that may be used as an area for taking or clearing a checksum value, but is not used in a game.

  In the gaming machine, the setting value data as data used for the combination processing lottery or the like is important in advancing the game. Therefore, it is necessary to reliably prevent a state where the setting value data is rewritten for some reason when stored in the RAM.

  For example, when there is a need to save a program under execution based on the occurrence of an interrupt instruction (save instruction), for example, the stack address is updated (subtracted) and then executed in the save data storage area secured as a stack. Stores the value of the program counter of the program in (the original program). When returning to the original state, the stack address is updated (added) after data is taken out from the save data storage area indicated by the stack address. In this way, it is possible to store information (return destination address) when returning to the original program indicating how far the original program has been executed. In the program processing, when successive interrupts occur, in order to return from the deep subroutine hierarchy to the original program, in principle, the return destination address is stored in the save data storage area by the number of consecutive interrupts. Since it is necessary, the capacity of the save data storage area needs at least a capacity corresponding to the number of consecutive interrupts. However, the capacity of the save data storage area in such a case is almost fixed at the time of program design (compiler time) (the save data storage area is, for example, several bytes in consideration of the number of normal interrupts) Since it is common to secure 8 bytes worth of save data 1 to save data 8 in FIG. 64), it is important to set the capacity of the save data storage area appropriately at the time of program design. Normally, it is possible to avoid the situation where the set value data is rewritten by the return destination address described above.

  However, if the program runs out of control due to some reason and the necessary processing procedure can not be performed, there is a possibility that a continuous interrupt instruction may be generated from the watchdog timer (WDT) or the like. Information on the number (capacity) according to the number of interrupt instructions is loaded in the area. That is, the return destination address is sequentially stored in each save data storage area by specifying the stack address obtained by sequentially subtracting (decrementing) the stack pointer.

  In such a case, the above-mentioned return destination address may be instantaneously stacked on the stack, and it goes beyond the save data area secured at the time of design and on the above (RAM address is 0 address side The process of rewriting the return destination address of the original program is performed up to the storage area (area where other data is stored) of the RAM in the area That is, the data described in the area adjacent to address 0, which is adjacent to the reserved save data area, is eroded by the return address, and the data stored in the RAM is lost. The rewritten unnecessary address data causes various undesirable problems in the operation of the gaming machine.

  In particular, when the set value data area described above is arranged in the close area on the address 0 side of the save data area in the address space of the RAM, the set value data makes no sense. It is important to reduce the risk of such a situation to a minimum, since there is a risk that it will be rewritten to no data and it will not be possible to continue the game itself in the gaming machine It becomes.

Therefore, the gaming machine (slot machine) according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention is configured to have the following requirements so that the occurrence of the situation as described above can be reduced to the minimum.
Below, five representative patterns of this embodiment will be described by listing requirements.

<Pattern 1 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) A storage means (RAM) capable of reading and writing data is provided.
(2) The storage means (RAM) saves at least a first storage area where setting value data is stored, a second storage area which is an unused area, and data necessary for proceeding with a game. And a third storage area.
(3) The second storage area is set at an address position between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) By setting as in the above (3), even if the number of data saved in the third storage area exceeds the design upper limit, the setting value data is hardly overwritten.

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 configured in this way, as shown in FIG. 63A, the game proceeds with the first storage area where the set value data is stored at the address position. By arranging the second storage area, which is an unused area, between the third storage area where the necessary data is saved, an interrupt instruction is continuously generated due to a program runaway or the like. Even if the return destination address data is eroded and overwritten onto the area on the smaller address side beyond the save data area secured at the time of design, the description is first of all in the unused area. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the setting value data is rewritten to data that does not make sense at all in the second storage area. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game will be seriously disturbed (or the game will not be possible).

<Pattern 2 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) In the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 above, the same requirement as the requirement (1) is provided.
(2A) The storage means (RAM) saves at least a first storage area where setting value data is stored, a second storage area which is an unused area, and data necessary for proceeding with the game. A third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing predetermined data to be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine.
(3A) The second storage area and the fourth storage area are set at address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) The gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 has the same requirements as requirement (4).

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 2 configured in this manner, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the game proceeds with the first storage area where the set value data is stored at the address position. A second storage area, which is an unused area, and a fourth storage area, which stores predetermined data to be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, are arranged between the third storage area where the necessary data is saved and the third storage area. As a result, an interrupt instruction is continuously generated due to a program runaway, etc., and the return address data exceeds the save data area secured at the design time, and erodes the area on the smaller address side and overwrites it. Even if it comes to be stored, the description first stores the second storage area, which is an unused area, and predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, which is not directly related to the game of the gaming machine. Fourth Will be made in 憶領 range, it is possible to greatly reduce the possibility that is rewritten to the data setting value data does not make sense at all. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game will be seriously disturbed (or the game will not be possible).

<Pattern 3 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) In the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 above, the same requirement as the requirement (1) is provided.
(2B) In the storage means (RAM), at least a first storage area where setting value data is stored, a second storage area which is an unused area, and data necessary for proceeding with a game are saved. A third storage area, and a fifth storage area for storing checksum data of the storage means (RAM).
(3B) The second storage area and the fifth storage area are set at address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) The gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 has the same requirements as requirement (4).

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 3 configured in this way, as shown in FIG. 63C, the game proceeds with the first storage area where the set value data is stored at the address position. A second storage area, which is an unused area, and a fifth storage area for storing checksum data of the storage means (RAM) are arranged between the third storage area where the necessary data is saved and the third storage area. By doing this, an interrupt instruction is continuously generated due to a program runaway, etc., and the return address data is overwritten over the save data area secured at the time of design, and the area with the smaller address is overwritten. Even if it becomes the second storage area, which is an unused area, and the game, it is not used substantially after the first processing such as when the power is turned on. Will be made in the fifth storage area for storing checksum data of M), it is possible to greatly reduce the possibility that is rewritten to the data setting value data does not make sense at all. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game will be seriously disturbed (or the game will not be possible).

<Pattern 4 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) In the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 above, the same requirement as the requirement (1) is provided.
(2C) The storage means (RAM) saves at least a first storage area where setting value data is stored, a second storage area which is an unused area, and data necessary for proceeding with the game. And a sixth storage area for storing command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub main control means.
(3C) The second storage area and the sixth storage area are set at address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) The gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 has the same requirements as requirement (4).

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 4 configured in this manner, as shown in FIG. 63D, the game proceeds with the first storage area where the setting value data is stored at the address position. The second storage area, which is an unused area, and command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub main control means are stored between the third storage area where the necessary data is saved and the third storage area. By arranging the sixth storage area, an interrupt instruction is continuously generated due to a program runaway or the like, and the return destination address data exceeds the save data area secured at the time of design, and the address Even if the smaller area is eroded and overwritten, the description first applies to the second storage area, which is an unused area, and the main control that is essential for playing a game. The command value to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub main control means which is not related is stored in the sixth storage area, and the setting value data is rewritten to data which does not make sense at all. It is possible to significantly reduce the risk of being broken. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game will be seriously disturbed (or the game will not be possible).

<Pattern 5 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) In the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 above, the same requirement as the requirement (1) is provided.
(2D) In the storage means (RAM), at least a first storage area where setting value data is stored, a second storage area which is an unused area, and data necessary for proceeding with a game are saved. A third storage area, and a seventh storage area for storing a stack pointer address when a power failure occurs.
(3D) The second storage area and the seventh storage area are set at address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) The gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 has the same requirements as requirement (4).

According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 5 configured in this way, as shown in FIG. 63E, the game proceeds with the first storage area where the set value data is stored at the address position. A second storage area, which is an unused area, and the seventh storage area, which stores a stack pointer address when a power failure occurs, are arranged between the third storage area in which the necessary data is saved and the third storage area in which the necessary data is saved. By this, an interrupt instruction is continuously generated due to a program runaway, etc., and return destination address data exceeds the save data area secured at the time of design, and erodes and overwrites the area on the smaller address side. Even if it occurs, the description is not used substantially except for the second storage area, which is an unused area, and at the time of power interruption, and does not significantly affect normal gaming. It will be made in the seventh storage area for storing a stack pointer address when it is possible to greatly reduce the possibility that is rewritten to the data setting value data does not make sense at all. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game will be seriously disturbed (or the game will not be possible).
In the above-described memory map, predetermined areas other than the above-described storage areas are each an area for storing various important data.

<Preferred embodiment of gaming machine of each pattern described above>
In the gaming machine of the patterns 1 to 5 described above, one storage area (the fourth storage area or the fourth storage area) is arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area, in addition to the second storage area or the second storage area. Storage area, the fifth storage area, the sixth storage area, and the seventh storage area). Unlike in the case of setting value data directly linked to the game of the gaming machine, all of the fourth to seventh storage areas are such that the data stored in the storage area is overwritten and the contents are changed. Also, the game medal can be inserted, and the game can be continued.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 63A to 63E, in addition to the second storage area, one storage area (fourth storage area, fifth storage area, sixth storage area, and the like) is provided. In any of the seventh storage areas, it is preferable to arrange them at an address position closer to the third storage area than the intermediate address position between the first storage area and the third storage area. As a result, the above-described fourth to seventh storage areas are arranged in an address area closer to the third storage area than the intermediate address position between the first and third storage areas. Areas other than the 4th to 7th storage areas are located in an address area further from the third storage area including the intermediate address position, and interrupt instructions are continuously made in accordance with a program runaway or the like. Even if the return address data is generated and is written over the save data area secured at the time of design and erode the area on the smaller address side, the data is stored in the fourth to seventh storage areas. It is possible to reduce the possibility of data rewriting in an area other than the above-described fourth to seventh storage areas storing more important data than the stored data.

  Further, in the gaming machine of patterns 1 to 5 described above, it is preferable that a second storage area including an unused area be disposed adjacent to the side where the address of the third storage area is small. In the unused area, the data that has already been described is not usually erased, so it is the arrangement that causes the least problems compared to the case where another storage area is adjacent to the third storage area. be able to.

  Further, in the gaming machines of patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIGS. 63A to 63E, in the address arrangement of the RAM, the second storage is performed between the first storage area and the third storage area. In addition to the area or the second storage area, one storage area (any of the fourth storage area, the fifth storage area, the sixth storage area, and the seventh storage area) is provided. It is possible to arrange any combination of storage areas among the fourth to seventh storage areas between the first storage area and the third storage area.

  That is, two storage areas may be added in addition to the second storage area, for example, the fourth and fifth storage areas may be arranged, or the fourth and sixth storage areas may be arranged. The fourth and seventh storage areas may be arranged, the fifth and sixth storage areas may be arranged, and the fifth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. And the sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. Furthermore, the second storage area and the two added storage areas may be arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area in any order.

  In addition to the second storage area, three storage areas may be added, for example, the fourth, fifth and sixth storage areas may be arranged, and the fourth, fifth and seventh The storage area may be arranged, the fourth, sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged, and the fifth, sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. Furthermore, the second storage area and the three added storage areas may be arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area in any order.

  Furthermore, in addition to the second storage area, fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. FIG. 64 shows an address map of a RAM in which the second, fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh storage areas are arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area. .

  In the above description, although the second storage area is disposed between the first storage area and the third storage area in any aspect, it is needless to say that the second storage area is disposed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that does not.

Hereinafter, the aspect shown in FIG. 64 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 64, this RAM is a storage area used by the user program as a work area (data area, stack area, etc.), and in the embodiment shown in FIG. 64, the setting values are set in the memory spaces 7F00H to 7FFFH. Save the first storage area for storing setting value data, which is a number for managing the second storage area as an unused area which is an area not used for gaming, and saved data saved by a CALL instruction, PUSH instruction, etc. A third storage area which is a possible storage area, a fourth storage area for storing data relating to an external signal output, and a checksum memory for setting an addition value of a RAM area to 0 5, a control command buffer for storing command data to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub main control means Storage area of 6, and the storage area of the seventh is arranged a buffer for storing a stack pointer at the time of power failure occurs until the power returns.
The address of 8000H is the start address of the stack pointer, and has a value larger by 1 than 7FFFH, which is the address of the save data 1 area for saving data first. Actually, when it is necessary to first save the program being executed, the stack pointer is decremented by 1, so that the value of the program counter etc. to be saved to the area of saved data 1 located at the address of 7FFFH Stored.

  Specifically, a first storage area for storing setting value data is disposed in the 7F02H address space, a fourth storage area for storing external signal output relationship data is disposed in the 7FC0H address space, and checksum data Is stored in the address space of 7FCEH, and the sixth memory area, which is a control command buffer, is placed in the address space of 7FD0H to 7FD5H, and the stack pointer (address) is stored at the time of a power failure A seventh storage area, which is a buffer for allocating, is arranged in the address space of 7FE0H, a second storage area as an unused area is arranged in the address space of 7FF7H, and a third storage area where save data can be stored is It is arranged in an address space of 7FF7H to 7FFFH.

  The sixth storage area which is a control command buffer is allocated a capacity of 6 bytes, and the third storage area where save data can be saved is allocated a capacity of 8 bytes, The other storage area is allocated a capacity of 1 byte.

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) having the address space of the RAM as shown in FIG. 64, the first storage area where setting value data is stored, and data necessary for proceeding with the game are saved. A second storage area which is an unused area, a fourth storage area which stores predetermined data to be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, and a storage means (RAM) A fifth storage area for storing checksum data, a sixth storage area for storing command information to be transmitted from the main control unit to the sub main control unit, and a seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address when a power failure occurs By arranging the storage area of the above, even if an unexpected situation occurs, the setting value data stored in the first storage area is overwritten by data that does not make sense at all. It can be greatly reduced.

  That is, a situation where an interrupt instruction is continuously generated due to a program runaway, etc., and the return address data exceeds the save data area secured at the time of design and erodes and overwrites the area on the smaller address side. Even if a failure occurs, the description is first not used until the second storage area, which is an unused area, and then secondly, when a power failure occurs, which does not significantly affect normal gaming. The seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address at the time of occurrence, and then the command information for transmitting from the main control means to the sub main control means not directly related to the main control means essential for playing a game A fifth memory area for storing checksum data of a storage means (RAM) that is not substantially used after the first processing such as power on in the game, and the sixth memory area In addition, in the fourth storage area storing predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, which is not directly related to the game area, the setting value data is rewritten to data that does not make sense at all. It is possible to significantly reduce the risk of being broken.

  This can greatly reduce the possibility that it will be impossible to play a game with the gaming machine. In particular, an unused area is arranged at a position closest to the third storage area, and even if unnecessary return address data is described in this unused area, there is no possibility that the data will be overwritten, The arrangement is highly secure.

  In the mode shown in FIG. 64, the first storage is performed between the first storage area where setting value data is stored and the third storage area where data necessary for proceeding with a game is saved. From the area side, a fourth storage area for storing predetermined data to be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, a fifth storage area for storing checksum data of the storage means (RAM), and sub mains from the main control means A sixth storage area for storing command information to be sent to the control means, a seventh storage area for storing a stack pointer address at the time of a power failure, and a second storage area which is an unused area are arranged. However, the arrangement of these storage areas is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 64, and may be arranged in any order.

  For example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, the fourth storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area among the five storage areas, and the other fifth The sixth storage area, the seventh storage area, and the second storage area can be changed and arranged in any order. In these arrangements, since the fourth memory area is arranged closest to the first memory area, it is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine together with setting value data stored in the first memory area. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the data stored in the fourth storage area storing predetermined data may be rewritten to data that does not make sense at all. Thus, the predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine can be made correct, and accurate information can be transmitted to the hall manager or the like.

  Further, for example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, the fifth storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area among the five storage areas, The fourth storage area, the sixth storage area, the seventh storage area, and the second storage area can be changed and arranged in any order. In these arrangements, since the fifth storage area for storing checksum data of the storage means (RAM) is disposed closest to the first storage area, the setting stored in the first storage area is made. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the data stored in the fifth storage area for storing the checksum data of the storage means (RAM) together with the value data may be rewritten to data that does not make sense at all. Thereby, the checksum data of the storage means (RAM) can be made correct, and the confirmation of the data value in the storage means (RAM) can be made good.

  Also, for example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, the sixth storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area among the five storage areas, The fourth storage area, the fifth storage area, the seventh storage area, and the second storage area can be changed and arranged in any order. In these arrangements, the sixth storage area for storing command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub main control means is arranged closest to the first storage area. The data stored in the sixth storage area for storing command information to be sent to the sub main control means together with the setting value data stored in may be rewritten as data that does not make sense at all Can be reduced. As a result, the command information to be transmitted to the sub main control means can be made correct, and the effect processing performed using the sub main control means can be made excellent.

  Further, for example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, the seventh storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area among the five storage areas, and the other storage area is arranged. The fourth storage area, the fifth storage area, the sixth storage area, and the second storage area can be changed and arranged in any order. In these arrangements, the seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address at the time of a power failure is disposed closest to the first storage area, and therefore the setting value data stored in the first storage area In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the stack pointer address stored in the seventh storage area is rewritten to data that does not make sense at all. Thus, the stack pointer address can be held at the correct value and the original program can be continuously processed without any trouble until the time of the power failure recovery.

  Of course, between the first storage area and the third storage area, the second storage area (unused area) is arranged closest to the first storage area, and the other fourth storage areas are arranged. , The fifth storage area, the sixth storage area, and the seventh storage area can be changed and arranged in any order.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 63F, the memory space allocated to the internal RAM may be configured to be continuous with the memory space of the internal ROM for storing user programs and data. That is, it is possible to configure the main control unit of the gaming machine from the built-in ROM allocated to the memory space of the addresses 0000H to 7DFH and the built-in RAM allocated to the memory spaces of the addresses 7F00H to 7FFFH.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as “the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment”), specifically, the rotation failure or the power failure occurs during the rotation of the reel (also referred to as the “rotation drum”). The control process when the event occurs is described with additional reference to FIG. 65 to FIG. In the slot machine of the sixth embodiment, three reels (corresponding to the above-mentioned reels 3a, 3b and 3c) and three stepping motors (the above-mentioned stepping motors 35a, 35b and 35c) for rotating the respective reels And control the rotation of the reel by switching the excitation phase of the stepping motor.

  First, an outline of reel control will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the stepping motor has four phases (φ0, φ1, φ2, φ3), and at the time of acceleration and constant speed, the 1-2 excitation system (φ0, φ0 · φ1, φ1, φ1 · φ2, φ2, It is controlled by a method of sequentially switching 8 excitation phase steps of φ2, φ3, φ3, φ3 and φ0), and controlled by a decelerating method of exciting all phases of φ0 to φ3 during deceleration (stepping motor The configuration and control method can be changed as appropriate). The switching of the excitation phase is performed in an interrupt process (corresponding to the above-described timer interrupt process) executed every predetermined time (for example, 1.5 milliseconds).

  As shown in FIG. 65, when the rotating drum start operation (operation of the start lever) is received, the acceleration state processing (processing to accelerate and rotate the rotating drum until it reaches a predetermined rotational speed) is triggered by it. Is executed. In the acceleration state processing, as shown in the drawing, the excitation phase switching of the first step is performed when the number of times of execution of the interrupt processing (also referred to as “the number of interruptions”) becomes 100 from the start time. Thereafter, excitation phase switching of the second step is performed when the number of interruptions is 50, and excitation phase switching of the third, fourth, and fifth steps is performed when the number of interruptions is 10, 5, and 2 respectively. . Then, at the time of execution of the interrupt processing next to the interrupt processing where the excitation phase switching of the fifth step is performed (when the number of interrupts is 1), the excitation phase switching of the sixth step is performed, and acceleration state processing ( The excitation switching from the first step to the sixth step is completed (the value of the number of interrupts for determining the switching timing of the excitation phase can be changed as appropriate).

  When the acceleration state processing is completed, constant speed state processing (processing to rotate the rotating drum at a constant speed) is executed. In the constant speed state processing, excitation phase switching is performed each time the interrupt processing is executed (the number of interrupts is one). When the spinning stop operation (the operation of the stop switch for stopping the spinning drum) is received during execution of the constant speed state processing, the scheduled stopping position of the spinning drum (deceleration state described later according to the received timing) The position to start the process is determined, and a deceleration start process is performed to rotate (slide) the rotating cylinder at a constant speed until the rotating cylinder moves to the expected stop position. Then, when the rotating drum moves to the planned stop position, deceleration state processing (processing for stopping the rotating drum while decelerating) is executed. In the deceleration state process, all phases of φ0 to φ3 are excited while the stop symbol interruption process is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, six times).

  Next, control processing in the case where the rotation failure of the reel occurs in the constant speed state of the drum or in the accelerating state of the drum will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 66 (A) to (C). In each flowchart, not only the processing content but also the state of the slot machine is described. FIG. 66A shows a processing procedure in the case where a rotation failure of the reel occurs during the constant speed rotation state. In this case, when the drum start operation is received (J11), the state is switched to the drum acceleration state (state capable of executing the acceleration state processing) (J12), and the acceleration state processing is performed (J13) . When this acceleration state process is completed (J14), the state shifts to a constant speed state (a state in which the constant speed state process can be executed) (J15), and the constant speed state process is executed (J16). If the rotation defect occurs (J17), and the rotation defect is detected (J18), reacceleration for starting the rotation of the rotating drum normally starts (J17). J19).

  FIG. 66 (B) shows a processing procedure in the case where a rotation failure of the reel occurs during the toroidal acceleration state. In this case, when the drum start operation is received (J11), the state is shifted to the drum acceleration state (J12), and the acceleration state processing is executed (J13). Even if rotation defects occur during the acceleration process (J133), the unprocessed acceleration process (the process of the unexecuted part of the entire process of the acceleration process) is executed as scheduled (J134) , End the acceleration state processing (J14). Thereafter, the speed control shifts to the constant speed state (J15), and the constant speed state is executed (J16). If rotation failure of the rotating drum is detected during execution of the constant speed state processing (J18), reacceleration is started (J19). In re-acceleration, processing with the same content as the above-described acceleration state processing may be performed, or separately, re-acceleration state processing different from the acceleration state processing may be defined, and the re-acceleration state processing may be performed. May be

  If a rotation failure occurs during the acceleration state processing, it is possible to detect the rotation failure and perform reacceleration. However, there is also a possibility that the rotation failure can be eliminated by executing the unprocessed acceleration state processing as scheduled. So, in this example, even if rotation failure occurs during acceleration state processing, reacceleration is not performed (detection of rotation failure may or may not be performed), and constant speed state processing is being performed. When a rotation failure is detected, re-acceleration is performed. By doing this, when rotation defects are eliminated by executing the unprocessed acceleration state processing as scheduled, it is not necessary to execute reacceleration, so the game can be made to progress smoothly. It becomes. In addition, control processing during acceleration state processing can be simplified (for example, rerotation is not performed even if rotation defects occur, and detection of rotation defects is not performed either). It is possible to reduce the amount of data.

  FIG. 66 (C) shows a processing procedure in the case where a power failure occurs while the drum is in an accelerated state, which causes a rotation failure of the reel. In this case, when the drum start operation is received (J11), the state is shifted to the drum acceleration state (J12), and the acceleration state processing is executed (J13). If a power failure occurs during execution of this acceleration processing (J131), and if a rotational defect occurs (J133) after power recovery (J132), the unprocessed acceleration processing is executed as scheduled ( J134) The acceleration state processing is ended (J14). Thereafter, the speed control shifts to the constant speed state (J15), and the constant speed state is executed (J16). If rotation failure of the rotating drum is detected during execution of the constant speed state processing (J18), reacceleration is started (J19).

  In the case of this example, power interruption occurs during execution of the acceleration state processing, whereby re-acceleration is not performed even if a rotation defect occurs, (detection of the rotation defect may or may not be performed. ), Re-acceleration is performed when a rotation failure is detected during execution of constant speed state processing. By doing this, when rotation defects are eliminated by executing the unprocessed acceleration state processing as scheduled, it is not necessary to execute reacceleration, so the game can be made to progress smoothly. It becomes. In addition, since control processing during acceleration state processing can be simplified (for example, even if a rotation defect occurs due to a power failure, reacceleration is not performed and detection of a rotation defect is not performed). It is possible to reduce the amount of data of the control program.

  The detection of the rotation defect of the rotating drum is performed, for example, as follows. Here, when the rotating drum is rotating normally, the stepping motor is configured to rotate one rotation when the excitation phase is switched by 336 steps. In this case, when the rotating drum is at a constant speed, one step is performed for each interrupt, so if the rotating drum is rotating normally, the rotating drum rotates once at 336 interrupts. Therefore, the number of interruptions is counted, and when the rotation drum makes one revolution, the count value is cleared and counting of the number of interruptions is started again. It is detected by an index sensor disposed in the vicinity of the rotating drum (that is, when it is detected by the index sensor, the count value of the number of interruptions is cleared). In this way, when the rotating drum is in a constant speed state, the rotating drum should make one rotation (detected by the index sensor) when (the count value of) the number of interruptions reaches 336. Therefore, even if the number of interruptions exceeds 336, if there is no detection by the index sensor, it may be determined that a rotation failure has occurred. However, if it is determined that the rotation is not good immediately after the number of interrupts exceeds 336, there is a possibility that the number of cases in which the rotation is judged is insufficient may cause the reel control to stagnate. When the number of interrupts reaches 400 (the number of times can be changed as appropriate), it is determined that the rotation is defective.

  Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 67A to 67C, a control process when a winning combination (hereinafter also referred to as a "winning determination combination") which is always established regardless of the pushing order and the pushing position is won. explain. In each flowchart, not only the processing content but also the state of the slot machine is described. FIG. 67A shows a processing procedure in the case where all the turning cylinders have stopped normally after the winning combination is won.

  In this case, the winning combination is won (J31), and when the turning drum is started to rotate (J32), the state shifts to the constant speed state (J33), and constant speed processing is executed (J34). Thereafter, the state shifts to a stop operation acceptable state (a state where all the cylinders are in a constant speed rotation state and the operation of the stop switch can be accepted) (J35), and the first stop operation is accepted (J36). The winning combination symbol (corresponding symbol of the winning determination combination) is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the cylinder (the turning cylinder stopped by the first stop operation) (J37). Thereafter, when the second stop operation is accepted (J38), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line (J39) in the second time trunk (the time trunk stopped by the second stop operation). Furthermore, when the third stop operation is accepted (J40), the state shifts to a state where the drum can be decelerated (state in which the deceleration start process and the subsequent deceleration state process can be performed) (J41). After that, the deceleration start process is executed to move the third trunk (the trunk that is stopped by the third stop operation) to the planned stop position (J42), and the deceleration state processing is executed to execute the third trunk. The winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line (J43). Then, after confirming the full-body stop (J44), payout of game medals is started (J45).

  FIG. 67B shows a processing procedure in the case where a power failure occurs after receiving the third stop operation. In this case, the winning combination is won (J31), and when the turning drum is started to rotate (J32), the state shifts to the constant speed state (J33), and constant speed processing is executed (J34). Thereafter, the state shifts to a stop operation acceptable state (J35), and when the first stop operation is received (J36), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the first time (J37). After that, when the second stop operation is accepted (J38), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the second time (J39). Furthermore, when the third stop operation is accepted (J40), the state shifts to the rotating drum stop state (J41). After that, even if a power failure occurs (J411), the deceleration start process is executed to move the third cylinder to the planned stop position (J42), and the deceleration state process is executed. Thereafter, the power-off process is executed (J421), and the power is restored (J422). Since the deceleration start process and the deceleration state process are executed before the power-off process, the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the third cylinder (J43), and the whole cylinder stop (J44) After confirmation of), payout of game medals is started (J45).

  In the case of this example, even if the power is cut off after the third stop operation is accepted, the third cylinder can be moved to the planned stop position, and the winning combination symbol can be stopped and displayed on the effective line. (A power supply with a level capable of controlling the rotating drum (a power supply with a level not detected as a power supply interruption) is supplied for a predetermined period even if a power supply interruption occurs, and deceleration start processing and deceleration state processing are normally executed within the predetermined period. Configuration is possible). Therefore, even if the power is cut off after the third stop operation is accepted, the winning symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the game medal can be paid out promptly after the power is restored, the game can be smoothly advanced.

  FIG. 67 (C) shows a processing procedure in the case where a rotation defect of the rotating drum occurs after receiving the third stop operation. In this case, the winning combination is won (J31), and when the turning drum is started to rotate (J32), the state shifts to the constant speed state (J33), and constant speed processing is executed (J34). Thereafter, the state shifts to a stop operation acceptable state (J35), and when the first stop operation is received (J36), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the first time (J37). After that, when the second stop operation is accepted (J38), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the second time (J39). Furthermore, when the third stop operation is accepted (J40), the state shifts to the rotating drum stop state (J41). After that, a rotation failure occurs in the third cylinder (J415), which makes it impossible to properly execute the deceleration start process and the deceleration state process, and the third cylinder can be moved to the planned stop position. Since it is impossible (J416), it is not possible to stop and display a winning combination symbol on the effective line in the 3rd ton (J417). However, after confirmation of the full stop (J44), payout of game medals is started (J45).

  In the case of the present example, the game medal is paid out even if the winning combination symbol can not be stopped and displayed on the effective line in the 3rd torso because the turning defect occurs after the third stop operation is received. Is supposed to do. This is because although it is internally determined that the winning combination is established when the third stop operation is accepted, the winning combination symbol is not displayed stopped on the effective line at the third cylinder. In this case, it is considered that if the player does not pay out the game medals, the player will be unfairly disadvantaged. Therefore, if there is no problem in the program control, even if the actual stop position is shifted due to an external factor, the player is given a profit as the display determination assuming that the winning symbols are all the same. As in the present example, even if the winning combination symbols do not match, it is possible to prevent the player from being inconvenient by paying out the game medals when the establishment is determined internally. And, it becomes possible to execute the progress of the game smoothly. In the present example, the case where the winning combination is won is described as an example, but the same control can be performed even when a combination other than the winning combination is won. For example, when a winning combination that is established depending on the pushing order and the pressing position is won, and if it is internally determined that the winning combination is established when the third stop operation is accepted, the rotation failure is subsequently made. The game medal may be paid out even if it is not possible to stop and display the winning combination symbol on the activated line. On the other hand, when it is internally determined that the winning combination is not established when the third stop operation is received, but the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line due to the occurrence of the rotation failure thereafter. The player may not pay out the game medals. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an unreasonable profit which would otherwise not be obtained.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 67 (B), even if the power is cut off after the third stop operation is received, the third cylinder is moved to the planned stop position, and the winning combination symbol is put on the effective line. It is configured to be able to display a stop. On the other hand, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning combination symbol may not be able to be stopped and displayed on the effective line at the third time, depending on the timing at which the power is cut off. Even in such a configuration, if it is internally determined that the winning combination will be established when the third stop operation is received, the power is turned off and the winning combination symbol becomes valid thereafter. It is preferable that the game medals be paid out even if the stop display can not be made on the line.

  In addition, when power failure or rotation failure occurs after the third stop operation is received, an error notification may be performed. This error notification may be always performed when a power failure or a rotation failure occurs, or when a payout of game medals is made (when the winning combination is determined internally), an error may occur. The error notification may be performed when the notification is not performed and the payout of the game medal is not performed (when the non-establishment of the winning combination is internally determined). If the error notification is always performed, the number of times to determine whether the error notification is to be performed can be reduced, so that the control program can be simplified. If a configuration is made not to perform error notification when paying out game medals, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game by error notification, so it is possible to smoothly progress the game. If an error is notified when the payout of the game medals is not made, even if the winning combination symbol which should not be displayed on the effective line is stopped due to the power failure or the rotation defect, Since it is easy for the player to understand that it is due to an error, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust against the fact that the game medal is not paid out even though the winning combination symbols are in place. It becomes possible.

  In the above description, although the case where power failure or rotation failure occurs after receiving the third stop operation is described, the case where power failure or rotation failure occurs after the first stop operation or the second stop operation is received. Can be configured similarly. For example, power failure or rotation failure occurs after the second stop operation is accepted, and the first stop before power-off even if the winning combination symbol can not be stopped and displayed on the effective line in the second time When the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the first and third torsoes by the third stop operation after the operation and the power return, the game medal may be paid out. Similarly, even after the first stop operation is accepted, the power is turned off or a rotation failure occurs, and even if the winning combination symbol can not be stopped and displayed on the effective line in the first cylinder, the second after the power is restored. When the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the second and third torso by the stop operation and the third stop operation, the game medal may be paid out.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as "the slot machine of the seventh embodiment"), specifically, the setting of the number of wins and the payout rate of the replay player, and the setting of the bonus game. , And will be described with additional reference to FIGS.

  The payout rate in the slot machine corresponds to the total number (also referred to as "total bet number") of game media inserted (betted) in the slot machine to play those games when the predetermined number of games are played. The percentage of the total number of gaming media (also referred to as the "total payout number") paid out of the slot machine as a result of the game of. The higher the payout rate, the more advantageous it is for the player and the higher the profit can be obtained, but the disadvantage for the game arcade is that the business profit is reduced. On the other hand, the lower the payout rate, the more disadvantageous the player may be and the possibility of causing a serious disadvantage, but the game is advantageous and the operating profit is increased. Therefore, how to set the payout rate is important in designing a slot machine (determining specifications).

  In this slot machine of the seventh embodiment, the number of wins of the re-play combination is shown in the middle column of FIG. 68 when each predetermined number of games (400 times, 1600 times, 6000 times, 17500 times) are played in design. While being set so as to be within the numerical range shown, the payout rate is set so as to be within the numerical range shown in the right column of FIG. In FIG. 68, P1, P2, P3 and P4 respectively indicate the number of winnings of the replay player in design when 400, 1600, 6000 and 17500 games are played, and The design payout rate is indicated by Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4, respectively. The payout rate (Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4) is calculated by dividing the total number of payouts when a predetermined number of games have been played by the total bet number. Further, the bet number of the next game when the replay role is established is calculated as zero.

  Furthermore, the following two methods are known as a simulation method for verifying the design payout rate. The first method is a method of calculating the payout rate based on the game result in the case where the turning drum is stopped at an arbitrary pressing order and an arbitrary pressing position in all the predetermined number of games. The second method is a method of calculating the payout rate based on the game result when all of the winning combinations are established in the game in all the predetermined number of games. In either method, when a plurality of set values (for example, set value 1 to set value 6) are provided for the winning probability of the winning combination, each set value is verified and bet is made in one game. If it is possible to change the number of game media that can be played (for example, 1 bet, 2 bets, 3 bets), verification is performed on all the bet numbers. In the slot machine of the seventh embodiment, even if it is verified by either method in design, the payout rate is set so as to fall within the numerical range shown in FIG. 68 in design.

  The contents shown in FIG. 68 will be individually described below. With regard to the lower limit when 400 games have been played, the design is such that the replay player is won at least 54 times (54 P P1), and by this design, the payout rate is , Is set to be more than 1/3 (1/3 <Q1). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, there is a risk that the player will be significantly disadvantaged as a result of playing 400 games, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. It becomes possible to prevent that. In addition, if the payout rate does not exceed 1/3 at the stage of playing less than 400 times, as a player, the game will be played up to 400 times and the game will be repeated even a little (Profit Because the game arcade will have more opportunities to have the player play at least 400 games, the slot machine operating rate will increase and secure certain profits. It will be easier.

  The upper limit value for playing 400 games is set by design so that the replay player will win in the range not exceeding 300 times (P1 ≦ 300). The rate is set to be less than 2.2 (Q1 <2.2). If the upper limit of the payout rate is set higher than this, as a result of playing 400 times, there is a risk that the game arcade will be significantly disadvantaged, but according to this example, such a situation occurs It becomes possible to prevent that. In addition, if the payout rate is significantly lower than 2.2 at the stage where less than 400 games have been played, the player will play the game up to 400 times and play only a little (Profit The game arcade will have more opportunities to have the player play at least 400 games, and the slot machine operating rate will increase and secure certain profits. It becomes easy to do.

  With regard to the lower limit when playing 1600 games, it is set in the design that the replay player is won at least 219 times (219 2 P2), and by this design, the payout rate is And 2/5 (2/5 <Q2). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, there is a risk that the player will be significantly disadvantaged as a result of playing 1600 times, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. It becomes possible to prevent that. In addition, when the number of games played exceeds 400 times but does not reach 1600, if the payout rate does not exceed 2/5, the player can play up to 1600 times. As you will have a sense of willing to go back even a little (increase your profit), as a game arcade, you will have more opportunities to have the player play the game up to 1600 times, and the operating rate of the slot machine will increase and it will be constant It is easier to secure the benefits of

  The upper limit value for playing 1600 games is set by design so that the replay player will win in the range not exceeding 1200 times (P2 ≦ 1200). The rate is set to be less than 1.5 (Q2 <1.5). If the upper limit of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a risk that the game arcade will be significantly disadvantaged as a result of playing 1600 times, but according to this example, such a situation occurs It becomes possible to prevent that. In addition, when the number of games played exceeds 400 times but less than 1600, if the payout rate is significantly lower than 1.5, the player can play up to 1600 times. As a game arcade, you will have more opportunities to have the player play the game up to 1600 times, and the operating rate of the slot machine will increase. It becomes easy to secure a certain profit.

  With regard to the lower limit when 6000 games have been played, the design is such that the replay player is won at least 821 times (821 ≦ P3), whereby the payout rate is set by design. , Is set to be more than 1/2 (1/2 <Q3). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, there is a risk that the player will be significantly disadvantaged as a result of performing 6000 games, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. It becomes possible to prevent that. Also, when the number of games played exceeds 1,600 but not 6,000, if the payout rate does not exceed 1/2, the player can play up to 6,000 times. As you will have a sense of willing to go back even a little (increase your profit), as a game arcade, you will have more opportunities to have the player play the game up to 6000 times, and the operating rate of the slot machine will increase and it will be constant It is easier to secure the benefits of

  With regard to the upper limit value when 6,000 times of games are played, the design is such that the replay player is won within a range not exceeding 4500 times (P2 ≦ 4500), and by this design, the balls are ejected The rate is set to be less than 1.26 (Q2 <1.26). If the upper limit of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a risk that the game arcade will be significantly disadvantaged as a result of performing 6000 games, but according to this example, such a situation occurs It becomes possible to prevent that. In addition, at the stage where the number of games exceeding 1,600 times but less than 6,000 times is played, if the payout rate is significantly lower than 1.26, the player can play up to 6,000 times. As a game arcade, you will have more opportunities to have the player play the game up to 6000 times, and the operating rate of the slot machine will increase. It becomes easy to secure a certain profit.

  With regard to the lower limit when 17500 games have been played, the design is such that the replay player is won at least 2397 times (2397 ≦ P4), whereby the payout rate is set by design. And 3/5 (3/5 <Q4). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, there is a risk that the player will be significantly disadvantaged as a result of playing 17,500 games, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. It becomes possible to prevent that. In addition, when the number of games exceeded 6000 times but not reached 17500 times and the payout rate does not exceed 3/5, the player can play up to 17500 times. As you will have a sense of willing to go back even a little (increase your profit), the game arcade will have more opportunities for players to play 17500 games, and the slot machine utilization rate will increase and it will be constant It is easier to secure the benefits of

  The upper limit value for playing 17,500 games is set by design so that the replay player will win in the range not exceeding 13125 times (P2 ≦ 13125), and by this, the ball is out of design The rate is set to be less than 1.15 (Q2 <1.15). If the upper limit of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a risk that the game arcade will be significantly disadvantaged as a result of playing 17,500 games, but according to this example, such a situation occurs It becomes possible to prevent that. In addition, when the number of times the game exceeds 6000 times but does not reach 17500 times and the payout rate is significantly lower than 1.15, the player can play up to 17500 times. As a game arcade, you will have more chances to have the player play the game up to 17500 times, and the slot machine operating rate will increase. It becomes easy to secure a certain profit.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 69, a simulation result of the payout rate will be described. FIG. 69 (A) shows an example of the result when the simulation according to the above-mentioned second method (the winning combination is always established in the game) is performed over 10 games, and FIG. 69 (B) The symbol) shows the winning combination (here, the combination of the bell and the re-playing combination) and the winning probability of each loss and the number of payouts (when the number of bets is 3) in the simulation.

  In this simulation result, the formation roles from the first game to the 10th game are lost, bell, re-play, lost, lost, bell, re-play, bell, lost, lost, respectively. There is. The bet number is “0” in the next game when the replay role is established, and “3” in the other games. In addition, the number of payouts is “6” when the bell combination is established, and “0” when the game player combination is established as “0”, so the total bet number in 10 games is “24”, the total number of payouts Becomes "18". When the payout rate is calculated based on the simulation result, it is 0.75 (= 18 ÷ 24). This results in satisfying the above-described design settings of the payout rate Q1 to Q4. In this simulation result, although a bonus combination is not won, when providing a bonus game to be performed when a bonus combination is won and established, a net increase of 2 (for example, 3 bets, 5 payouts) It is preferable to make it a bonus game.

  In the above, the upper limit value (300, 1200, 4500, 13125) of the number of winning of the re-playing combination in design when playing a predetermined number of times (400 times, 1600 times, 6000 times, 17500 times) By setting, the upper limit value (2.2, 1.5, 1.26, 1.15) of the payout rate is not exceeded in design. On the other hand, by setting the number of payouts of the gaming medals when the small winning combination is established small, even if the number of winning the replay player combination exceeds the above-mentioned upper limit, the above-mentioned for the payout rate, It is also possible to configure so as not to exceed the upper limit value of.

<Setting of bonus game>
When a bonus game is loaded, the payout rate is set higher than usual during the bonus game, so how much the game media to be paid out during the bonus game is to be set is greatly dependent on the overall payout rate. Affect. In addition, the bonus game is executed when the ratio of the number of combinations of symbols (also referred to as "bonus symbols") that trigger the bonus game to the number of combinations of all symbols in all turning drums increases. Since the ratio also increases, how to set the maximum number of combinations of bonus symbols (also referred to as the "maximum symbol combination number") affects the overall payout rate.

  In the slot machine of the seventh embodiment, a total of three bonus games of two BB (big bonus) games (BB1 and BB2) and one MB (middle bonus) game (MB1) are mounted. In the BB game, a bonus game ("RB (regular bonus) game") in which a maximum of eight wins are possible and a maximum of 15 payouts can be achieved by one win according to the standard when designing a slot machine ) Is a bonus game that can be performed continuously. In the MB game, a bonus game in which at least one reel is stopped within a shorter time (for example, 75 milliseconds) than normal after the stop operation is accepted (also referred to as a “CB (challenge bonus) game”) Is a bonus game that can be executed continuously.

  The setting contents of each bonus game will be individually described below with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 (A) shows the setting contents of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and FIG. 70 (B) shows the setting of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20 The contents are shown. As shown, BB1 has a maximum number of payouts in BB1 of “maximum 225” (maximum of 225 games during BB1 whether the number of symbols on each reel is 21 or 20) It is possible to pay out medals, but it will not be paid out beyond 225 cards. In BB1, the maximum symbol combination number of BB symbols is set to "12" when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and "10" when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. It is set to.

  The pattern of the combination of the number of symbols in each reel of BB1 when the actual symbol combination number of BB symbols is set to the maximum number of symbol combinations is as illustrated. That is, when the symbol combination number of the BB symbol is "12", there are 18 combinations of symbol number combination A1 to symbol number combination A18, and when the symbol combination number of BB symbol is "10" There are nine combinations of pattern number combinations B1 to symbol number combinations B9. Each symbol number combination indicates the number of symbols in the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, symbol number combination A1 indicates a pattern in which 12 BB symbols arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol arranged on the right reel, the number of symbols The combination A7 shows one BB symbol arranged on the left reel, six BB symbols arranged on the middle reel, two BB symbols arranged on the right reel, and the symbol number combination A15 is Three BB symbols placed on the left reel, four BB symbols placed on the middle reel, and one BB symbol placed on the right reel show one pattern (all are BB on each reel It becomes "12" when the number of symbols is multiplied.

  Similarly, the symbol number combination B1 shows a pattern in which 10 BB symbols arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol arranged on the right reel, Number combination B5 shows five BB symbols arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol arranged on the middle reel, two BB symbols arranged on the right reel, and the symbol number combination B9 1 BB symbol placed on the left reel, 2 BB symbol placed on the middle reel, and 5 BB symbols placed on the right reel (all show patterns on each reel) It becomes "10" when the number of BB symbols is multiplied.

  71A shows the setting contents of BB2 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and FIG. 71B shows the setting of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. The contents are shown. As shown in the figure, the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is "over 285" (the number of payouts of game medals in BB2 is 285), whether BB2 has 21 symbols or 20 symbols on each reel. When the number of sheets is exceeded, BB2 is set to end). In BB2, the maximum symbol combination number of BB symbols is set to "6" when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and "5" when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. It is set to.

  The pattern of the combination of the number of symbols in each reel of BB2 when the actual symbol combination number of BB symbols is set to the maximum symbol combination number is as illustrated. That is, when the symbol combination number of the BB symbol is "6", there are nine combination patterns from symbol number combination C1 to symbol number combination C9, and when the symbol combination number of BB symbol is "5" There are three combination patterns of symbol number combination D1 to symbol number combination D3. For example, symbol number combination C1 indicates a pattern in which six BB symbols arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol arranged on the right reel, the number of symbols The combination C4 shows three BB symbols arranged on the left reel, two BB symbols arranged on the middle reel, one BB symbol arranged on the right reel, and the symbol number combination C8 is Two BB symbols placed on the left reel, one BB symbol placed on the middle reel, and three BB symbols placed on the right reel (all indicate BB on each reel) If you multiply the number of symbols, it will be "6").

  Similarly, symbol number combination D1 indicates a pattern in which five BB symbols disposed on the left reel, one BB symbol disposed on the middle reel, and one BB symbol disposed on the right reel, Number combination D2 shows one BB symbol placed on the left reel, five BB symbols placed on the middle reel, one BB symbol placed on the right reel, and the symbol number combination D3 is 1 BB symbol placed on the left reel, 1 BB symbol placed on the middle reel, and 5 BB symbols placed on the right reel (all show patterns on each reel) It becomes "5" when the number of BB symbols is multiplied.

  FIG. 71C shows the set content (the upper limit of the number of payouts) of MB1. As illustrated, the upper limit of the number of payouts in MB1 is set to “over 153” (MB1 ends when the number of payouts of gaming medals in MB1 exceeds 153). In MB1, the number of symbols on each reel and the maximum symbol combination number of bonus symbols are not particularly set.

  In the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment, the bonus game is highly advantageous to the player in the order of BB2> BB1> MB1. That is, BB1 and MB1 are bonus games having a lower degree of advantage compared to BB2, but are positioned as bonus games that are more advantageous than one RB game. According to the specifications for designing slot machines, it is possible to pay out up to 120 sheets (up to 8 winnings and up to 15 payouts per winning) in one RB game. Become. Therefore, if the upper limit of the number of payouts of BB1 or MB1 is set to "120" or less, there is a possibility that a player who can receive only such payouts may have an impression of a bonus game of RB game or less. Therefore, in order to ensure that the player knows that it is a bonus game that is more advantageous than the RB game (the number of payouts is larger than the maximum number of payouts “120” allowed in the specifications of one RB game), The upper limit of the number of payouts in MB1 is set to "maximum 225" in BB1 and "over 153" in MB1.

  BB2 is a bonus game having a high degree of advantage as compared to BB1 or MB1. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is set to exceed the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB1 and MB1. However, if the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is set too high, there is a possibility that a player who has acquired many game medals by BB2 may increase the possibility of putting himself into the game trying to hit BB2 again. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is set to "over 285" for the purpose of preventing such stagnation in the game (suppression of euphoric character). The value "285" is larger than twice the maximum payout number "120" allowed in the specification of one RB game and smaller than three times.

Other Embodiments
Next, another embodiment different from the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 is an appearance diagram showing an appearance of a slot machine which is another embodiment. The “image” in the following description includes still images and moving images, unless otherwise specified.

  In the past, in gaming machines, attention has been drawn to a game while waiting for a game as a measure against stagnation (a measure for reducing the number of players who play a game beyond their own ability). However, most of the players who are watching the demo screen are not the players who are really obsessed, but are the players who are about to start playing games, so they are able to exhibit the effects expected as a countermeasure for the troubles. In addition, the number of players who played games beyond their own ability was not reduced.

The entanglement is considered to occur as a result of the player being unable to make a calm decision. The following timings may be mentioned as timings at which it is highly likely that a calm judgment can not be made.
(1) Timing at Which AT Game Ends Since many game medals are awarded during AT game, it can be said that there is a high possibility that the player's mind will become large and a calm judgment can not be made. In addition, it can be said that there is a high probability that the AT game is likely to be hidden (it is not won in the AT lottery) and the cool judgment can not be made. Further, at the end of the AT game, the total number of game medals and the like given during the AT game is displayed on the image display device. At that time, if the number of gaming medals awarded during AT game is smaller than the number of gaming medals corresponding to the amount used so far, it is easy to fall into a feeling that it is likely to be recouped. Is likely to be unable to make a decision.
(2) Timing at which the bonus game ends Since a large number of game medals are awarded during the bonus game, it can be said that there is a high possibility that the player's mind will become large and a calm judgment can not be made. In addition, if the number of times the bonus combination is won is large, it is likely to have an expectation that the setting is high (for example, the set value is 5 or more), and it can be said that there is a high possibility that cool judgment can not be made. Furthermore, at the end of the bonus game, the total number of game medals and the like given during the bonus game is displayed on the image display device. At that time, if the number of game medals awarded during the bonus game is smaller than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount used so far, it is easy to fall into a feeling of being likely to get back Is likely to be unable to make a decision.

  Therefore, in another embodiment, the alerting is performed at the timing when the special game where many game medals such as the AT game and the bonus game can be awarded is ended.

  FIG. 73 shows an example of an end screen displayed on the image display device at the end of the special game and an image for calling attention (hereinafter, referred to as “alert calling image”). The end screen is an image showing at least the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX) given during the special game and the background. Note that an image indicating the total number (TOTAL XXX pieces) of game medals awarded during the special game may be prepared as an image separate from the image indicating the background (hereinafter, referred to as “background image”). In addition, the alert image is an image in which "Let's be careful to get stuck. Pachislot is a play that is enjoyed moderately."

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the size of the alert image displayed on the image display device at the end of the special game will be described. If the warning image is too small, the player can not recognize it, and can not exert the effect expected as an anti-glare measure. On the other hand, if it is too large, it may interfere with viewing of other images. In other words, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in another embodiment, if the image display device displaying the alerting image is less than 7 inches (in other words, if it is a small image display device), the size of the alerting image is 10.00 mm in height. The width is 64.12 mm. In addition, if the image display device that displays the alerting image is 7 inches or more (in other words, if it is a large image display device), the size of the alerting image is 30.00 mm long and 192.37 mm wide. And

  Next, referring to FIG. 75, the timing of displaying the end screen and the alerting image on the image display device will be described. FIG. 75 shows the final game of the special game, and when the game medal is awarded in the final game (when the small winning combination is won), the end screen and the alerting are displayed on the image display device after addition or payout as the number of credits. An image is displayed (FIG. 75 (a)). When no game medals are awarded in the final game (when the replay player wins, etc.), the image display device displays the end screen and the alerting image after the rotation of all the reels is stopped (FIG. 75 (b)) ).

  Next, the timing at which the end screen on the image display apparatus is not displayed will be described. One of the reasons for displaying the end screen is to teach the player the total number of game medals awarded during the special game. That is, it can be said that there is no problem even if the end screen is not displayed at a timing when it is considered that the player has recognized the total number of game medals awarded during the special game. Therefore, in another embodiment, the end screen is not displayed when the start switch is operated.

  In another embodiment, when the start switch is operated, an effect screen corresponding to the game situation at that time is displayed on the image display device. For example, if the game after the end of the bonus game or the AT game is a normal game, and the player has won the cherry role which is one of the small roles, it is determined that the cherry role as shown in FIG. 76 (a) is won. It is possible to display a suggested effect screen. In addition, if the game after the end of the bonus game is an AT preparation game, and one of the minors, i.e., the winning order bell, is won, the stop switch is operated in any order as shown in FIG. 76 (b). It is possible to display a push order image (hereinafter also referred to as a "navi image") indicating whether or not to be displayed and an effect screen during AT preparation game.

  Next, the time to continue displaying the alerting image will be described. If the time for displaying the alerting image is too short, the player can not recognize it and can not exert the effect expected as an anti-glare measure. In addition, even if they can be recognized, they do not care about it and can not exert the effect expected as a countermeasure against depression. On the other hand, if it is too long, it may interfere with viewing other images. In other words, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in another embodiment, the alerting image is continuously displayed only for a time which can exert the effect expected as the anti-glare measure and does not give the player an unpleasant feeling. The appropriate time for continuing to display the alert image will be described in order.

  First, with reference to FIG. 77, the time spent when the player plays a game in the shortest time will be described. After the start switch is operated, it takes about 180 ms from when the rotation of the reel starts to when the rotational speed of the reel becomes constant. In addition, the time it takes from the stop switch operation to the stop of reel rotation is at most 190 ms. It is specified in the separate table fifth (1) i (t) shown in). Furthermore, the time spent for adding the game medals granted as a credit number and the time spent for actually paying out are about 40 ms per card. That is, although the time spent when the player plays the game in the shortest time varies depending on the number of game medals awarded, it is not possible to operate a plurality of stop switches simultaneously (if the plurality of reels can not be stopped simultaneously) About 370 ms to about 1070 ms (when the number of game medals awarded is 0 to 8) and about 370 ms to about 690 ms if the specification is such that a plurality of stop switches can be operated simultaneously (a plurality of reels can be stopped simultaneously) It can be said that (when there are 0 to 8 game medals to be awarded).

  By the way, even if the player plays the game in the shortest time, it is not possible to end one game in less than the minimum game time (the minimum time required for one game is 4100 ms or more). This is the separate table 5 (1) li (i) indicated in Article 6 (Technical standard for model of gaming machine) concerning the qualification of gaming machine and examination of model etc. and interpretation of the technical standard It is defined in the standard. Therefore, in another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, even if the previous game is played in the shortest time and the start switch is operated, the reel rotation is started in the previous game. By setting 4100 ms after the start of the rotation, it is possible that one game will not end in less than the minimum game time.

  Generally, in the BB game which is one of the bonus games, a small winning combination requiring no eye-catching (a small winning combination that does not have to operate a stop switch aiming at a specific symbol) is won with high probability (always won It may be a specification). In addition, in the AT game, although it is necessary to operate the stop switches in a specific order, it is taught in which order to operate, although a push order bell combination and a push order replay role are elected. Furthermore, during the bonus game or AT game, the player is excited. Therefore, at least during the special game, many players are playing in the shortest time.

  As described above, even if the player plays a game in the shortest time, it is not possible to end one game in less than the minimum game time. That is, as shown in FIG. 79, when the final game of the special game is played in the shortest time, even if the start switch is operated immediately, it takes some time to start the rotation of the reels. Also, even if the rotation of the reel starts, it takes some time for the rotational speed of the reel to become constant. Since any operation by the player is invalid during these times, even if the alerting image is continuously displayed, the player does not feel discomfort, but even if these times are exceeded, the alerting image is Continuing to display may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. This is because at least the operation of the stop switch becomes effective if these times are exceeded, but the stop switch is because the indication of winning the cherry role as shown in FIG. 76 (a) and the alerting image overlap. (In order not to know which role to aim for) or because the alerting image is displayed, it may cause anxiety that the stop switch should not be operated. . Therefore, it is preferable that the time to continue displaying the alerting image does not exceed these times.

  Therefore, in another embodiment, an appropriate time for continuing to display the alerting image is set to 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. Note that the reason why 3000 ms or more is set is that it is considered that the longer it is, the longer it can be expected to exhibit the effect expected as the anti-glare measure.

  As shown in FIG. 80, it is assumed that a few players spend time playing special games even during special games. In that case, if the alerting image is continuously displayed for 3210 ms, at least the operation of the stop switch becomes effective on the way, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. However, since it is a player who takes time to play a game even during the special game, there is a high possibility that he / she does not think that there is a sense of discomfort than a player who plays a game in the shortest time. By the way, if the game is performed in the shortest time after hiding the alerting image, one game can be ended before the minimum game time has elapsed. Therefore, although it is possible to end the game once before the minimum game time has passed, the alerting image has been continuously displayed, so once before the minimum game time has elapsed. There are no complaints that you could not finish the game.

  Next, the position where the alerting image is displayed will be described. Basically, it is preferably displayed at a position where the player can easily recognize. One of the positions that the player can easily recognize is a position above the center of the housing. This is because the player's eyes are above the center of the box.

  In another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the image display device is provided above the center of the housing, and as shown in FIG. 73, the alert image is displayed above the center of the image display device.

  Of course, if the image display device is provided above the center of the housing, the upper side of the center of the image display device, the upper right corner of the upper center, the upper left corner of the upper center, the lower side of the center, the lower right corner of the center The alerting image may be displayed at the lower left corner from the center.

  In addition, it is preferable to determine the position at which the alert image is displayed, in consideration of the position at which another image is displayed. For example, it is preferable to display a warning image at a position not overlapping as much as possible with the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX pieces) awarded during the special game and the suggestion of winning the cherry role. In addition, it is preferable to display a reminder image at a position where the images do not overlap as much as possible.

  Furthermore, in another embodiment, a warning is issued even during game standby. FIG. 81 shows a demo screen displayed on the image display device while the game is on standby.

  When in the game standby mode, an image showing the manufacturer is displayed first (FIG. 81 (a)). Then, after the elapse of a predetermined time, a warning image is displayed (FIG. 81 (b)). Further, after the predetermined time has passed, an image introducing the subject matter of the slot machine is displayed (FIG. 81 (c)). As described above, during the game standby, FIGS. 81 (a) to 81 (c) are repeatedly displayed on the image display device.

  As described above, most of the players who are watching the demonstration screen are not the players who are really focused on, but are the players who are about to start playing games. Although it is conceivable to impress a player who is about to start playing a game in advance as a measure against depression, if excessive attention is given, there is a possibility that the game will be reduced. Therefore, in another embodiment, the time for which the image for alerting during the game standby is continuously displayed is shorter than the time for which the image for alerting at the end of the special game is continued to be displayed. In other words, it is less than 3000 ms. Specifically, it is 2000 ms or less. However, it is not limited to this.

  Incidentally, the position and the size at which the alerting image is displayed is the same as the position and the size when displayed at the end of the special game. This is because if the display position is changed depending on the situation, the burden on the sub control unit may increase. In addition, when the size is changed, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of images.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the case where an error occurs in the final game of the special game will be described. In another embodiment, even if an error occurs between when the start switch is operated and all reels stop rotating, the progress of the game is not stopped until all reels stop rotating. It has become. This is because if the progress of the game is stopped, the player's concentration may be cut off and a mistake may easily occur when the stop switch is operated. In addition, measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is performed while the progress of the game is stopped.

  Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped (when the progress of the game is stopped), an error image is displayed on the image display device. This is because if an error image is displayed when an error occurs, there is a possibility that the player may make a mistake in surprise. After that, when the error is canceled, the progress of the game is resumed (if the game medal is given, the game medal to be given is added or actually paid out as the number of credits), and the end screen and the attention on the image display device The awakening image is displayed.

  Although a certain amount of time will be spent before the error is released, the warning image is kept displayed for a predetermined time (more than 3000 ms and less than 3210 ms). Of course, since the alerting image will continue to be displayed even after the stop switch operation has become effective, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable, but if the time to continue displaying the alerting image is shortened, This is because there is a slight risk that the effect expected as a countermeasure against depression can not be exhibited. In addition, since it takes a certain amount of time before the error is cleared, it may not be uncomfortable if the alerting image continues to be displayed even after the stop switch operation is enabled. Is high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the case where an error occurs under the situation where the warning image is displayed at the end of the special game will be described. In another embodiment, when an error occurs before the start switch is operated, the progress of the game is stopped when the error occurs. In addition, measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is performed while the progress of the game is stopped.

  In addition, when the progress of the game is stopped, the image display device displays an error image superimposed on the warning image. By the way, since it is necessary to quickly notify the gaming staff that an error has occurred, the error image is set to have a higher priority than the alert image. Thereafter, when the error is canceled, the progress of the game is resumed (if the game medal is given, the game medal to be given is added or actually paid out as the number of credits), and the image display device does not have an error image. Display.

  A certain amount of time will be spent before the error is cleared, but it will be a predetermined time (over 3000 ms) without including the time for which the error image is displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared). , 3210 ms or less) keeps displaying the alert image. In addition, the time which has been continuously displayed before displaying an error image (an error occurs) is included. Of course, since the alerting image will continue to be displayed even after the stop switch operation has become effective, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable, but if the time to continue displaying the alerting image is shortened, This is because there is a slight risk that the effect expected as a countermeasure against depression can not be exhibited. In addition, since it takes a certain amount of time before the error is cleared, it may not be uncomfortable if the alerting image continues to be displayed even after the stop switch operation is enabled. Is high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the case where the supply of power is stopped under the situation where the alerting image is displayed when the special game is over will be described. In another embodiment, when the supply of power is stopped, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is also stopped, and when the supply of power is resumed, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is also restarted.

  In addition, when the power supply is stopped, the image display device is also stopped, and when the power supply is resumed, the image display device is also restarted. Note that the warning image is kept displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less), including the time that has been displayed before the power supply is stopped. As a result, as long as the player plays the game in the shortest time, the alerting image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop switch is enabled, and the player will not feel uncomfortable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the case where the effect switch is operated under the situation where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game will be described. In another embodiment, when the game medal is awarded, the game medal to be awarded is added or actually paid out as the number of credits, and then the game medal is inserted (the bet switch is operated, it is inserted from the insertion slot) When the effect switch is operated during the period, the menu screen is displayed on the image display device. Further, when the menu screen is displayed on the image display device, items such as password input, two-dimensional code display, and payout table can be selected. Specifically, each item can be selected by operating the cross key switch and the effect switch.

  Even when the effect switch is operated, the alerting image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). This is because if the alert screen is not displayed when the menu screen is displayed, there is a possibility that the effect expected as the anti-glare measure can not be exhibited.

  However, the position at which the alert image is displayed is a position at which the selected item is known. In other words, as long as the selected item is known, it may be displayed overlappingly. Further, the position at which the alert image is displayed is a position that does not overlap as much as possible with the two-dimensional code displayed when the two-dimensional code display is selected. This is to prevent the player who is about to finish the game from being unable to finish the game immediately by continuing to display the alerting image.

  In the other embodiment, at the end of the special game, the alert screen is displayed on the image display device together with the end screen, but when the number of game medals awarded during the special game is extremely small, the special game At the end of the process, the alert display image may not be displayed on the image display device.

  This is because if the number of game medals awarded during the special game is extremely small, the player's mind does not become large and is awarded during the special game than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount of money used so far. Even if the number of game medals is small, it is difficult to fall back on remorse (because it is almost impossible to recoup).

  As an example when the number of game medals awarded during the special game is extremely small, there are less than 300 in the AT game and 50 or less in the bonus game. Furthermore, although the alert screen is displayed on the image display device at the end of the special game or at a part of the demonstration screen, it is for each fixed time (for example, every hour), for every fixed number of games (for example, every 600 games) A predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) may be displayed, or a predetermined number of games (600 games) may be elapsed as a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) after the alert screen is displayed last It may be displayed. At this time, the warning screen may be displayed smaller at the upper right corner than the center of the image display device, or may be the same as the position and size when displayed at the end of the special game. In addition, when it is displayed, it may be displayed simultaneously with other effects (continuous effects, effects for showing advance effects, expectation, etc.), or it is set so that the period during display is an inoperable period. It is also good. By periodically displaying, it is possible to alert the player who is not executing the special game.

  In another embodiment, at the end of the special game, the alert screen is displayed on the image display device together with the end screen, but the alert screen may not be displayed when the end screen is not displayed. . For example, when the AT game is performed continuously 20 times, a moving image is displayed on the image display device during the 20th AT game. Then, even if the bonus combination is won during the 20th AT game, the moving image is to be continuously displayed on the image display device during the bonus game or at the end of the bonus game, so the image display device is used at the end of the bonus game. The end screen is not displayed. In such a case, the warning image may not be displayed because it also hinders viewing of the displayed moving image. However, at the end of the 20th AT game, it is preferable to display an end screen on the image display device and display a warning image.

  In the other embodiment, the size of the alerting image is the size shown in FIG. 74, but it may be a size that can exhibit the effect expected as the anti-glare measure, and the alerting larger than the size shown in FIG. It may be an image.

  Further, the size of the alerting image displayed at the end of the special game may be changed according to the situation. For example, the size when displaying together with the end screen and the size when displaying together with the effect screen may be different.

  In the other embodiment, when the game medal is awarded, the end screen and the alerting image are displayed on the image display device after addition or payout as the number of credits, but the image is displayed after the rotation of all the reels is stopped. It may be displayed on the display device, or may be displayed on the image display device when the last stop switch is released. When no game medals are given, the end screen and the alerting image are displayed on the image display device after the rotation of all the reels is stopped, but when the last stop switch is released, the image display device is used. It may be displayed.

  In the other embodiments, the end screen and the alerting image are displayed on the image display device at the same timing, but the alerting image may be displayed after the end screen is displayed. Furthermore, the warning image may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end screen was displayed.

  In the other embodiments, the end screen is not displayed when the start switch is operated regardless of whether or not the game medal is awarded in the final game, but the game medal is awarded in the final game. If the game medal is inserted (the bet switch is operated or inserted from the insertion slot), the end screen may be hidden.

  Also, the display may be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the end screen was displayed. This is because not only the end screen but also the alerting image is displayed on the image display device, there is a possibility that the player who feels uneasy may not operate the start switch.

  In the other embodiments, the image display device is provided above the center of the housing, but the image display device may be provided at the center of the housing. In this case, if a warning image is displayed above the center of the image display apparatus, above the center right corner, above the center left corner above the center, and at the center, the image is displayed at a position close to the height of the player's eyes. If only one image display device is provided, the player's line of sight gathers there, so the alerting image is displayed at the lower center, the lower right corner from the center, and the lower left corner from the center. It is also good.

  In addition, the image display device may be provided below the center of the housing due to the influence of the design of the housing and the like. It should be noted that if only one image display device is provided, the player's line of sight gathers there, so that the upper side above the center, the upper right corner above the center, the upper left corner above the center, the center, below the center and below the center A warning image may be displayed at the side right corner or the lower left corner from the center.

  Further, the position of the alerting image displayed at the end of the special game may be changed according to the situation. For example, the position when displaying with the end screen and the position when displaying with the effect screen may be different positions.

  In the other embodiments, FIG. 81 (a) to FIG. 81 (c) are repeatedly displayed during the game standby, but the order of display may be changed. For example, FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 82 (c) may be displayed repeatedly. The reason why the player sees the demonstration screen before starting the game is to confirm what the subject matter of the slot machine that is going to start the game is. As in the other embodiments, when an image for calling attention is displayed before an image for introducing the subject of the slot machine is displayed, there is a possibility that the game intention may be significantly reduced. It is preferable to change the order of Note that the order of replacement is not limited to this.

  In another embodiment, the time for which the alerting image is continuously displayed during the game standby time is less than 3000 ms, but if it is necessary to impress that the player who is about to start the game can not get into it in advance, 3000 ms. The display may be continued as above.

  In the other embodiments, the position and the size of the alerting image displayed during the game standby are the same as the position and the size when displayed at the end of the special game, but the display position and the size are status It may be changed by For example, as shown in FIG. 83, when a warning image is constantly displayed during game standby, it may be displayed smaller at the upper right corner than the center of the image display device. This is a device for preventing an excessive warning from being generated because the time for which the warning image is displayed is extended. In addition, the position and magnitude | size which are displayed are not restricted to this.

  In another embodiment, even if an error occurs between when the start switch is operated and all reels stop rotating, the progress of the game is not stopped until all reels stop rotating. However, the progress of the game may not be stopped until the game medals to be awarded are added or actually paid out as the number of credits (except when the game medals are not awarded).

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs between the time the start switch is operated and the rotation of all the reels is stopped, an error image is displayed on the image display device when the progress of the game is stopped. However, when an error occurs, an error image may be displayed. As a result, a game clerk can rush in, and the error can be canceled immediately after the progress of the game is stopped.

  In another embodiment, if an error occurs between the time the start switch is operated and the rotation of all the reels is stopped, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is performed while the progress of the game is stopped. Although it is made to be performed, measurement of the minimum game time may be stopped. As a result, as long as the player plays the game in the shortest time, the alerting image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop switch is enabled, and the player will not feel uncomfortable.

  In another embodiment, if an error occurs between when the start switch is operated and all reels stop rotating, the predetermined time (3000 ms) is taken regardless of the time taken to clear the error. As described above, the warning image is continuously displayed in 3210 ms or less), but the time for continuing the display of the warning image may be shortened by the time spent until the release of the error or the time corresponding to that time. For example, when it takes 60000 ms or more to clear the error, the alerting image may be continuously displayed for 1000 ms.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs under the situation where the warning image is displayed at the end of the special game, the error image is displayed superimposed on the warning image, but the warning image is not displayed. An error image may be displayed. Then, when the error is canceled, the error image may be hidden and the alerting image may be displayed. This is suitable when it is desired to make the error image and the alerting image have the same priority.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs under a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game, the time during which the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is canceled) The warning image is displayed continuously for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less), but the time during which the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is canceled) is not included. In addition, the alerting image may be displayed continuously for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). Since it is sufficient to continue displaying the alerting image for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) regardless of whether or not the error image is displayed (whether or not an error occurs), the sub control unit It is not necessary to increase the burden.

  In another embodiment, if an error occurs under the situation where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game, include the time that has been displayed before displaying the error image (error occurs) However, it is possible not to include the time that has been displayed before displaying the error image (an error occurs). This is suitable in the case where the player's consciousness is likely to deviate from the alerting image by displaying the error image.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs under the condition where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is performed even while the progress of the game is stopped. However, the measurement of the minimum game time may be stopped. As a result, as long as the player plays the game in the shortest time, the alerting image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop switch is enabled, and the player will not feel uncomfortable.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs under the situation where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game, the priority of the error image is set higher than that of the alerting image, but the priority of the alerting image is May be set higher than the error image. However, it is not preferable that the type of error that occurred can not be identified by the alerting image, so it is preferable to set the position where the alerting image is displayed to a position where the type of error that occurred does not overlap . In addition, as long as the type of the generated error can be specified, it may be overlapped.

  Also, in this case, a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) continues to display the alerting image, including the time during which the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is canceled). You may do so.

  In another embodiment, when the supply of power is stopped under the situation where the alerting image is displayed at the end of the special game, the time that has been displayed before the supply of power is stopped is included. However, it is possible not to include the time that has been displayed before the power supply has stopped. This is suitable in the case where there is a high possibility that the player's consciousness deviates from the alerting image because the supply of power is stopped.

  In the other embodiments, the image display apparatus is activated (resuming display) as soon as power supply is resumed, but power supply is also interrupted when using an image display apparatus that takes time to start up. The alerting image may be continued to be displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less), including the time which has been continuously displayed before. Depending on the time until activation, the alert image will continue to be displayed even after the stop switch operation is enabled, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable, but the alert image is displayed. If the time to continue is shortened, there is a slight risk that the effect expected as an intruding measure can not be exhibited. However, if there is a possibility of giving the player a great sense of discomfort, the time for which the alert image is kept displayed may be shortened by the time until activation or the time corresponding to that time. Note that the time that has been displayed before the supply of power stops may not be included.

  In another embodiment, when the game medal is awarded, the game medal to be awarded is added or actually paid out as the number of credits, and then the game medal is inserted (the bet switch is operated, it is inserted from the insertion slot) While the menu screen is displayed on the image display device when the effect switch is operated during the period, whether or not the game medal is given, it is until the start switch is operated, When the effect switch is operated, a menu screen may be displayed on the image display device.

  In another embodiment, the position at which the alert image is displayed is such that when the menu screen is displayed, the item being selected can be identified, but the item being selected can not be identified. May be By doing this, it is possible to suppress that the player's consciousness deviates from the alerting image.

  In another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, even if the alerting image continues to be displayed, the operation such as the start switch is effective (the game proceeds), but the alerting image is displayed. It may be frozen while continuing to be displayed. In other words, the operation of the start switch or the like may be invalidated (the progress of the game may be stopped). Although this will give the player a sense of discomfort, it is possible to maximize the effect expected as a measure against depression. Specifically, since the progress of the game is stopped for a long time, it is possible to lower the game intention to some extent. It is appropriate that the time for which the alerting image in this case continues to be displayed is a time at which the gaming intention can be reduced to some extent. However, if it is too long (for example, it is time longer than the minimum game time), there is a possibility that the player will not play again. Therefore, it is preferable that it is 3000 ms or more and less than 4100 ms.

  In the case of freezing, as shown in FIG. 84, after the end screen is displayed on the image display device, the end screen may be hidden and only the alerting image may be displayed. By displaying only the alerting image, the player's awareness can be directed to the alerting image with certainty, so that the effect expected as an intruding measure can be further exhibited. In addition, after a predetermined time (a predetermined time of 3000 ms or more and less than 4100) elapses after displaying the alerting image, the alerting image is not displayed and the end screen is displayed again. You may keep displaying only the alerting image.

  First, during the game standby time, it is displayed in the order of FIG. 81 (b), FIG. 81 (a), and FIG. 81 (c), and then at the time of FIG. (B) may be displayed continuously. This eliminates the need to prepare an image for displaying FIG. 84 (b).

  In the other embodiments, the warning is performed by the image display device, but the warning may be performed by a device other than the image display device. For example, the alerting image may be displayed on the panel portion of the housing located at a position easily recognizable by the player.

  The alert image is not limited to the illustrated one. For example, it may be an image clearly stating that "Pachinko / Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable game. Be careful with the entrapment." Or "Let's be careful with the entrapment. Pachinko / pachislot is a modestly enjoyable game."

  Note that the color and font of the characters are free as long as they are difficult for the player to recognize. For example, if the color is similar to the background image at the time of displaying the alert image, it may be difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, it is preferable that the color is different from the color that occupies most of the background image. In particular, it is preferable to use a color that is located diametrically opposite in the hue circle (hereinafter, also referred to as "opposite color") or a color that is close to the opposite color, because the color is noticeable.

  In the other embodiments, the maximum amount of eight game medals awarded during the special game is taken as an example to calculate the appropriate time to continue displaying the alerting image, but it is awarded during the special game. Even when the number of game medals is 8 or more and 15 or less, it is preferable that an appropriate time for continuing displaying the alerting image is 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. Certainly, when 15 game medals are awarded, the time spent is about 280 ms longer than when 8 game medals are awarded, so it is appropriate to keep displaying the alerting image for that amount If the time is shortened, it is possible to hide the alerting image before the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. However, it can be said that the probability of the player noticing the warning image is extremely low even if the warning image is not displayed about 280 ms after the operation of the stop switch is activated. If so, the longer the time can exhibit the effect expected as the anti-glare measure, it is preferable that the time suitable for continuing to display the alerting image is 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less.

  In addition, when the settlement process is performed after the alert screen is displayed, the alert screen may be ended even if the point when the settlement process is finished is less than 3 seconds from the start of the alert screen display. In that case, the display of the demonstration screen is started after the settlement processing is completed. This is because it is not necessary for the player to finish the game by the liquidation processing and to display the prevention of intrusion from displaying the warning screen on the demonstration screen. Also, by ending the alert screen, it is made clearer that the previous player is not playing a game, and the next player can play the game promptly without being confused whether the previous player is playing. Will be able to do.

  In addition, it is possible to combine suitably the embodiment mentioned above, the change aspect, and other embodiment, and also it is also possible to combine the modification mentioned above suitably with respect to each embodiment or those combination. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines other than slot machines (e.g., pachinko machines, casino machines, arrange balls, enclosed game machines etc. that do not use gaming medals or gaming balls).

  As an example of the enclosed type game machine, a game machine that can be played using an electronic game medium instead of a physical game medium such as a game medal or a game ball can be mentioned. In such a game machine, the number of electronic game media can be displayed by a multi-digit (two or more digits) seven-segment display. The electronic game medium may be inserted directly into the game machine by the player, or may be indirectly inserted from an apparatus provided outside the game machine according to the instruction of the player. It is also good. In the enclosed game machine, when the small winning combination is established, the electronic game medium is provided to the player (the number of electronic game medium displayed on the multi-digit seven-segment display increases).

  In addition, in the enclosed type game machine, an AT lottery or a bonus lottery (combination lottery for determining any one or more combinations of a plurality of combinations including a bonus combination) is performed. Then, when the AT lottery is won or the bonus lottery is won, an effect (also referred to as an adverse effect) for explaining that is also performed. By the way, even when the AT lottery is not won or the bonus lottery is not won, an effect for winning is performed. An example of an effect to be announced is a series of effects performed over a plurality of games, and an effect (a continuous effect to notify whether or not the AT lottery has been won at the end and whether or not the bonus lottery has been won And an effect (sometimes referred to as a prophecy effect) that displays on the image display device a background image that is easy to stay when winning an AT lottery or a bonus lottery. It can be mentioned.

  A game prohibition means may be provided to prevent the player from playing (inserting) using an amount of money exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 50,000 yen) on a day as a measure against depression. Specifically, the game can be inserted until the predetermined amount is reached, and can not be inserted more than the predetermined amount. This game prohibition means is an enclosed type game machine that can be directly or indirectly inserted. In the case of the enclosed type game machine may be provided, and in the case of the enclosed type game machine capable of indirect insertion, the apparatus provided outside the gaming machine corresponding to the enclosed type game machine is provided. May be

  In addition, the remaining number of electronic game media can be managed by a device provided outside the gaming machine (specifically, when ending the game, the electronic display displayed on a multi-digit 7-segment display) Game media may be deposited (stored) in a device provided outside the game machine, and may be inserted from the remaining number of stored electronic game media. In this case, the game prohibition means prevents the player from playing (inserting) using an amount exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 50,000 yen) a day, separately from the insertion from the balls. The total number of electronic game media inserted using storage and the number of electronic game media inserted from storage is more than the number obtained by converting a predetermined amount of money into electronic game media May not be allowed.

  Even if any of the enclosed type gaming machine or the device provided outside the gaming machine has a game prohibition means, in the enclosed type gaming machine, winning at AT lottery or winning at bonus lottery If the amount used by the player exceeds the predetermined amount while the AT game or bonus game pertaining to the notification is over after the Good. It is because it is too harsh that the player can not play the game despite the notification being made. In addition, the amount of money to be newly used is high (about 1000 yen to 2000 yen). By the way, when the AT game or bonus game is over, you may not be able to play the game (it was originally because you were not able to play the game), and it is displayed on the multi-digit seven segment indicator While the electronic game medium remains, it may be possible to play a game (an electronic game medium provided during an AT game or a bonus game, and it does not mean that a new amount is used. For that).

  In addition, one of the enclosed game machine or the device provided outside the game machine is equipped with a game prohibition means, and when one is won in the AT lottery or in the bonus lottery, one game is played. The number of electronic game media required (eg 3) and the number of electronic game media displayed on the multi-digit 7-segment display (eg 12 remaining) There is a difference between the amount of money being paid and a predetermined amount of money (for example, it has already reached 50,000 yen) (here, the situation is described to be judged by three pieces of information, but it is not limited to this) It may be determined by any two pieces of information, or three pieces of information may be added to one or more pieces of new information such as the remaining number information (so-called storage balls) of electronic game media managed by a device provided outside the gaming machine. In addition, it may be judged by AT lottery or Bona To determine the timing of until the announcement that they are winning the lottery (something announcement to after the game) is desirable. This is to suppress that the player can not play the game before notifying that he has won. In the case where the enclosed type game machine includes the game prohibition means, necessary information (a difference between the amount currently used by the player and a predetermined amount of money, etc.) can be used from the device provided outside the game machine. Information and remaining number information of usable electronic game media managed by a device provided outside the gaming machine are received and judged.

  In addition, in the case where either the enclosed type game machine or the device provided outside the game machine is equipped with the game prohibiting means, the situation in which the game can not be played soon (the electronic system required to play 1 game) In the case where the number of game media is 3, and the number of electronic game media displayed on the multi-digit 7-segment display is 3, the amount currently used by the player has reached a predetermined amount), It is desirable not to perform the rendezvous effect as the effect of the next game, regardless of whether the player has won the AT lottery or the bonus lottery. If it is not possible to play the game as soon as the lingering effect is performed, the interest of the game decreases and there is a possibility that the game will go away.

  In addition, before the game can not be played soon, it may be displayed that it may be impossible to obtain even if it becomes possible to obtain a profit if the game is continued. The display timing may be any state as long as the amount of money that can be lent out for a game medium capable of digesting the number of games necessary to receive the benefit based on the lottery result is notified from the trigger of the AT lottery or bonus lottery. The specified amount of money may be the timing when it reaches a specific amount of money (for example, 45,000 yen) lower than a predetermined amount of money. By this advice, it is possible to prevent a user from using a predetermined amount of money and not being able to receive a profit even though a profit (AT game, bonus game) can be obtained.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, a slot machine according to the eighth embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “slot machine of the eighth embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the slot machine of the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89A, a main control board 610 (corresponding to the above-mentioned main control board 60) for mainly performing control processing relating to the progress of the game, and the game And a game medal payout device 630 (corresponding to the above-described hopper 50) for paying out game medals according to the progress of the game. In addition, although not shown, it is necessary to play a game as a slot machine, such as a plurality of (for example, three) rotating cylinders (corresponding to the above-mentioned reels 3a, 3b, 3c) for fluctuating display of a plurality of types Components are included.

  The game medal payout device 630 rotationally drives a rotor disk (not shown) that rotates and drives a tank unit (not shown) for storing game medals, and a rotation drive for paying out game medals stored in the tank unit. And a hopper motor 637, two dispensing sensors 631, 632, and one swing light shield 635.

  The payout sensors 631 and 632 are, for example, a transmission type photo sensor (photo interrupter) in which a light emitting portion formed of an LED or the like and a light receiving portion formed of a photodiode or the like are opposed to each other. They are disposed within the swing range of the light shield 635, respectively. The swinging light shield 635 swings back and forth within a predetermined swinging range each time one game medal is paid out by the rotationally driven rotor disk, and during a single swinging motion, two payout sensors 631, The light emitting unit 632 is configured to pass between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. Due to the swinging of the swing light shield 635, the dispensing sensors 631 and 632 have a state in which only the dispensing sensor 631 is shielded (a state in which light from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit is blocked); Three states, a state in which both are not shielded from light and a state in which only the payout sensor 631 is shielded, are switched in a predetermined order (described in detail later).

  The main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 are electrically connected to each other. 89 (A), the payout sensors 631 and 632 of the game medal payout device 630 and the input ports of the main control board 610 are connected by two electric paths 651 and 652, and the hopper motor 637 of the game medal payout device 630 is connected. A state in which the output ports of the main control board 610 are connected by one electric path 655 is schematically shown. The electric path 651 transmits the detection signal (also referred to as “disbursement sensor 1 signal”) from the payout sensor 631 to the input port of the main control board 610, and the electric path 652 detects the detection signal from the payout sensor 632 (“ Also referred to as “dispensing sensor 2 signal” is transmitted to the input port of the main control board 610. The two electric paths 651 and 652 are pulled up to a predetermined voltage level (for example, DC + 5 volts) in the main control substrate 610, and the state of the dispensing sensors 631 and 632 (whether or not the light is blocked by the oscillating light shield 635 Each signal level is changed depending on whether or not (details will be described later).

  The electric path 655 transmits a signal (also referred to as a “hopper motor drive signal”) for driving the hopper motor 637 from the main control board 610 to the hopper motor 637. A hopper motor drive signal is transmitted from the main control board 610 to the hopper motor 637 via the electric path 655, and the hopper motor 637 receives this hopper motor drive signal, whereby the game medal payout device 630 is operated.

  FIG. 89A shows the electrical connection between the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 in a very simplified manner, and many other electric paths are actually provided. The electronic components such as the IC and the resistor are disposed on each of the electric paths as needed. In addition, another board may be disposed between the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630. In FIG. 89B, a relay board 620 is disposed between the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630, and the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 are electrically connected through the relay board 620. 6 schematically shows an example of a configuration connected in a simplified manner.

  In the example shown in FIG. 89B, three signal lines 651a, 652a, 655a are disposed between the connector 611 of the main control board 610 and the connector 621 of the relay board 620, and the connector 622 of the relay board 620 and Four signal lines 651 b, 652 b, 655 b and 655 c are disposed between the game medal payout device 630 and the connector 639. The signal line 651 b transmits the payout sensor 1 signal from the payout sensor 631 to the relay substrate 620, and the signal line 652 b transmits the payout sensor 2 signal from the payout sensor 632 to the relay substrate 620. The signal line 651a transmits the payout sensor 1 signal from the relay substrate 620 to the main control substrate 610 (input port), and the signal line 652a transmits the payout sensor 2 signal from the relay substrate 620 to the main control substrate 610 Transmission port). The electric path 651 is configured including the signal lines 651a and 651b, and the electric path 652 is configured including the signal lines 652a and 652b.

  A signal line 655a transmits a hopper motor drive signal from the main control board 610 (output port) to the relay board 620, and a signal line 655b transmits a hopper motor drive 1 signal from the relay board 620 to the game medal payout device 630 (hopper motor The signal line 655c transmits the hopper motor drive 2 signal from the relay substrate 620 to the game medal payout device 630 (hopper motor 637), and includes these signal lines 655a, 655b, 655c. And the electric path 655 is configured. When the hopper motor drive 1 signal and the hopper motor drive 2 signal are output with one signal level being L (Low) and the other signal level being H (High), the hopper motor 637 is driven and both signals are not output. Then, the hopper motor 637 is stopped. A single wire harness (also referred to simply as a "harness") is constituted by the signal lines 651a, 652a, 655a (and other signal lines not shown), and the signal lines 651b, 652b, 655b, 655c (and not shown). The other wire harness may be configured by another signal line of

  FIG. 90 shows the levels (voltage levels) of the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal input to the input port of the main control board 610 in the four states related to the payout sensors 631, 632 and in each state. It shows the relationship with Here, each state will be described.

  In the payout sensor state P01 shown in FIG. 6A, the payout sensor 631 is shielded by the swing light shield 635, and the payout sensor 632 is not shielded. In the payout sensor state P1, the photocurrent flows in the payout sensor 632 (photodiode) not shielded from light, whereby the current is drawn from the pull-up side to the payout sensor 632 side, and the payout sensor at the input port The levels of the two signals are configured to be L (Low). On the other hand, no light current flows in the payout sensor 631 which is shielded from light, whereby the payout sensor 631 side is in a high impedance state, and the level of the payout sensor 1 signal in the input port is H (High). It is done. The CPU (also referred to as “main board CPU”) of the main control board 610 recognizes the level of the payout sensor 1 signal by negative logic, and recognizes the level of the payout sensor 2 signal by positive logic. That is, for the dispensing sensor 1 signal, the signal is OFF (0 in the truth value) when it is H level, and the signal is ON (1 in the truth value) when it is L level, and H for the dispensing sensor 2 signal When the level is detected, the signal is ON, and when the level is L, the signal is recognized as OFF.

  The payout sensor state P02 shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which neither of the two payout sensors 631 and 632 is blocked. In this dispensing sensor state P2, photocurrent flows in the dispensing sensors 631 and 632, respectively, so that the levels of the dispensing sensor 1 signal and the dispensing sensor 2 signal at the input port both become L. It is configured. At this time, the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is ON and the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF.

  In the payout sensor state P03 shown in FIG. 5C, the payout sensor 632 is shielded by the swing light shield 635, and the payout sensor 631 is not shielded. In this dispensing sensor state P03, a photocurrent flows in the dispensing sensor 631 which is not shielded from light, whereby a current is drawn from the pull-up side to the dispensing sensor 631 side, and the level of the dispensing sensor 1 signal at the input port is L It is configured to be On the other hand, no light current flows in the shielded payout sensor 632 so that the payout sensor 632 is in a high impedance state, and the level of the payout sensor 2 signal at the input port is H. Further, at this time, the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is ON and the payout sensor 2 signal is also ON. The dispensing sensor states P01 to P03 are collectively referred to simply as the “dispensing sensor state”.

  In the non-energized state shown in (D) of the figure, there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630, specifically, the input port of the main control board 610. And the payout sensors 631 and 632 are not electrically connected. In such a non-energized state, for example, a wire harness connecting the main control substrate 610 and the relay substrate 620 or a wire harness connecting the relay substrate 620 and the game medal payout device 630 is disconnected or disconnected, or the main control substrate In the case where the game medal payout device 630 and the game medal payout device 630 are directly connected by a floating type drawer connector or the like, this occurs because the connection by the drawer connector is disconnected or the like. In this non-energized state, the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port and the level of the payout sensor 2 signal are both set to H. Further, at this time, the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is ON.

  When the game medal payout device 630 is activated and the game medals are paid out normally, as described above, the rocking light shield 635 reciprocates once for each game medal paid out. More specifically, the rocking light shield 635 is in the first position (the position of the payout sensor state P01 where only the payout sensor 631 is shielded) when the gaming medal payout device 630 is not in operation or immediately after the start of operation. In a process in which the game medal payout device 630 operates normally and a game medal is paid out, it passes from the first position to the second position (the position of the payout sensor state P02 in which neither of the payout sensors 631, 632 is shielded). , And moves to the third position (position of the dispensing sensor state P03 which shields only the dispensing sensor 632), and then returns to the first position through the second position.

  In FIG. 91, when the game medal payout device 630 operates normally after the turning drum has stopped and one game medal is paid out, the transition of the payout sensor state and the main control board 610 in each payout sensor state. Shows schematically the relationship between the payout sensor 1 signal and the ON / OFF of the payout sensor 2 signal recognized by the main board CPU and the levels of the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal input to the input port of .

  As shown in this figure, the dispensing sensors 631 and 632 are in the dispensing sensor state P01 (only the dispensing sensor 631 is shielded from light) until immediately after the spinning drum is rotated and stopped and the hopper motor drive signal is output (ON). State). At this time, the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port is H, the level of the payout sensor 2 signal is L, and the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF.

  After the hopper motor drive signal is turned ON, when the game medal payout device 630 is operated and payout of one game medal is started, the payout sensors 631 and 632 are in the payout sensor state P02 (both the payout sensors 631 and 632 are It will be in the state where it is not shielded. At this time, the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port is L, and the level of the payout sensor 2 signal is also L, and the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is ON and the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF.

  Next, the payout sensors 631 and 632 are in the payout sensor state P03 (a state where only the payout sensor 632 is blocked). At this time, the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port is L, the level of the payout sensor 2 signal is H, and the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is ON and the payout sensor 2 signal is also ON.

  Furthermore, the payout sensors 631 and 632 move to the payout sensor state P02 (a state in which both the payout sensors 631 and 632 are not shielded), and at this time, the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port is L, and the payout sensor 2 signal is The level also becomes L, and the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is ON and the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF.

  Then, at the final stage of payout of one game medal, the payout sensors 631 and 632 return to the payout sensor state P01 (a state in which only the payout sensor 631 is blocked). At this time, the level of the payout sensor 1 signal at the input port is H, the level of the payout sensor 2 signal is L, and the main board CPU recognizes that the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF. The hopper motor drive signal is turned OFF by the end of the payout of the game medal, and the payout sensor state P01 is maintained. When a plurality of game medals are paid out, the hopper motor drive signal is ON until the payout of all the game medals is completed. Then, when the first game medal is paid out, the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal recognized in the main substrate CPU both are OFF, the payout sensor 1 signal is ON, and the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF. Both signals are ON, the payout sensor 1 signal is ON, the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF, both signals are OFF, and both signals are OFF as well when the second and subsequent game medals are paid out. The payout sensor 1 signal is ON, the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF, both signals are ON, the payout sensor 1 signal is ON, the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF, and both signals are OFF. Then, the hopper motor drive signal is turned OFF by the end of the payout of the last game medal.

  As described above, when the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 are electrically connected and the game medal payout device 630 operates normally and the game medal is paid out, the payout recognized in the main substrate CPU Sensor 1 signal and payout sensor 2 signal are both OFF, payout sensor 1 signal is ON, payout sensor 2 signal is OFF, both signals are ON (these are collectively referred to as “sensor signal normal pattern It will only take). On the other hand, in the above-mentioned non-energized state, the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is ON (see FIG. 90D). Since such a pattern does not usually occur, the electrical connection between the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 is based on the occurrence of the pattern (also referred to as a “sensor signal abnormality pattern”). Occurrence of an abnormality (also referred to as “non-energized error”) can be detected.

  If the game is advanced under the situation where such a non-energization error has occurred, there is a risk that the player may be disadvantaged, for example, the game medals to be paid out may not be paid out. As a condition (cause) in which the non-energization error occurs, there is a forgetful return when the gaming medal payout device is cleaned. Since the game medal payout device is likely to collect dust and the like as it is used, cleaning work such as being removed from the gaming machine and being washed with water is routinely performed. In game arcades, several game medal payout devices may be cleaned at one time, or the game medal payout device removed for cleaning may not be returned to the gaming machine, or it may be forgotten to connect a harness etc. In the worst case, the game medal payout device which has been removed may be lost. If a game is played in such a state of forgetful return, it will not be possible to pay out the game medals to be paid out. In addition, even if you notice that you forgot to return the game medal payout device during the game, if you have lost the game medal payout device, you can not return itself. In the gaming machine, it is prohibited to use a substitute other than the authorized one accepted in the type test etc., so if the authorized game medal payout device is lost, the game can not be continued. Even if a game medal payout device which is forgotten to be returned is found, it must be returned to the gaming machine and then a harness or the like must be connected. When connecting a harness, etc., it is preferable to do with not only the gaming machine but with the power turned off, but in the case of a gaming machine, turning off the power during business will be an action that makes it possible to change settings. Because it is difficult. Therefore, the connection of the harness or the like may be performed in the state where the power is not dropped, which may cause an unexpected situation, for example, deletion of necessary information stored in the RAM or the like. In addition, it is also considered that a non-energization error has occurred as a result of the fraudulent behavior, and if the game is advanced as it is, there is a risk that the game arcade will suffer disadvantages. Therefore, in the slot machine of the eighth embodiment, when a non-energization error occurs, the game is stopped at a predetermined timing. 92 and 93 illustrate four situations (conditions Q01 to Q04) in which a non-energization error has occurred, and hereinafter, the timing at which the game is stopped in each situation will be described.

  In the situation Q01 in FIG. 92 (A), a non-conduction error occurs when all the turning drums have stopped and payout of gaming medals has not been made (the hopper motor drive signal is not output (OFF)). The case is shown. In the situation Q01, as illustrated, a sensor signal abnormality pattern is generated in which the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is recognized ON. As described above, when this sensor signal abnormality pattern occurs, the electrical connection between the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 is in an abnormal state (also referred to as "non-energized state"). It is shown that. However, since such a sensor signal abnormal pattern may occur instantaneously due to the influence of noise or the like, in the present embodiment, the sensor signal abnormal pattern has a predetermined time T01 (for example, 100 milliseconds) from the time of its occurrence. Although it is about time, but can be changed as appropriate, it is detected as a non-energization error, and then the game is stopped.

  Specifically, when a non-conduction error is detected, predetermined information (also referred to as a “non-conduction error detection flag”) indicating that is stored in a predetermined storage area such as a RAM provided in the main control board 610. (It is referred to as setting or turning on the de-energization error detection flag). Then, when it is confirmed in the error processing in the game progress processing described later that this non-power-on error detection flag is set, the non-power-on error detection flag is cleared (OFF) and the game is stopped. It has become. In the stopped game, a predetermined game resumption condition, for example, the non-energized state is canceled (for example, the disconnected wire harness is connected), and the reset button (corresponding to the reset switch 82 described above) is operated. If the condition (specific content may be changed as appropriate) is satisfied, the process is resumed. Hereinafter, the state from when the non-energization error detection flag is set to when the game resumption condition is satisfied and the game can be resumed can be referred to as “non-energization error detection state”. In the case of this example, since the time until the error processing is performed after the non-energization error detection flag is set is very short (since the error processing is performed frequently while the drum is stopped), the non-energization error has occurred. Once detected, the game will be stopped immediately.

  The situation Q02 in FIG. 92 (B) shows the case where the de-energized state occurs when the rotating drum is rotating (the hopper motor drive signal is OFF) and the de-energized state is canceled after the rotating drum stops. . In this situation Q02, as shown in the figure, a sensor signal abnormality pattern occurs during rotation of the drum, and the non-energization error detection flag is set when that state continues for a predetermined time T01. However, confirmation (determination) as to whether or not the non-energization error detection flag is set is not performed during rotation of the drum, but is performed in an error process after the drum stops. If it is confirmed that the non-energization error detection flag is set, the non-energization error detection flag is cleared and the game is stopped, and then the non-energization error detection state is canceled when the game resumption condition is satisfied. The game can be resumed.

  The situation Q03 in FIG. 93 (A) shows the case where the de-energized state occurs when the rotating drum is rotating (the hopper motor drive signal is OFF), and the de-energized state is canceled during the rotating drum rotation. There is. In this situation Q03, as shown in the figure, a sensor signal abnormality pattern occurs during rotation of the drum, and the non-energization error detection flag is set when that state continues for a predetermined time T01. However, the confirmation (determination) as to whether or not the non-energization error detection flag is set is not performed during the rotation of the drum, and is performed in the error process after the drum stops, as in the situation Q02. Therefore, the de-energized error detection flag is not cleared even if the de-energized state is canceled during the rotation of the drum, and the de-energized error detection flag is set in the error process after the rotating drum stops. If confirmed, the non-energization error detection flag is cleared and the game is stopped. After that, when the game resumption condition is satisfied (in the case of this example, since the non-energized state has already been eliminated, the reset button is operated) and the non-energized error detection state is canceled and the game can be resumed. Become.

  In addition, when the non-energization state generated during the rotation of the spinning drum is canceled before stopping the game (for example, during the rotation of the spinning drum), the game should be continued without stopping the game. Is also possible. However, since the cause of the occurrence of the de-energized state and the cause for its elimination may be the result of fraud, once the de-energized error is detected, the game should always be stopped, It is preferable to confirm the cause of the non-energization error. This makes it easier to find cheating if it has been done.

  In the situation Q04 in FIG. 93 (B), when setting change such as winning combination lottery probability is executed (the hopper motor drive signal is OFF), a non-energized state occurs, and the non-energized state is during execution of the setting change. It shows the case of resolution. In this situation Q04, as shown in the figure, a sensor signal abnormality pattern occurs during execution of setting change, and the non-energization error detection flag is set when that state continues for a predetermined time T01. The confirmation (determination) as to whether or not the non-energization error detection flag is set is not performed during the setting change, and therefore, the non-energization error detection flag is not cleared during the setting change. It should be noted that during the setting change, the game is stopped (in the figure, the fact that the game is stopped due to the setting being changed is referred to as "game stop A"), but when the setting change is over, this game stop A State is cleared. However, in the case of this example, since the non-energization error detection state continues even if the setting change is completed by the non-energization error detection flag being set during the setting change, the game remains stopped. (In the figure, the fact that the game is stopped due to the non-energization error detection state is denoted as “game stop B”). It is confirmed that the non-energization error detection flag is set in the error process after the setting change end, the non-energization error detection flag is cleared, and then the non-energization error detection state is canceled when the game resumption condition is satisfied. The game can be resumed.

  Other conditions may also occur under conditions where a deenergized error has occurred. For example, when a non-energization error occurs during rotation of the rotating drum, an abnormality may occur that causes rotation failure of the rotating drum at the same timing. The situation assumed when such a rotation failure occurs and the corresponding measures will be described below. As described above Q02 and Q03, if a non-energized state (non-energized error) occurs during rotation of the rotating drum, and rotation failure of the rotating drum occurs at the same timing at that time, the rotation failure causes it. There is a possibility that a situation can not occur in which the rotating drum can not be stopped at the expected planned stop position. For example, in the game when the winning combination is won, a non-energization error occurs during the turning of the cylinder after the third stop operation is received, and at that time, the rotation failure of the cylinder occurs at the same timing. In the first and second cylinders, the winning combination symbols are stopped and displayed on the activated line, but in the third cylinder, the winning combination symbols are not stopped and displayed on the activated line. In the slot machine of the eighth embodiment, a non-energization error occurs after the third stop operation is received, and a rotation failure occurs during the non-energization error, so that the winning combination symbol is effective in the third time. Even when the stop display can not be made on the line, the game medal can be paid out. That is, if it is internally determined that the winning combination is established when the third stop operation is accepted, the actual stop position is deviated due to the rotation failure which occurred during the occurrence of the non-energization error. Even in the case of the display judgment, however, the player is given a profit as having the same winning symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, and to proceed smoothly with the game. Of course, in the game when the winning combination is won, a non-energization error occurs during turning of the cylinder before the third stop operation is accepted, and after the third stop operation is accepted thereafter, the rotation defect occurs. Therefore, even if the winning combination symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line in the first and second torso, the winning combination symbols are not displayed and stopped on the effective line in the third torso, It is possible to pay out game medals.

  The same control can be performed even when a combination other than the winning combination is won. For example, when a winning combination that is established depending on the pushing order and the pressing position is won, and if it is internally determined that the winning combination will be established when the third stop operation is accepted, then (even before that Good) a non-energization error may occur, and a rotation failure may occur during the non-energization error, and the game medal may be paid out even if the winning combination symbol can not be stopped and displayed on the effective line. . On the other hand, although it was internally determined that the winning combination was not established when the third stop operation was received, a non-energization error occurs after that (or before that), and the rotation failure occurs during the non-energization error. When the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line due to the occurrence of the symbol, the game medal may not be paid out. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an unreasonable profit which would otherwise not be obtained. It is effective when de-energized errors are often caused by fraud.

  The same configuration can be applied to the case where a deenergization error occurs after receiving the first stop operation or the second stop operation, and a rotation failure occurs during the deenergization error. For example, a non-energization error occurs after the second stop operation is accepted, and a rotation failure occurs while the non-energization error occurs, and the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the first time, In the second cylinder, the winning combination symbol is not displayed stopped on the effective line, and thereafter, the non-energized state and the rotation defect of the rotating cylinder are resolved (in the case of the situation Q03), and the third stop operation achieves prizes in the third cylinder. If the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the game medal may be paid out. Similarly, a non-energization error occurs after the first stop operation is accepted, and a rotation failure occurs while the non-energization error occurs, and the winning combination symbol is not stopped and displayed on the effective line in the first time. After that, the case where the non-energized state and the rotation defect are eliminated, and the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the second and third cylinders by the second and third stop operations. The game medal may be paid out.

  In addition, when the game medal payout device 630 is in operation (the hopper motor drive signal is ON), the game may be stopped even when the de-energization state occurs and is detected as the de-energization error. For example, when a sensor signal abnormality pattern occurs while driving the game medal payout device 630, the state may be a predetermined time T02 (a length that is about the same as or longer than the predetermined time T01). , And may be as short as about 10 ms), and the de-energized error detection flag is set at successive times. Then, error processing is performed at a predetermined timing thereafter, for example, immediately after one game medal is paid out, and in the error processing, it is confirmed (judged) whether the non-energized error detection flag is set or not. . Here, if it is confirmed that the non-energization error detection flag is set, the non-energization error detection flag is cleared to stop the game (drive of the game medal payout device 630).

  Next, main control processing executed by the slot machine of the eighth embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIG. In the figures (A) to (C), there is shown a schematic flow of the game progress processing (corresponding to the aforementioned game progress control processing) executed once in one game along with the progress of the game (necessary for explanation) (D) shows an interrupt process (for the timer interrupt process described above) executed every predetermined time (for example, about 2 milliseconds) while the slot machine is operating. Corresponding) is shown.

  In the interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 94D, the input port is confirmed, and the information input to the input port is stored in a predetermined storage area such as a RAM (L11). For example, the state of the H level or L level of the payout sensor 1 signal or the payout sensor 2 signal at the input port is stored as information of ON (1) or OFF (0). Next, it is determined whether an error number is stored (L12). The error number is a number defined for each type of detected error, and is stored in an error process described later when an error is detected.

  Here, when the error number is stored, the interrupt return is performed as it is. On the other hand, when the error number is not stored, it is determined whether an error is detected (L13). Error detection is different for each type of error. In the case of a non-energization error, it is detected that it is confirmed that the sensor signal abnormality pattern continues for a predetermined time T01 based on the ON / OFF state of the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal. If an error is detected, an error detection flag (in the case of a non-conduction error, a non-conduction error detection flag) is set (L14). On the other hand, when an error is not detected, the error detection flag is not set, and the interrupt return is performed. In this example, if an arbitrary error number is stored in the determination of step L12, the interruption return is performed without performing the determination in step L13 (determination of whether or not an error is detected). However, the presence or absence of an error number may be determined for each type of error, and whether or not an error is detected may be determined based on the determination result. For example, the presence or absence of an error number corresponding to a non-energized error is detected, and if the error number is stored, it is not determined whether the non-energized error is detected or not, but other errors (for example, game medal retention It may be determined whether an error has been detected, or the presence or absence of an error number corresponding to a game medal retention error is detected, and if the error number is stored, a game medal retention error is detected. It may be determined whether another error (e.g., non-energized error) has been detected or not.

  In the game progress processing, as shown in FIG. 94A, the error processing (K11) is repeatedly executed until the operation of the start lever is effectively accepted. In this error processing, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), it is determined whether an error detection flag is set (ON) (K21). If the error detection flag is not ON, the error processing is finished and the process returns. On the other hand, when the error detection flag is ON, an error number corresponding to the type of the detected error is stored (set) in a predetermined storage area (K22). For example, when the non-energization error detection flag is ON, an error number previously associated with the non-energization error is set.

  After setting the error number, the non-energized error detection flag is cleared (K23). Thereafter, until the reset button is operated and the cause of the error is removed, the determination process of step K24 (determination process of whether or not the reset button is operated), the determination process of step K25 (the cause of the error is removed The determination process of whether or not to repeat is repeated. As a result, the game stays in error processing and can not advance to the next step of the game progress processing, so that the progress of the game is stopped. The method of determining whether the cause of the error has been eliminated differs depending on the type of error. In the case of a non-energization error, when it is confirmed that the sensor signal abnormal pattern has been eliminated, it is determined that the error cause has been eliminated. When the reset button is operated and the cause of the error is eliminated, the error number is cleared (K26), and the process returns from the error processing.

  Returning from the error processing, if the operation of the start lever is effectively accepted (in the case of YES at step K12), a role lottery is performed (K13). After the role lottery, all the drums are rotated (K14), and the determination processing of step K15 (processing for determining whether all drums have stopped) is repeated until the rotation of all the drums is stopped. In addition, since the error processing is not performed during rotation of the drum, the game is not stopped. However, interrupt processing is repeatedly performed even during rotation of the drum, and error detection is performed there (as an example of changing the mode, error processing is performed during rotation of the drum, and an error is detected in the interrupt processing) May stop the game). When all the drums have stopped (YES in step K15), display determination processing (K16) is performed.

  In this display determination process, as shown in FIG. 94C, an error process is performed (K31). In the error processing here, when the error detection flag ON is confirmed, the progress of the game is stopped as described above. That is, although the game is not stopped even if an error is detected (the error detection flag is set) during the rotation of the drum, if the entire drum is stopped, the game is stopped based on the error detection during the rotation of the drum. . After this error processing, it is determined whether a winning combination has been established (K32). The winning determination here is not performed by the symbols actually stopped on the active line as described above, but based on whether or not the establishment of the winning combination selected by the lottery is internally determined. It will be. Therefore, for example, even when the third stop operation is accepted, the rotation defect of the rotating drum occurs, and it is not possible to stop the rotating drum at the expected planned stop position due to it, the internal winning combination is established When is determined, payout of game medals is performed.

  When it is determined that the winning combination has been established, the determination process of step K33 (determination processing as to whether or not the payout of the skill medal is completed) until the payout of the game medals corresponding to the established winning combination is completed. Is repeatedly performed, and when the payout of the game medals is completed, the process returns from the display determination process. Although not shown, a process similar to the error process is also performed during payout of the game medals. Specifically, during execution of the process of paying out one game medal (also referred to as "one-sheet payout process"), a process for detecting an error (in the case of a non-current error, the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2) The process of confirming the ON / OFF state of the signal is repeatedly performed (may be performed as a process in the one-sheet delivery process or may be performed in the interrupt process), and when an error is detected (in the case of a non-energized error) (When it is confirmed that the sensor signal abnormality pattern has continued for a predetermined time T02), the processing after step K22 of the error processing is executed. Therefore, even when an error is detected during the payout of the game medal, the game (payout of the game medal) is stopped.

  According to the slot machine of the eighth embodiment, the non-energization error is detected based on the ON / OFF pattern of the dispensing sensor 1 signal and the dispensing sensor 2 signal, and the non-energization error is detected. If you do, you are supposed to stop the game. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the player suffers from a disadvantage without the game medal being advanced due to the progress of the game under the situation where the non-energization error has occurred and the game medals to be paid out are not paid out. It becomes. In addition, since it is possible to stop the game even when a non-energization error occurs temporarily due to the fraudulent conduct, the gaming medal is illegally obtained and the gaming shop is not successful. It also makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a benefit is incurred.

  In the eighth embodiment described above, two dispense sensors 631 and 632 are used, and the pattern of the dispense sensor 1 signal and the dispense sensor 2 signal from these is a sensor signal abnormality pattern, and a non-energization error is detected. The occurrence has been detected. In addition, by detecting the transition state of the pattern of the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal (the required time when making a transition, etc.) when paying out the gaming medals, it is determined that the gaming medal is jammed or the gaming medal is paid out. It is also possible to accurately detect the disappearance of In addition, the installation number of the payout sensor used for detection, the specific configuration, the pattern of the sensor signal, and the like are not limited to the examples described above, and can be appropriately changed.

  For example, in the above example, a pattern in which the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF and the payout sensor 2 signal is ON is regarded as a sensor signal abnormality pattern, but a pattern in which the payout sensor 1 signal is ON and the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF is a sensor signal abnormality A pattern is used, and a pattern in which both the dispensing sensor 1 signal and the dispensing sensor 2 signal are off is regarded as a sensor signal abnormality pattern (in these cases, a pattern in which the dispensing sensor 1 signal is off and the dispensing sensor 2 signal is on is a sensor signal normal pattern ) Is also possible. The point is that each pattern may be any pattern as long as the pattern when no deenergization error occurs and the pattern when no deenergization error occurs. As the dispensing sensor, a reflection type photo sensor may be used, and the configuration of the rocking light shielding member may be appropriately set (for example, a configuration in which a state in which two dispensing sensors are shielded from light simultaneously) may be used. It is possible.

  Alternatively, only one payout sensor may be installed (for example, only the payout sensor 632 may be installed), and the non-energization error may be detected. When using one dispensing sensor, for example, the signal from the dispensing sensor (disbursing sensor 2 signal) is always off when the hopper motor is not driven (dispensing sensor 2 signal level is L), and while the hopper motor is in operation It is configured to be sequentially switched from ON to ON to OFF, and if it is ON for a predetermined time or more when the hopper motor is not driven, it is detected that a non-energization error has occurred, and ON for a predetermined time or more while the hopper motor is driven. Alternatively, if it remains OFF, it may be detected that the game medals are full or the game medals are lost, respectively. For example, only the payout sensor 631 may be installed. It is also possible to constitute so that error detection may be performed using three or more payout sensors.

  Also, in the above example, if the error cause is not removed, the error processing can not be ended (see step K25 in FIG. 94B), but even if the error cause is not removed, If the reset button is operated, the error processing may end and the game may be resumed. However, when the error processing is ended without removing the cause of the error, it is preferable that after the resumption of the game, the error is detected again and the game is stopped again.

  Further, in the above-described example, the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 are electrically connected via the one relay board 620, and directly by the harness or the drawer connector without the relay board. In the configuration shown, the main control board 610 and the game medal payout device 630 may be electrically connected via a plurality of relay boards. Further, instead of pull-up (pull-down) in the main control substrate 610, pull-up may be performed in the relay substrate.

  The configuration of the eighth embodiment described above can be used in appropriate combination with the configuration of another embodiment described in this specification. Further, the eighth embodiment is not limited to the slot machine (roll-type game machine), and it is possible to use another game machine, for example, as long as it has a device for paying out game media. The present invention is also applicable to pachinko gaming machines and casino machines.

The ninth embodiment
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the ninth embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as "slot machine of the ninth embodiment"), specifically, for the main board case in which the main control board is accommodated, FIGS. It explains, referring to it. The basic configuration of the slot machine according to the ninth embodiment is the same as that of the slot machine according to the first embodiment, and thus the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the slot machine of the ninth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the main control board 710 is provided with a main board case unit 700 which is accommodated in the main board case 720 and unitized. As described above, the main board case unit 700 mainly includes the main control board 710 and the main board case 720 accommodating the main control board 710. As shown in FIG. 96, the main control board 710 has electronic components such as a microprocessor 712 having a CPU function, a plurality of IC elements (not shown), a plurality of resistors (not shown), and an electrical connector 713. Etc. and the printed circuit board 711 on which these are mounted. In the main board case unit 700, the upper portion (back plate (not shown)) in the main body case is mounted so that the mounting surface of the printed circuit board 711 on which the microprocessor 712 or the like is mounted faces forward (becomes front). (Not shown) mounted on the inner surface).

  The microprocessor 712 is a one-chip type in which an IC chip mounted with a central processing unit (CPU), a read only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM) and the like is enclosed in a rectangular parallelepiped package body. It is a microcomputer. On the surface of the microprocessor 712 is affixed a type indication seal 716 in which the type name (or product name) of the corresponding slot machine is described. Moreover, on the outer peripheral side of the printed circuit board 711, a plurality of electrical connectors 713, 713... Are mounted. At four corners of the printed board 711, screw holes 714 through which a board fixing screw 786 (see FIG. 95) can be inserted are formed.

  As shown in FIG. 95, main substrate case 720 has case main body 721 and case cover 741, and main control substrate 710 is housed in the case formed by combining case main body 721 and case cover 741. It is configured to be possible. As shown in FIG. 97, the case body 721 is formed of a transparent resin material such as ABS resin by molding and formed in a rectangular box shape having an open front side. At the lower part of the case main body 721, three hinge engaging piece parts 722, 722, 722 are formed. A hinge shaft (not shown) formed on the lower portion of the case lid 741 is rotatably engaged with the hinge engagement piece 722. With the hinge shaft (not shown) of the case lid 741 engaged with the hinge engaging piece 722 of the case body 721, the case lid 741 is swingably connected to the case body 721.

  A first main body side coupling portion 723 and a second main body side coupling portion 724 are formed on the left and right upper portions of the case main body 721. The first main body side coupling portion 723 is formed in a dovetail shape extending in the vertical direction. The first base portion 762 (see FIG. 99) of the first caulking member 761 is inserted into and engaged with the first main body side coupling portion 723 from the lower side. The second main body side coupling portion 724 is also formed in a dovetail shape extending in the vertical direction. The second base portion 767 (see FIG. 99) of the second caulking member 766 is inserted into and engaged with the second main assembly side coupling portion 724 from the lower side. At the upper left end of the case main body 721, a main body side temporary engagement portion 725 is formed. The main-body temporary engagement portion 725 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending in the front-rear direction. When the main substrate case unit 700 is recovered, the first cylindrical portion 763 (or the first tubular member 761 (or the second crimping member 766) of the used (cut) first crimping member 761 (or the second crimping member 766) The second tubular portion 768 can be engaged. A main body side sealing portion 726 sealed by a sealing cover 781 is formed on the center upper left side of the case main body 721. A planar main body side adjacent surface portion 731 adjacent to the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 of the case lid 741 in a state of being joined to the case main body 721 is formed on the center upper right side of the case main body 721.

  On the main body side adjacent surface portion 731, the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the main body side device type number marking portion 734 are formed to project further forward than the flat portion of the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 (see also FIG. 102) ). The main unit side model name marking portion 732 is disposed at the lower part of the main unit side adjacent surface portion 731 and has a marking shape indicating a diagonally upper half of the product logo (model name) of the corresponding slot machine. At least the front end portion of the main body side model name imprinting portion 732 which forms the upper diagonal half of the product logo is formed to project more forward than the flat portion of the main body side adjacent surface portion 731. The portion recessed from the front end of the main unit side model name marking portion 732 may be projected forward of the flat portion of the main unit adjacent surface portion 731 depending on the marking shape, and may be a flat portion of the main unit adjacent surface portion 731 The height may be the same, or the surface may be recessed more than the flat surface portion of the adjacent main surface 731. The surface (front surface) of the main unit side model name marking portion 732 may be formed in a curved surface that is gently curved as a whole. A body-side texturing portion 733 is formed at an intermediate portion which does not constitute characters of the product logo or the like in the body-side model name marking portion 732. The main-body-side embossing part 733 is formed to have a bowl-like concavo-convex shape. In addition, since the uneven | corrugated shape of the main body side crimp formation part 733 is fine, it has shown typically in FIG. 97, FIG. 101, and FIG. The main unit side model type number marking portion 734 is disposed in the middle portion (above the main unit side model name marking portion 732) of the main unit side adjacent surface portion 731 and (for example, formed of a combination of numbers and alphabets) of the main substrate case unit 700. It is formed to have a marking shape indicating a model type management number.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the case lid 741 is formed of a transparent resin material such as an ABS resin, and formed into a rectangular lid shape with an open rear side by molding. At the lower portion of the case lid 741, three hinge shaft portions (not shown) engageable with the three hinge engaging pieces 722, 722, 722 of the case body 721 are formed. At four corners on the rear side of the case lid 741, board fixing holes (not shown) aligned with the screw holes 714 of the main control board 710 (printed board 711) are formed. By inserting the board fixing screw 786 into the screw hole 714 of the main control board 710 and screwing it to the board fixing hole (not shown) of the case lid 741, the main control board 710 is the rear side of the case lid 741 Attached to).

  A first lid-side coupling portion 743 and a second lid-side coupling portion 744 are formed at upper left and right of the case lid 741. The first lid side coupling portion 743 is formed in a bottomed double cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction. The first cylindrical portion 763 (see FIG. 99) of the first caulking member 761 is engaged with the first lid side coupling portion 743 (inner cylinder side). The second lid side coupling portion 744 is also formed in a bottomed double cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction. The second cylindrical portion 768 (see FIG. 99) of the second caulking member 766 is engaged with the second lid side coupling portion 744 (inner cylinder side). At the upper left end of the case lid 741, a lid side temporary engagement portion 745 is formed. The lid-side temporary engagement portion 745 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction. The lid-side temporary engagement portion 745 includes the first cylindrical portion 763 (or the first crimped portion 761 (or the second crimp member 766) of the used (cut) first crimped member 761 when collecting the main substrate case unit 700. The second tubular portion 768 can be engaged. A lid-side sealing portion 746 which is sealed by the sealing cover 781 together with the body-side sealing portion 726 is formed on the central upper left side of the case lid 741. A planar lid side adjacent surface portion 751 adjacent to the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 of the case main body 721 coupled to the case lid 741 is formed on the center upper right side of the case lid 741.

  In the lid side adjacent surface portion 751, the lid side model name marking portion 752 and the lid side device type number marking portion 754 are formed to project further forward than the flat portion of the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 (see also FIG. 102). ). The lid-side model name marking portion 752 is disposed on the top of the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751 and has a marking shape indicating a lower diagonal half of the product logo (model name) of the corresponding slot machine. At least the front end portion of the lid-side model name marking portion 752 that forms the lower diagonal half of the product logo is formed to project further forward than the flat portion of the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751. The portion recessed from the front end portion of the lid-side model name imprinting portion 752 may protrude forward of the flat surface portion of the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751 depending on the marking shape, and may be a flat portion of the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751 The height may be the same, or it may be recessed from the flat portion of the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751. The surface (front surface) of the lid-side model name marking portion 752 may be formed in a curved surface that is gently curved as a whole. A lid-side texturing portion 753 is formed at an intermediate portion of the lid-side model name imprinting portion 752 that does not constitute characters of the product logo or the like. The lid-side texturing portion 753 is formed to have a bowl-like concavo-convex shape. In addition, since the concavo-convex shape of the lid side texturing part 753 is fine, it is schematically shown in FIG. 98, FIG. 101, and FIG. The lid-side device type number marking portion 754 is disposed in the middle of the lid-side adjacent surface portion 751 (below the lid-side model name marking portion 752), and is made of a combination of a number and an alphabet, for example. It is formed to have a marking shape indicating a model type management number.

  When the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 are joined, as shown in FIGS. 101 and 103, the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 are adjacent to each other. Adjacent to the name marking portion 752, an integral marking indicating the product logo of the corresponding slot machine is formed by the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the lid side model name marking portion 752. With the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 joined and the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 adjacent to each other, as shown in FIG. 103, the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side A plurality of marking portions (hereinafter referred to as first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J in order from the left side of FIG. 103 for the sake of explanation) are formed side by side across the adjacent surface portion 751 in the left-right direction. Each shape of the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J can arbitrarily set any shape among the numbers from 0 to 9, and the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J can display 10 digits. Is configured to be printable. The first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J can be arbitrarily set in their shapes, and therefore, are simplified and illustrated in FIG.

  Of the first to tenth marking units 755A to 755J, the second to eighth marking units 755B to 755H are formed to overlap the main unit model name marking unit 732 and the lid unit model name marking unit 752. But have an integral inscription indicating the (corresponding) slot machine product logo and a different marking shape (number shape). Therefore, for example, when the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J are visually recognized, the integral marking by the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the lid side model name marking portion 752 and the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755A It is possible to distinguish and recognize a 10-digit number according to 755J.

  In addition, the part in which the 2nd-8th marking parts 755B-755H in the main body side model name marking part 732 and the lid side model name marking part 752 are formed is shaved off by laser marking. Therefore, by touching the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the lid side model name marking portion 752 by hand (at least the front end portion), the main surface side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 project further forward than flat portions The second to the fourth formed by cutting (recessing) the main body side model name imprinting portion 732 and the lid side model name imprinting portion 752, and the main body side model name imprinting portion 732 and the lid side model name imprinting portion 752 It can be recognized that the eight marking units 755B to 755H are legitimate. Even if the main board adjacent surface part and the lid side adjacent surface part are formed by laser marking alone, even if the main substrate case unit is illegally copied, the laser marking is performed by laser marking alone. A portion corresponding to each model name engraved portion is cut (recessed) and formed on the main body side adjacent surface portion and the lid side adjacent surface portion. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the relevant part (that is, the main board case unit) is illegally copied by touching the part corresponding to each model name inscription part.

  In the center of the front face of the case lid 741, a seal attaching portion 747 to which the caulking use recording seal 784 (see FIG. 95) is attached is formed. The seal affixing portion 747 is formed in a rectangular hollow shape that matches the outer peripheral shape of the caulking use recording seal 784. The caulking use record seal 784 is formed in a transparent sheet shape on which a table for printing the date when the main substrate case 720 is sealed (hereinafter, may be referred to as caulking use record) is printed.

  In addition, a plurality of connector exposure portions 748 that expose the electrical connectors 713 provided on the main control board 710 are formed in each portion of the case lid 741. A bracket connecting portion 749 for connecting the main substrate case unit 700 (main substrate case 720) to a bracket member (not shown) in the main body case is formed at the right end of the case lid 741.

  The main control board 710 is the main board case 720 except for the electrical connectors such as the microprocessor 712 and a plurality of IC elements (not shown) mounted on the printed board 711 of the main control board 710. A case lid 741 covers the case in a state of being accommodated inside the case. As described above, the case body 721 and the case lid 741 are formed using a transparent resin material, and the microprocessor 712, a plurality of IC elements (not shown), etc. can be viewed from the outside of the case lid 741. Is configured. Then, the seal attaching portion 747 described above is formed on a portion of the front surface of the case lid 741 which does not overlap with the microprocessor 712. Thereby, it is checked whether the microprocessor 712 is tampered with via the case lid 741 without being blocked by the caulking use recording seal 784 (sticked to the seal sticking portion 747). be able to. Also, confirm the type name (or product name) of the slot machine described in the type indication seal 716 (attached to the microprocessor 712) through the case lid 741 without being blocked by the caulking use record seal 784. Can.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the first caulking member 761 is formed into a block shape by molding using a (colored) resin material such as ABS resin, and is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped first shape formed on the rear side. A first base portion 762 and a cylindrical first cylindrical portion 763 formed on the front side. The first base portion 762 engages with the first main body side coupling portion 723 of the case main body 721 in a state in which the first main body side guard member 771 is covered. The first main body side guard member 771 is formed in a box shape covering the periphery of the first base portion 762 using a metal plate material. The locking claw 762 a formed on the side portion of the first base portion 762 locks the locking hole 771 a formed on the side portion of the first main body side guard member 771, whereby The state in which the main body side guard member 771 is covered is maintained. The metal first main body side guard member 771 covers the periphery of the first base portion 762 to prevent unauthorized access to the first base portion 762 engaged with the first main body side coupling portion 723 of the case main body 721. be able to.

  The first tubular portion 763 is adapted to engage with the first lid side coupling portion 743 of the case lid 741 in a state where the periphery is covered with the first lid side guard member 776 (see FIG. 95). . As shown in FIGS. 95 and 100B, the first lid side guard member 776 is formed in a rectangular frame shape using a metal plate material, and the first lid formed in a double cylindrical shape in the case lid 741. It is attached to the gap between the inner and outer tubes in the side joint portion 743. The first lid side guard member 776 made of metal covers the periphery of the first tubular portion 763 to allow unauthorized access to the first tubular portion 763 engaged with the first lid side joint portion 743 of the case lid 741. It can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the second caulking member 766 is formed similarly to the first caulking member 761 and has a second base portion 767 and a second cylindrical portion 768. The second base portion 767 is engaged with the second main body side coupling portion 724 of the case main body 721 in a state in which the second main body side guard member 772 is covered. The second main body side guard member 772 is formed similarly to the first main body side guard member 771. The locking claw 767a formed on the side portion of the second base portion 767 locks the locking hole 772a formed on the side portion of the second main body side guard member 772 so that the second base portion 767 The state in which the main body side guard member 772 is covered is maintained. The metal second body side guard member 772 covers the periphery of the second base portion 767 to prevent unauthorized access to the second base portion 767 engaged with the second body side coupling portion 724 of the case body 721. be able to.

  The second tubular portion 768 engages with the second lid side coupling portion 744 of the case lid 741 in a state where the periphery is covered by the second lid side guard member 777 (see FIG. 95). . The second lid side guard member 777 is formed similarly to the first lid side guard member 776 as shown in FIGS. 95 and 100B, and is formed in a double cylindrical shape in the case lid 741. It is attached to the gap between the inner and outer tubes in the lid side joint portion 744. The second lid side guard member 777 made of metal covers the periphery of the second tubular portion 768 to allow unauthorized access to the second tubular portion 768 engaged with the second lid side coupling portion 744 of the case lid 741. It can be prevented.

  The first base portion 762 of the first caulking member 761 and the first main body side joint portion 723 of the case main body 721 engage with each other, and the first cylindrical portion 763 of the first caulking member 761 and the first lid of the case lid 741 By engaging with the side coupling portion 743, the first main body side coupling portion 723 of the case main body 721 and the first lid side coupling portion 743 of the case lid 741 are coupled. The second base portion 767 of the second caulking member 766 engages with the second main body side coupling portion 724 of the case main body 721, and the second cylindrical portion 768 of the second caulking member 766 and the second lid of the case lid 741. The second body side coupling portion 724 of the case main body 721 and the second lid side coupling portion 744 of the case lid 741 are coupled by engagement with the side coupling portion 744. Thus, using the first caulking member 761 and the second caulking member 766, the first main body side coupling portion 723 and the second main body side coupling portion 724 of the case main body 721, and the first lid side joint portion of the case lid 741. The case cover 741 is connected to the case main body 721 so as to cover the main control board 710 by connecting the second cover 744 to the second cover 744. Furthermore, a case fixing screw 787 (see FIG. 95) for fixing the (connected) case lid 741 to the case body 721 is attached so as to straddle the case body 721 and the case lid 741. .

  As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the sealing cover 781 is formed of a transparent resin material such as ABS resin by molding, thereby sealing the main body side sealing portion 726 of the case main body 721 and the lid side sealing portion 746 of the case lid 741. Is formed in a box-like shape that can be sealed. In a state where the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 are joined, the sealing seal 783 is pasted across the main body side sealing portion 726 and the lid side sealing portion 746 which are vertically adjacent to each other. The sealing cover 781 is attached to the main-body-side sealing part 726 and the lid-side sealing part 746 by slidingly moving downward from above the main-body-side sealing part 726 so as to cover the sealing seal 783. A cutter member 782 having a cutting portion on the tip end side is attached to the sealing cover 781 attached to the main body side sealing portion 726 and the lid side sealing portion 746, and the cutting portion of the cutter member 782 is disposed inside the sealing cover 781. It has become so. Therefore, when the sealing cover 781 is slid upward and removed, the sealing seal 783 is cut by the cutting portion of the cutter member 782.

  A method of manufacturing main substrate case unit 700 configured as described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. First, a component manufacturing process PC11 is performed to manufacture each component of the main substrate case unit 700. In the component production step PC11, for example, the above-mentioned hinge engaging piece 722, the first main body side joint portion 723, the second main body side joint portion 724, the main body side temporary engagement portion 725, and the main body side sealing portion The case main body 721 is manufactured to have the main body side adjacent surface portion 731, the main body side model name marking portion 732, the main body side machine type number marking portion 734 and the like. In addition, the above-mentioned hinge shaft (not shown), the first lid side coupling portion 743, the second lid side coupling portion 744, the lid side temporary engagement portion 745, the lid side sealing portion 746, and the seal attachment The case lid 741 is manufactured to have the portion 747, the connector exposed portion 748, the bracket coupling portion 749, the lid side adjacent surface portion 751, the lid side model name marking portion 752, the lid side machine type number marking portion 754 and the like.

  The shapes of the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the main body side machine type number marking portion 734 of the case main body 721 are changed according to the type (model) of the corresponding slot machine. Considering the manufacturing cost of the main board case unit 700, it is difficult to totally change the shape or the like of the main board case unit 700 every time the slot machine model changes. On the other hand, in consideration of measures against fraud, it is preferable to change the shape or the like of the main board case unit 700 even if only a part of the slot machine is changed each time the type of slot machine changes. Therefore, in the molding die of the case main body 721, a nest is used for a portion corresponding to the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 on which the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the main body side machine type number marking portion 734 are formed. Similarly, the shapes of the lid-side model name marking portion 752 and the lid-side device type number marking portion 754 of the case lid 741 are also changed in accordance with the model of the corresponding slot machine. Therefore, in the mold for the case lid 741, a nest is used for a portion corresponding to the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 on which the lid side model name marking portion 752 and the lid side machine type number marking portion 754 are formed. The machine type management number indicated by the main body side machine type number marking portion 734 and the lid side machine type number marking portion 754 is a number for managing the nesting of the molding die. The main body side adjacent surface portion 731 is formed on a part of the front surface of the case main body 721, but in each of FIGS. 95, 97, 101, and 103, the nested portion of the mold is formed on the front surface of the case main body 721. The portion to be formed is indicated by a two-dot chain line as a portion corresponding to the main body side adjacent surface portion 731. The lid side adjacent surface portion 751 is formed on a part of the front surface of the case lid 741, but in each of FIGS. 95, 98, 101, and 103, the nest portion of the mold is formed on the front surface of the case lid 741. The portion to be formed is indicated by a two-dot chain line as a portion corresponding to the lid side adjacent surface portion 751.

  Further, for example, the first caulking member 761, the second caulking member 766, the sealing cover 781, the cutter member 782, and the like are manufactured by molding. Also, a microprocessor 712, a plurality of IC elements (not shown), a plurality of resistors (not shown), a plurality of electrical connectors 713, 713, etc. are mounted on the mounting surface of the printed circuit board 711 by soldering or the like. By doing this, the main control substrate 710 is manufactured.

  Next, an assembly process PC12 for assembling the main substrate case unit 700 is performed. In the assembly process PC12, the first base portion 762 of the first caulking member 761 is engaged with the first main body side coupling portion 723 of the case main body 721 in a state in which the first main body side guard member 771 is covered. The second base portion 767 of the second caulking member 766 is engaged with the second main body side coupling portion 724 of the case main body 721 in a state in which the second main body side guard member 772 is covered. The main control board 710 is attached to the rear side of the case lid 741 using the board fixing screw 786. The first lid side guard member 776 is attached to the gap between the inner and outer cylinders in the first lid side joint portion 743 of the case lid 741. The second lid side guard member 777 is attached to the gap between the inner and outer cylinders in the second lid side joint portion 744 of the case lid 741.

  In this state, the hinge shaft (not shown) of the case lid 741 is engaged with the hinge engaging piece 722 of the case body 721, and the case lid 741 is swung so as to cover the front side of the case body 721. At this time, with the first base portion 762 of the first caulking member 761 and the first main body side coupling portion 723 of the case main body 721 engaged, the first cylindrical portion 763 of the first caulking member 761 and the case lid 741 The first lid side coupling portion 743 of the case main body 721 and the first lid side coupling portion 743 of the case lid 741 are coupled by engagement with the first lid side coupling portion 743. With the second base portion 767 of the second caulking member 766 engaged with the second main body side coupling portion 724 of the case main body 721, the second cylindrical portion 768 of the second caulking member 766 and the second cylindrical portion 742 of the case lid 741 The second main body side coupling portion 724 of the case main body 721 and the second lid side coupling portion 744 of the case lid 741 are coupled by the engagement with the lid side coupling portion 744.

  Thereby, the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 are combined, and the main control board 710 is accommodated inside the case. When the case body 721 and the case lid 741 are joined, the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 are adjacent to each other as described above, and the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the lid side model name marking portion 752 Adjacent to each other, the main body side model name imprinting portion 732 and the lid side model name imprinting portion 752 form an integral stamp indicating the product logo of the corresponding slot machine.

  Furthermore, the case lid 741 is fixed to the case main body 721 using the case fixing screw 787. Further, in a state where the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 are joined, the sealing seal 783 is pasted across the main body side sealing portion 726 and the lid side sealing portion 746 which are vertically adjacent to each other. The sealing cover 781 is slid downward from above the main body side sealing portion 726 so as to cover the sealing seal 783, and is attached to the main body side sealing portion 726 and the lid side sealing portion 746. The cutter member 782 is attached to the sealing cover 781 attached to the main body side sealing portion 726 and the lid side sealing portion 746. The main body side sealing portion 726 and the lid side sealing portion 746 to which the sealing seal 783 is attached are sealed by the sealing cover 781. In addition, a caulking use recording seal 784 is pasted to the seal pasting portion 747 of the case lid 741. In this manner, main substrate case unit 700 is assembled.

  And marking process PC13 which performs laser marking with respect to the assembled main board case unit 700 is implemented. In the marking step PC13, first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J are formed across the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 by laser marking using a CO 2 laser processing machine. For example, the manufacturing control number of the main board case unit 700 is set as the 10-digit number printed by the first to tenth marking units 755A to 755J. At this time, the machine type management number indicated by the main body side machine type number marking portion 734 and the machine type management number indicated by the lid side machine type number engraving portion 754 are displayed by a predetermined reader (not shown) such as a camera. The laser marking may be started after it is read and it is confirmed that the read each type-of-machine management number is the proper type-of-machine management number. This can prevent the laser marking from being performed on the case main body 721 and the case lid 741 of the wrong combination. In addition, when laser marking is performed by reading the machine type management number indicated by the main body side machine type number marking portion 734 and the machine type management number indicated by the lid side machine type number marking portion 754, the first to tenth marking portions are performed. The number font (typeface) printed by 755A to 755J may be set to be a different font (typeface) for each of the corresponding machine type management numbers.

  According to the present embodiment, the case main body 721 has the main body side model name marking portion 732 formed to project forward in the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and is manufactured by molding, and the case lid 741 is on the lid side. It has lid side model name marking portion 752 formed to project forward on adjacent surface portion 751, and is manufactured by molding processing. Then, the case body 721 and the case lid 741 are combined, the main control board 710 is accommodated in the case, and the main body side model name marking portion is in a state where the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 are adjacent. 732 and the lid-side model name marking portion 752 are adjacent to form an integral marking (for example, an integral marking indicating a product logo of a slot machine). In this way, the front ends of the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the lid side model name marking portion 752 that form an integral mark protrude forward with respect to the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 Therefore, it becomes difficult to form the main body side model name imprinting portion 732 and the lid side model name imprinting portion 752 by cutting, and it takes time to duplicate the case main body 721 and the case lid 741.

  Furthermore, marking portions (second to eighth marking portions 755B to 755H) having marking shapes (number shapes) different from integral markings by the main unit side model name marking unit 732 and the lid side model name marking unit 752 by laser marking. Is formed straddling the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the lid side model name marking portion 752. As a result, the surface shapes of body-side model name imprinting portion 732 and lid-side model name imprinting portion 753 become complicated, and duplication of case body 721 and case lid 741 takes time, so the main substrate case unit 700 is illegal. It is possible to prevent duplication.

  For example, in the case where a portion having the same shape as each model name imprinting portion and the marking portion is formed only by laser marking, the main substrate case unit including the portion can be relatively easily replicated. On the other hand, as described above, the substrate case unit 700 in which marking portions (second to eighth marking portions 755B to 755H) are formed across the main body side model name imprinting portion 732 and the lid side model name imprinting portion 752 is perfect. In order to duplicate, it has the same manufacturing process as this embodiment (specifically, the process of producing the case main body 721 by molding so as to have the main body side model name imprinting portion 732 and the lid side model name imprinting portion 752 As described above, it is necessary to go through the steps of manufacturing the case lid 741 by molding and forming the marking portion by laser marking. In addition, the portions where the marking portions (second to eighth marking portions 755B to 755H) in the main unit side model name imprinting unit 732 and the lid side model name engraving unit 752 are formed by laser marking are scraped off with the present embodiment. Even if it passes through the same manufacturing process, it is very difficult to perfectly reproduce the main body side model name imprinting portion 732 and the lid side model name imprinting portion 752 in which the marking portion is formed by laser marking.

  Further, by molding processing, a main body side crimp forming portion 733 having a bowl-like concavo-convex shape is formed in the middle portion of the main body side model name marking portion 732, and in the middle portion of the lid side model name marking portion 752. A lid-side embossing part 753 having an uneven shape is formed. As a result, the surface shapes of body-side model name imprinting portion 732 and lid-side model name imprinting portion 752 become more complicated, and duplication of case body 721 and case lid 741 takes time. Duplication can be prevented. Even if the case body 721 and the case lid 741 are to be copied using a 3D printer, it is difficult to form the body side imprint forming portion 733 and the lid side imprint forming portion 753 having a ridge-like uneven shape (general In particular, even if it is intended to form the main-body-side embossing part 733 and the lid-side embossing part 753 using a 3D printer, the surface becomes smooth without being able to form a bowl-like uneven shape. The main board case unit illegally copied is easy by confirming the shapes of the body side model name imprinting portion 732 and the lid side model name imprinting portion 752 (body side imprint forming portion 733 and lid side imprint forming portion 753) Can be found.

  In the above-described ninth embodiment, a main body side imprint forming portion 733 having a bowl-like concavo-convex shape is formed in the middle portion of the main body side model name marking portion 732, and in the middle portion of the lid side model name marking portion 752. Although the lid side embossing part 753 which has convex-shaped uneven shape is formed, it is not restricted to this. For example, the entire surface (front surface) of the body-side model name imprinting portion 732 and the entire surface of the lid-side model name imprinting portion 752 may be formed with a bowl-like unevenness, the surface of the body-side model name imprinting portion 732 And, at least a part of the surface of the lid-side model name imprinting portion 752 may be formed to have a bowl-shaped unevenness.

  In the ninth embodiment described above, the main body side model name marking portion 732 and the main body side machine type number marking portion 734 are formed on the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 of the case main body 721. Although the lid side model name marking portion 752 and the lid side model type number marking portion 754 are formed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main body side adjacent surface portion 731 and / or the lid side adjacent surface portion 751 A manufacturer indicia may be formed indicating the manufacturer.

  In the above-described ninth embodiment, each shape of the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J can be arbitrarily set to any of the numbers from 0 to 9, but is not limited thereto. Absent. For example, each of the shapes of the first to tenth marking portions 755A to 755J may be any shape of any of the alphabets from A to Z, and the numbers from 0 to 9 and A to Z may be set. The shape of any of the alphabets up to may be set arbitrarily.

  In the ninth embodiment described above, the marking portions 755A to 755J are formed by laser marking using a CO 2 laser processing machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the case body 721 and the case lid 741 are manufactured using a transparent resin material such as polycarbonate, the marking portions 755A to 755J are formed by laser marking using a YVO4 laser processing machine. May be When the YVO4 laser processing machine is used, the marking portions 755A to 755J change color with respect to other portions in the case main body 721 (main body adjacent surface portion 731) and the case lid 741 (lid side adjacent surface portion 751). In this case, in order to ensure visibility of the microprocessor 712 and the like of the main control board 710, the marking portions 755A to 755J are formed on a portion of the front surface of the case lid 721 (case main body 721) sufficiently distant from the microprocessor 712. It is preferable to be done. To the extent that the visibility of the microprocessor 712 on the front surface of the case lid 741 (the case body 721 and the like), such as a portion that does not overlap with the microprocessor 712 on the front surface of the case lid 741, as a portion sufficiently away from the microprocessor 712 There is a part far enough away.

  In the above-described ninth embodiment, the main control board 710 is configured to be accommodated in the case formed by combining the case main body 721 and the case lid 741, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the main control board 600 of the fourth embodiment may be configured to be accommodated. In addition, the main control substrate 710 is accommodated in the main substrate case 720 and is not limited to the unitized main substrate case unit 700, but the sub control substrate is accommodated in the sub substrate case and is united to the sub substrate case unit It is also possible to apply this embodiment. In addition to slot machines (roll-type game machines), for example, pachinko game machines, arrange balls, ball ball machines, (arcade) game machines, control machines in casino machines, etc. It is possible to apply this embodiment also to the integrated substrate case unit.

1 Slot Machine 3a, 3b, 3c Reel 25 Start Lever 26a, 26b, 26c Stop Switch 60, 600 Main Control Board 70 Sub Control Board 70A Sub Main Control Board 70B Sub Sub Control Board 100 Main Control Means 200 Sub Control Means 200 A Sub Main Control Means 200B Sub-sub control means 610 main control board 620 relay board 630 game medal payout device 631, 632 payout sensor 635 rocking light shield 637 hopper motor 700 main board case unit (ninth embodiment)
710 main control board 720 main board case 721 case main body (first case member)
731 Body side adjacent surface portion 732 Body side model name imprinting portion 733 Body side wrinkle forming portion 741 Case lid (second case member)
751 lid side adjacent surface portion 752 lid side model name imprinting portion 753 lid side imprint portion 755A to 755J first to tenth marking portions

Claims (2)

A first case member, a second case member that can be combined with the first case member, and a case formed by combining the first case member and the second case member are housed in the case, and the operation of the gaming machine A method of manufacturing a substrate case unit of a gaming machine having a control substrate for performing control related to
A first adjacent surface portion adjacent to the one side surface of the second case member formed on the one side surface of the first case member and coupled to the first case member, and the first adjacent surface portion Manufacturing the first case member by molding so as to have a first imprinted portion formed to protrude to the side,
The second adjacent surface portion adjacent to the first adjacent surface portion of the first case member formed on the one side surface of the second case member and coupled to the second case member, and the second adjacent surface portion The second case member is manufactured by molding so as to have a second imprinted portion formed to protrude to one side,
The first case member and the second case member are combined, and the control substrate is accommodated in the case, and the first adjacent surface portion and the second adjacent surface portion are in a state of being adjacent to each other. (1) forming an integral stamp by bringing the stamped portion and the second stamped portion adjacent to each other;
A manufacturing method of a substrate case unit of a gaming machine, wherein a marking portion having a marking shape different from the integral marking is formed across the first marking portion and the second marking portion by laser marking.   At least a part of the surface on the one side of the first marking portion and the surface on the one side of the second marking portion are wedge-shaped by the molding processing of the first case member and the molding processing of the second case member. A method of manufacturing a substrate case unit of a game machine according to claim 1, wherein the method is formed with the unevenness of